INSTRUCTION MANUAL ENGLISHgsmedia.weebly.com/.../54742287/canon_eos_700d-en_manual.pdf ·...

INS

TR

UC

TIO

N M

AN

UA

L

The “Quick Reference Guide” is included at the end of this manual.INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

ENGLISH

www.devicemanuals.eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

2

The EOS 700D is a high-performance, digital single-lens reflex

camera featuring a fine-detail CMOS sensor with approx.

18.00 effective megapixels, DIGIC 5, high-precision and high-speed

9-point AF, approx. 5 fps continuous shooting, Live View shooting, and

Full High-Definition (Full HD) movie shooting.

The camera is highly responsive to any shooting situation, and provides

many features for demanding shots.

Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further Familiarize Yourself with the CameraWith a digital camera, you can immediately view the image you have

captured. While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how

they come out. You can then better understand the camera.

To avoid botched pictures and accidents, first read the “Safety

Warnings” (p.349, 350) and “Handling Precautions” (p.16, 17).

Testing the Camera Before Use and LiabilityAfter shooting, play images back and check whether they have been

properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the

images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon

cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.

CopyrightsCopyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded

images or copyrighted music and images with music in the memory

card for anything other than private enjoyment. Also be aware that

certain public performances, exhibitions, etc., may prohibit photography

even for private enjoyment.

Introduction

This camera is compatible with SD memory cards, SDHC memory

cards, and SDXC memory cards. In this manual, “card” refers to all

these cards.

* The camera does not come with a card for recording images/

movies. Please purchase it separately.

Cards that can record moviesWhen shooting movies, use a large-capacity SD card rated SD Speed Class 6

“ ” or higher (p.173).


mmediately view the image you have

www.devic

eman

uals.

eummediately view the image you have

captured. While reading this manual, take a few test shots

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucaptured. While reading this manual, take a few test shots

they come out. You can then better understand the camera.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthey come out. You can then better understand the camera.

cidents, first read the “Safety

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucidents, first read the “Safety

Warnings” (p.349, 350) and “Handling Precautions” (p.16, 17).

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWarnings” (p.349, 350) and “Handling Precautions” (p.16, 17).

Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Testing the Camera Before Use and LiabilityAfter shooting, play images back and check whether they have be

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

After shooting, play images back and check whether they have be


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Ca

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Ca

cannot be held liable for any lo

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ss or inconvenience caused.

Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorde

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorde

images or copyrighted music and imageswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

images or copyrighted music and images

card for anything other than private enjoyment. Also be aware www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

card for anything other than private enjoyment. Also be aware

3

Before starting, check that all the following items have been included

with your camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.

* Battery Charger LC-E8 or LC-E8E is provided. (The LC-E8E comes with a

power cord.)

If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lens is included.

Depending on the Lens Kit type, a lens instruction manual may also be

included.

Be careful not to lose any of the above items.

Item Check List

Battery Pack

LP-E8

(with protective cover)

Battery Charger

LC-E8/LC-E8E*

Interface CableWide Strap

EW-100DB IV

Camera

(with eyecup and body cap)

EOS Solution Disk

(Software)

EOS Software

Instruction Manuals

Disk

EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk XXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

CEL-XXX XXX

© CANON INC. 20XX. Made in the EU.

EOS Solution Disk XXX

CEL-XXX XXX


Windows XXX XXX

Mac OS X XXX XXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

Camera

Instruction Manual

(this booklet)

EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk

The Software Instruction Manuals are included on the CD-ROM as

PDF files. See page 367 for instructions on using the EOS Software

Instruction Manuals Disk.


XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

CEL-XXX XXX



Interface Cable

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Interface Cable









EOS Solution Disk

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

EOS Solution Disk


4

Icons in this Manual

<6> : Indicates the Main Dial.

<V> : Indicates the <S> Cross keys.

<0> : Indicates the Setting button.

0, 9, 7, 8 : Indicates that the corresponding function

remains active for 4 sec., 6 sec., 10 sec., or 16

sec. respectively after you let go of the button.

* In this manual, the icons and markings indicating the camera’s buttons, dials,

and settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera and on the

LCD monitor.

3 : Indicates a function that can be changed by pressing the

<M> button and changing the setting.

M : When shown on the upper right of a page, it indicates that the

function is available only in the Creative Zone modes (p.24).

(p.**) : Reference page number for more information.

: Warning to prevent shooting problems.

: Supplemental information.

: Tips or advice for better shooting.

: Problem-solving advice.

Basic Assumptions

All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch

is already set to <1> (p.34).

It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are

set to their defaults.

The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the

EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens as an example.

Conventions Used in this Manual


and settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera

www.devic

eman

uals.

euand settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera

: Indicates a function that can be changed by pressing the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu: Indicates a function that can be changed by pressing the

> button and changing the setting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button and changing the setting.

: When shown on the upper right of a page, it indicates

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: When shown on the upper right of a page, it indicates

the Creative Zone modes (p.24).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the Creative Zone modes (p.24).


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Basic Assumptionswww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Basic Assumptions

5

For first-time DSLR users, Chapters 1 and 2 explain the camera’s

basic operations and shooting procedures.

Chapters

Introduction 2

Getting Started 27

Basic Shooting and Image Playback 57

Creative Shooting 85

Advanced Shooting 109

Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting) 145

Shooting Movies 173

Handy Features 203

Wireless Flash Photography 229

Image Playback 241

Post-Processing Images 273

Printing Images 279

Customizing the Camera 295

Reference 305

Downloading Images to a Personal Computer 361

Quick Reference Guide and Index 369

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

www.devic

eman

uals.

euShooting with the LCD Monitor

www.devic

eman

uals.

euShooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(Live View Shooting)

Wireless Flash Photography

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Wireless Flash Photography

Image Playback

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Image Playback

Post-Processing Imageswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Post-Processing Imageswww.devicemanuals.eu







6

Contents at a Glance

Shooting

Shoot automatically p.57 - 75 (Basic Zone modes)

Shoot continuously p.104 (i Continuous shooting)

Take a picture of yourself in a group p.106 (j Self-timer)

Freeze the action p.110 (s Shutter-priority AE)

Blur the action

Blur the background p.64 (C Creative Auto)

Keep the background in sharp focus p.112 (f Aperture-priority AE)

Adjust the image brightness (exposure) p.119 (Exposure compensation)

Shoot in low light p.58, 107 (D Flash photography)

p.92 (ISO speed setting)

Shoot without flash p.63 (7 Flash Off)

p.76 (b Flash Off)

Photograph fireworks at night p.116 (Bulb exposure)

Shoot while viewing the LCD monitor p.145 (A Live View shooting)

Using Creative Filters p.152 (Creative filters)

Shoot movies p.173 (k Movie shooting)

Image Quality

Shoot with image effects matching the subject p.95 (Picture Style)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Shutter-priority AE)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Shutter-priority AE)


p.64

www.devic

eman

uals.

eup.64 (

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(C

www.devic

eman

uals.

euC Creative Auto)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Creative Auto)

p.112

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu p.112 (

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(f

www.devic

eman

uals.

euf


Adjust the image brightness (exposure)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Adjust the image brightness (exposure)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


p.119

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

p.119

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




Photograph fireworks at night

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Photograph fireworks at night

Shoot while viewing the LCD monitorwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Shoot while viewing the LCD monitorwww.devicemanuals.eu






7

Make a large-size print of the picture p.88 (73, 83, 1)

Take many pictures p.88 (7a, 8a, b, c)

Focusing

Change the point of focus p.100 (S AF point selection)

Shoot a moving subject p.70, 98 (AI Servo AF)

Playback

View the images on the camera p.84 (x Playback)

Search for pictures quickly p.242 (H Index display)

p.243 (I Image browsing)

Rate images p.248 (Ratings)

Prevent important images p.266 (K Image protect)

from accidental deletion

Delete unnecessary images p.268 (L Delete)

Auto play images and movies p.258 (Slide show)

View the images or movies on a TV set p.262 (Video OUT)

Adjust the LCD monitor brightness p.205 (LCD monitor brightness)

Printing

Print pictures easily p.279 (Direct printing)



98

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu98 (AI Servo AF)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(AI Servo AF)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


p.84

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

p.84


Search for pictures quickly

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Search for pictures quickly


Prevent important images

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Prevent important images


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



Delete unnecessary imageswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Delete unnecessary imageswww.devicemanuals.eu








8

Power

Battery

� Charging p.28

� Installing/Removing p.30

� Battery check p.35

Power outlet p.306

Auto power off p.34

Card

Installing/Removing p.31

Format p.48

Release shutter without

card p.204

Lens

Attaching/Detaching p.39

Zoom p.40

Image Stabilizer p.41

Basic Settings

Dioptric adjustment p.42

Language p.38

Zone/Date/Time p.36

Beeper p.204

LCD Monitor

Using the LCD Monitor p.33

LCD auto off/on p.217

Brightness adjustment p.205

Touch screen p.53

Recording Images

Creating/Selecting a folder p.206

File numbering p.208

Image Quality

Image-recording quality p.88

Picture Style p.95

White balance p.137

Color space p.141

Image enhancement features

� Auto Lighting Optimizer p.125

� Lens peripheral

illumination correction p.129

� Chromatic aberration

correction p.130

� Noise reduction for

long exposures p.127


high ISO speeds p.126

� Highlight tone priority p.299

AF

AF operation p.97

AF point selection p.100

Manual focusing p.103

Drive

Drive mode p.22

Continuous shooting p.104

Self-timer p.106

Maximum burst p.90

Shooting

Shooting mode p.24

ISO speed p.92

Feature guide p.52

Bulb p.116

Mirror lockup p.142

Metering mode p.117

Remote control p.307

Quick Control p.44

Index to Features










p.41

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

p.41

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


p.42

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

p.42

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


p.38

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

p.38

� Chromatic aberration

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu� Chromatic aberration


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu� Noise reduction for

long exposures

www.devic

eman

uals.

eulong exposures


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu� Noise reduction for

high ISO speeds

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

high ISO speeds

� Highlight tone priority

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� Highlight tone priority

AF

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AF

9

Index to Features

Exposure Adjustment

Exposure compensation p.119

AEB p.121

AE lock p.123

Flash

Built-in flash p.107

� Flash exposure

compensation p.120

� FE lock p.124

External flash p.309

Flash control p.218

� Wireless flash p.229

Live View Shooting

Live View shooting p.145

Autofocusing (AF)

methods p.159

Continuous AF p.156

Touch Shutter p.168

Aspect ratio p.157

Grid display p.156

Quick Control p.151

Creative filters p.152

Movie Shooting

Movie shooting p.173

Movie Servo AF p.196

Sound recording p.198

Grid display p.198

Manual exposure p.177

Still photo shooting p.182

Quick Control p.184

Video snapshot p.187

Playback

Image review time p.204

Single-image display p.84

Shooting information

display p.270

Index display p.242

Image browsing

(Jump display) p.243

Magnified view p.244

Image rotate p.247

Rating p.248

Movie playback p.254

Editing out movie’s

first/last scene p.256

Slide show p.258

Viewing images on TV p.262

Protect p.266

Erase p.268

Quick Control p.250

Image Editing

Creative filters p.274

Resize p.277

Printing

PictBridge p.282

Print Order (DPOF) p.289

Photobook Set-up p.293

Customization

Custom Functions (C.Fn) p.296

My Menu p.303

Software

Downloading images to a

personal computer p.361

Software instruction manual p.367


p.159

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

p.159

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


p.156

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

p.156

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


p.168

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

p.168

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Creative filterswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Creative filters

Image rotate

www.devic

eman

uals.

euImage rotate

Movie playback

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMovie playback

Editing out movie’s

www.devic

eman

uals.

euEditing out movie’s

first/last scene

www.devic

eman

uals.

eufirst/last scene

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Slide show

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Slide show

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Viewing images on TV

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Viewing images on TV

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

10

1

Introduction 2

Item Check List................................................................................. 3

Conventions Used in this Manual..................................................... 4

Chapters........................................................................................... 5

Contents at a Glance........................................................................ 6

Index to Features ............................................................................. 8

Handling Precautions ..................................................................... 16

Quick Start Guide ........................................................................... 18

Nomenclature ................................................................................. 20

Getting Started 27

Charging the Battery ...................................................................... 28

Installing and Removing the Battery............................................... 30

Installing and Removing the Card .................................................. 31

Using the LCD Monitor ................................................................... 33

Turning on the Power ..................................................................... 34

Setting the Time Zone, Date and Time .......................................... 36

Selecting the Interface Language................................................... 38

Attaching and Detaching a Lens .................................................... 39

About the Lens Image Stabilizer .................................................... 41

Basic Operation.............................................................................. 42

Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions ....................................... 44

3 Menu Operations.................................................................. 46

Formatting the Card ....................................................................... 48

Switching the LCD Monitor Display ................................................ 50

Feature Guide ................................................................................ 52

d Touch Screen Operations .......................................................... 53

Contents





......................................... 18

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu......................................... 18

........................................ 20

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu........................................ 20

Charging the Battery ...............................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Charging the Battery ...................................................................... 28

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

....................................... 28

Installing and Removing the Battery...................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Installing and Removing the Battery...................

Installing and Removing the Card ......................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Installing and Removing the Card ......................

Using the LCD Monitor ................................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Using the LCD Monitor ................................

Turning on the Power ................................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Turning on the Power ................................

Setting the Time Zone, Date and Time .................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Setting the Time Zone, Date and Time .................

Selecting the Interface Language.....................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Selecting the Interface Language.....................

Attaching and Detaching a Lens .......................www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Attaching and Detaching a Lens .......................

About the Lens Image Stabilizer .....................www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

About the Lens Image Stabilizer .....................

11

Contents

2

3

Basic Shooting and Image Playback 57

A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) ...................58

A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto) .........................61

7 Disabling Flash .........................................................................63

C Creative Auto Shooting.............................................................64

2 Shooting Portraits ......................................................................67

3 Shooting Landscapes ...............................................................68

4 Shooting Close-ups ...................................................................69

5 Shooting Moving Subjects ........................................................70

8: Special Scene Mode .............................................................71

6 Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod) ....................................72

F Shooting Night Scenes Handheld ..............................................73

G Shooting Backlit Scenes............................................................74

Q Quick Control.............................................................................76

Shoot by Ambience Selection .........................................................77

Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type....................................................81

x Image Playback ........................................................................84

Creative Shooting 85

d: Program AE...............................................................................86

Setting the Image-Recording Quality ..............................................88

i: Changing the ISO Speed .......................................................92

A Optimal Image Characteristics for the Subject (Picture Style) ...95

f: Changing the Autofocus Operation (AF Operation) .................97

S Selecting the AF Point ............................................................100

Subjects Difficult to Focus.............................................................103

MF: Manual Focusing.................................................................103

i Continuous Shooting ...............................................................104

j Using the Self-timer .................................................................106

D Using the Built-in Flash .............................................................107





..................................69

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu..................................69

Shooting Moving Subjects ...........................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Shooting Moving Subjects ........................................................70

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu.............................70

: Special Scene Mode ................................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu: Special Scene Mode .............................................................71

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu.............................71

Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod) .............

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod) .............

Shooting Night Scenes Handheld .....................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Shooting Night Scenes Handheld .....................

Shooting Backlit Scenes............................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Shooting Backlit Scenes............................

Quick Control.......................................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Quick Control.......................................

Shoot by Ambience Selection .........................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Shoot by Ambience Selection .........................

Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type.....................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type.....................

Image Playback .....................................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Image Playback .....................................

Creative Shooting

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Creative Shooting

: Program AE..........................................www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Program AE..........................................

12

Contents

5

4 Advanced Shooting 109

s: Conveying the Subject’s Movement ..................................... 110

f: Changing the Depth of Field ................................................ 112

Depth of Field Preview................................................................114

a: Manual Exposure ................................................................... 115

q Changing the Metering Mode ..................................................117

Setting Exposure Compensation...................................................119

Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB) ................................................. 121

A Locking the Exposure (AE Lock)............................................. 123

A Locking the Flash Exposure (FE Lock) ................................... 124

Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast (Auto Lighting Optimizer) ... 125

Noise Reduction Settings ............................................................. 126

Lens Peripheral Illumination / Chromatic Aberration Correction.... 129

A Customizing Image Characteristics (Picture Style) .............. 132

A Registering Preferred Image Characteristics (Picture Style)..... 135

B: Matching the Light Source (White Balance)......................... 137

u Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light Source ........................ 139

Setting the Color Reproduction Range (Color Space).................. 141

Mirror Lockup to Reduce Camera Shake ..................................... 142

Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting) 145

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor .............................................. 146

Shooting Function Settings .......................................................... 151

U Using Creative Filters ............................................................. 152

A Menu Function Settings ......................................................... 156

Changing the Autofocus Method (AF Method) ............................. 159

x Shooting with the Touch Shutter ............................................ 168

MF: Focus Manually ..................................................................... 170


......................... 121

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu......................... 121

Locking the Exposure (AE Lock).......................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Locking the Exposure (AE Lock)............................................. 123

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu...................... 123

Locking the Flash Exposure (FE Lock) ..................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Locking the Flash Exposure (FE Lock) ..................

Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast (Auto Lighting Op

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAuto Correction of Brightness and Contrast (Auto Lighting Op

Noise Reduction Settings ...........................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Noise Reduction Settings ............................................................. 126

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

.................................. 126

Lens Peripheral Illumination / Chromatic Aberration Correcti

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Lens Peripheral Illumination / Chromatic Aberration Correcti

Customizing Image Characteristics (Picture Style) ......

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Customizing Image Characteristics (Picture Style) ......

Registering Preferred Image Characteristics (Picture Style)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Registering Preferred Image Characteristics (Picture Style)

: Matching the Light Source (White Balance)...........

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Matching the Light Source (White Balance)...........

Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light Source .......

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light Source .......

Setting the Color Reproduction Range (Color Space).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Setting the Color Reproduction Range (Color Space).

Mirror Lockup to Reduce Camera Shake ...................www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Mirror Lockup to Reduce Camera Shake ...................

13

Contents

7

6 Shooting Movies 173

k Shooting Movies .....................................................................174

Autoexposure Shooting..............................................................174

Manual Exposure Shooting ........................................................177

Shooting Still Photos ..................................................................182

Shooting Function Settings ...........................................................184

Setting the Movie-recording Size ..................................................185

Shooting Video Snapshots............................................................187

Movie Menu Function Settings......................................................196

Handy Features 203

Handy Features ............................................................................204

Disabling the Beeper ..................................................................204

Card Reminder...........................................................................204

Setting the Image Review Time .................................................204

Setting the Auto Power-off Time ................................................205

Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness .......................................205

Creating and Selecting a Folder.................................................206

File Numbering Methods ............................................................208

Setting Copyright Information.....................................................210

Auto Rotation of Vertical Images ................................................212

Checking Camera Settings ........................................................213

Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings............................214

Preventing the LCD Monitor from Turning Off Automatically......217

Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color...........................217

Setting the Flash ...........................................................................218

f Automatic Sensor Cleaning....................................................223

Appending Dust Delete Data ........................................................224

Manual Sensor Cleaning...............................................................226





................................187

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu................................187

Movie Menu Function Settings.........................

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMovie Menu Function Settings......................................................196

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu.............................196

Handy Features .....................................

www.devic

eman

uals.

euHandy Features ............................................................................204

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu.......................................204

Disabling the Beeper ...............................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Disabling the Beeper ...............................

Card Reminder........................................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Card Reminder........................................

Setting the Image Review Time ........................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Setting the Image Review Time ........................

Setting the Auto Power-off Time .......................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Setting the Auto Power-off Time .......................

Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness .................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness .................

Creating and Selecting a Folder......................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Creating and Selecting a Folder......................

File Numbering Methods ...............................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

File Numbering Methods ...............................

Setting Copyright Information........................www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Setting Copyright Information........................

14

Contents

11

10

9

8 Wireless Flash Photography 229

Using Wireless Flash.................................................................... 230

Easy Wireless Flash Shooting...................................................... 231

Custom Wireless Flash Shooting ................................................. 234

Other Settings .............................................................................. 238

Image Playback 241

H I Searching for Images Quickly............................................ 242

u/y Magnified View................................................................... 244

d Playing Back with the Touch Screen........................................ 245

b Rotating the Image.................................................................. 247

Setting Ratings ............................................................................. 248

Q Quick Control During Playback............................................... 250

k Enjoying Movies ..................................................................... 252

k Playing Movies ....................................................................... 254

X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes ................................. 256

Slide Show (Auto Playback) ......................................................... 258

Viewing the Images on TV ........................................................... 262

K Protecting Images................................................................... 266

L Erasing Images........................................................................ 268

B: Shooting Information Display ............................................. 270


U Applying Creative Filters to the Image.................................... 274

S Resizing a JPEG Image ......................................................... 277

Printing Images 279

Preparing to Print ......................................................................... 280

wPrinting.................................................................................... 282

Cropping the Image ................................................................... 287

W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) ......................................... 289

W Direct Printing with DPOF....................................................... 292

p Specifying Images for a Photobook......................................... 293




............................. 244

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu............................. 244

Playing Back with the Touch Screen....................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Playing Back with the Touch Screen........................................ 245

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu.................... 245

.................................. 247

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu.................................. 247

......................................... 248

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu......................................... 248

Quick Control During Playback........................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Quick Control During Playback........................

Enjoying Movies .....................................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Enjoying Movies .....................................

Playing Movies .....................................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Playing Movies .....................................

Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes ..............

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes ..............

Slide Show (Auto Playback) .........................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Slide Show (Auto Playback) .........................

Viewing the Images on TV ............................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Viewing the Images on TV ............................

Protecting Images.................................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Protecting Images.................................

Erasing Images......................................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Erasing Images......................................

: Shooting Information Display .....................www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Shooting Information Display .....................

Post-Processing Images 273www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu


15

Contents

15

13

14

12 Customizing the Camera 295

Setting Custom Functions.............................................................296

Custom Function Settings.............................................................298

C.Fn I: Exposure ........................................................................298

C.Fn II: Image ............................................................................299

C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive ............................................................300

C.Fn IV: Operation/Others..........................................................301

Registering My Menu ....................................................................303

Reference 305

Using a Household Power Outlet..................................................306

Remote Control Shooting..............................................................307

External Speedlites .......................................................................309

Using Eye-Fi Cards.......................................................................311

Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode ..............314

System Map ..................................................................................316

Menu Settings ...............................................................................318

Troubleshooting Guide..................................................................324

Error Codes...................................................................................337

Specifications................................................................................338

Handling Precautions: EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM,

EF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM ................................................346

Safety Warnings............................................................................349

Downloading Images to a Personal Computer 361

Downloading Images to a Personal Computer .............................362

About the Software .......................................................................364

Installing the Software...................................................................365

Software Instruction Manual .........................................................367

Quick Reference Guide and Index 369

Quick Reference Guide.................................................................370

Index .............................................................................................382




www.devicemanuals.euUsing a Household Power Outlet.......................

www.devic

eman

uals.

euUsing a Household Power Outlet..................................................306

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu...........................306

Remote Control Shooting..............................

www.devic

eman

uals.

euRemote Control Shooting..............................................................307

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu................................307

External Speedlites .................................

www.devic

eman

uals.

euExternal Speedlites .......................................................................309

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu......................................309

Using Eye-Fi Cards...................................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Using Eye-Fi Cards...................................

Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


System Map ..........................................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

System Map ..........................................

Menu Settings .......................................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Menu Settings .......................................

Troubleshooting Guide...............................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Troubleshooting Guide...............................

Error Codes...........................................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Error Codes...........................................

Specifications.....................................

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Specifications.....................................

Handling Precautions: EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM,www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Handling Precautions: EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM,

EF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM .........................www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

EF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM .........................

16

Camera Care

This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical shock.

The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. If you

accidentally drop the camera into water, promptly consult the nearest Canon

Service Center. Wipe off any water droplets with a dry cloth. If the camera

has been exposed to salty air, wipe it with a well-wrung wet cloth.

Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such

as a magnet or electric motor. Also avoid using or leaving the camera near

anything emitting strong radio waves such as a large antenna. Strong

magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data.

Do not leave the camera in excessive heat such as in a car in direct sunlight.

High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.

The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to

disassemble the camera yourself.

Do not block the mirror operation with your finger, etc. Doing so may cause a

malfunction.

Use a blower to blow away dust on the lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, and

focusing screen. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean

the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest

Canon Service Center.

Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to

prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause camera

misoperation.

If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,

condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent

condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to

the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.

If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is to avoid

damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card and

battery from the camera, and wait until condensation has evaporated before

using the camera.

If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery

and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the

camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a while to

check that the camera is still working.

Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust and

corrosion such as in a chemical lab.

If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions

before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is

an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up, have the camera

checked by your Canon dealer or check the camera yourself and make sure

it is working properly.

Handling Precautions


High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euHigh temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.

tronic circuitry. Never attempt to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eutronic circuitry. Never attempt to

Do not block the mirror operation with your finger, etc. Doi

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDo not block the mirror operation with your finger, etc. Doi

the lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, and

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, and

focusing screen. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvent

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

focusing screen. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvent

the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to

Do not touch the camera’s electrical c

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ontacts with your fingers. This is to

prevent the contacts from corroding

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause camera

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

. Corroded contacts can cause camera

If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a

condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To preve

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To preve

condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag a


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. Thwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. Th

damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens,www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens,

17

Handling Precautions

LCD Monitor

Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision

technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, there may be a few dead pixels

displaying only black or red, etc., among the remaining 0.01% or less pixels.

Dead pixels are not a malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded.

If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur

where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only

temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days.

The LCD monitor display may seem slow in low temperatures, or look black

in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room temperature.

CardsTo protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:

Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,

physical shock, or vibration.

Do not touch the card’s electronic contacts with your fingers or anything

metallic.

Do not affix any stickers, etc., on the card.

Do not store or use the card near anything having a strong magnetic field

such as a TV set, speakers, or magnet. Also avoid places prone to having

static electricity.

Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.

Store the card in a case.

Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.

LensAfter detaching the lens from the camera, put down the

lens with the rear end up and attach the lens caps to

avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts.

Cautions Regarding Prolonged Use

If you use continuous shooting, Live View shooting, or

movie shooting for a prolonged period, the camera may

become hot. Although this is not a malfunction, holding

the hot camera for a long period can cause slight skin

burns.

About Smudges Adhering to the Front of the Sensor

Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases lubricant from the

camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor. If visible spots still

remain after the automatic sensor cleaning, having the sensor cleaned by a

Canon Service Center is recommended.

Contacts


To protect the card and its recorded data, note the follow

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTo protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:

www.devic

eman

uals.

euing:

Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDo not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu excessive force,

ntacts with your fingers or anything

www.devic

eman

uals.

euntacts with your fingers or anything


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Do not store or use the card near anything having a strong m

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Do not store or use the card near anything having a strong m

such as a TV set, speakers, or magn

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

such as a TV set, speakers, or magnet. Also avoid places prone to having

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

et. Also avoid places prone to having

Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the

lens with the rear end up and attach the lens caps to www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

lens with the rear end up and attach the lens caps to

avoid scratching the lens suwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

avoid scratching the lens su

18

Quick Start Guide

1Insert the battery (p.30).

To charge the battery, see page 28.

2Insert a card (p.31).

With the card’s label facing

toward the back of the

camera, insert it into the card

slot.

3Attach the lens (p.39).

Align the lens’ white or red index

with the camera’s index in the

matching color.

4Set the lens focus mode switch

to <AF> (p.39).

5Set the power switch to <1>,

and set the Mode Dial to <A>

(Scene Intelligent Auto) (p.58).

All the necessary camera settings

will be set automatically.

White index Red index



With the card’s label facing

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWith the card’s label facing

toward the back of the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eutoward the back of the

camera, insert it into the card

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucamera, insert it into the card


Attach the lens

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Attach the lens


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


matching color.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

matching color.

19

Quick Start Guide

6Flip out the LCD monitor (p.33).

When the LCD monitor displays the

time zone and date/time setting

screens, see page 36.

7Focus the subject (p.43).

Look through the viewfinder and aim

the viewfinder center over the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway, and

the camera will focus the subject.

If necessary, the built-in flash will be

raised automatically.

8Take the picture (p.43).

Press the shutter button completely

to take the picture.

9Review the picture (p.204).

The captured image will be

displayed for 2 sec. on the LCD

monitor.

To display the image again, press

the <x> button (p.84).

To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see “Live View

Shooting” (p.145).

To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (p.84).

To delete an image, see “Erasing Images” (p.268).



the viewfinder center over the subject.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe viewfinder center over the subject.


www.devic

eman

uals.

euPress the shutter button halfway, and

the camera will focus the subject.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe camera will focus the subject.


www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf necessary, the built-in flash will be


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



Take the picture

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Take the picture

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

20

The names in bold indicate the parts mentioned up until the “Basic

Shooting and Image Playback” section.

Nomenclature

Built-in flash/AF-assist beam(p.107/101)

EF Lens mount index (p.39)

Power switch (p.34)

Mode Dial (p.24)

 ISO speedsetting button (p.92)

<6> Main Dial

Shutter button(p.43)

EF-S Lens mount index (p.39)

Strap mount(p.27)

<q/C>Audio/video OUT/Digital terminal (p.265, 280, 362)

Body cap (p.39)

Lens release button(p.40)

Grip

Contacts (p.17)

Red-eyereduction/Self-timer lamp (p.108/106)

Mirror (p.142, 226)

Remote controlsensor(p.142, 307)

Hot shoe (p.309)

Flash-sync contacts

Microphone (p.174)

<V> Focal planemark (p.69)

<D> Flash button (p.107)

Lens mount

Terminal cover

Lens lock pin Depth-of-field previewbutton (p.114)

<F> Remote control terminal (p.308)

<Y> External microphoneIN terminal (p.198)

<D> HDMI mini OUTterminal (p.262)












































Contactswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Contacts

Mirror (p.142, 226)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Mirror (p.142, 226)

(p.107)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(p.107)

21

Nomenclature

Display off sensor (p.50, 217) Dioptric adjustment knob (p.42)

Card slotcover (p.31)

Access lamp (p.32)

Battery compartmentcover release lever (p.30)

Battery compartment cover(p.30)

Viewfinder eyepiece

Eyecup (p.308)

<A> Live View shooting/Movie shooting button (p.146/174)

<A/Hy> AE lock/FE lock button/Index/Reduce button(p.123/124/242/244, 287)

<S/u>AF point selection/Magnify button(p.100/244, 287)

Speaker(p.254)

DC cord hole(p.306)

 Info button(p.50, 84, 148, 179, 213)

<M> Menubutton (p.46)

LCD monitor/Touch screen(p.33, 46, 205/53, 245, 255)

<O> Aperture/Exposure compensationbutton (p.115/119)

<Q/l> Quick Control button/Direct print button (p.44/285)

<S> Cross keys (p.46)

<WB> White balance selection button (p.137)

<XA> Picture Style selection button (p.95)

<Yi／Q> Drive mode selection button (p.104, 106)

<Zf> AF operation selection button (p.97)

<0> Setting button (p.46) <L> Erase button (p.268)

Card slot (p.31)

<x> Playback button (p.84)

Tripod socket














































AF point selection/

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAF point selection/Magnify button

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMagnify button(p.100/244, 287)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(p.100/244, 287)

Exposure compensation

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Quick Control buttonwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Quick Control button

Tripod socket

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Tripod socket

22

Nomenclature

Shooting Settings (in Creative Zone modes, p.24)

The display will show only the settings currently applied.

Shutter speed

Shooting mode

Aperture

ISO speed (p.92)

Self-timer countdown

Number of possible shots

Battery check (p.35)zxcn

Quick Control icon (p.44)

Exposure level indicatorExposure compensationamount (p.119)AEB range (p.121)

White balance (p.137)

Q Auto

W Daylight

E Shade

R Cloudy

Y Tungsten light

U White fluorescent light

I Flash

O Custom

Image-recording

quality (p.88)

73 Large/Fine

83 Large/Normal

74 Medium/Fine

84 Medium/Normal

7a Small 1/Fine

8a Small 1/Normal

b Small 2 (Fine)

c Small 3 (Fine)

1+73

RAW+Large/Fine

1 RAW

AF operation (p.97)

XOne-Shot AF

9AI Focus AF

ZAI Servo AF

MFManual Focus

Picture Style (p.95)

Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.125)

Main Dial pointer

Multi Shot Noise Reduction (p.126)

Highlight tone priority (p.299)

Built-in flash settings(p.220)

y Flash exposurecompensation (p.120)0 External flashexposure compensation

Number of possible shotsduring WB bracketing

Eye-Fi transmission status (p.311)

GPS connection indicator

Drive mode (p.104, 106)

u Single shooting

i Continuous shooting

Q Self-timer:10 sec/Remote control

l Self-timer:2 sec

q Self-timer:Continuous

Metering mode (p.117)

q Evaluative metering

w Partial metering

r Spot metering

e Center-weighted average metering

u White balance correction (p.139)

B White balance bracketing (p.140)


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu





















Tungsten lightwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Tungsten light

White fluorescent lightwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

White fluorescent light

Built-in flash settings

www.devic

eman

uals.

euBuilt-in flash settings(p.220)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(p.220)

0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0 External flash

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu External flash

exposure compensation

www.devic

eman

uals.

euexposure compensation

23

Nomenclature

Viewfinder Information

The display will show only the settings currently applied.

AF point activation indicator <•>

AF points

<D> Flash-ready Improper FE lock warning

Max. burst

<o> Focus confirmation light

<e> High-speed sync (FP flash)<d> FE lock/FEB in-progress

<y> Flash exposure compensation

Card full warning (FuLL)

Card error warning (Card)

No card warning (Card)

Exposure level indicator Exposure compensation amount AEB rangeRed-eye reduction lamp-on indicator

<A> Highlight tone priority

<0> Monochrome shooting

ISO speed

Shutter speed

FE lock (FEL)

Busy (buSY)

Built-in flash recycling (D buSY)

Aperture

Spot metering circle

Focusing screen

<A> AE lock/ AEB in-progress

White balancecorrection

ISO speed








































FE lock warning

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

FE lock warning

> High-speed sync

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> High-speed sync

> FE lock/FEB in-progresswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> FE lock/FEB in-progress

24

Nomenclature

Mode Dial

The Mode Dial includes the Basic Zone modes and Creative Zone

modes.

Basic Zone

All you do is press the shutter button.

The camera sets everything to suit the

subject or scene.

A : Scene Intelligent Auto (p.58)

7 : Flash Off (p.63)

C : Creative Auto (p.64)

Creative Zone

These modes give you more control for

shooting various subjects.

d : Program AE (p.86)

s : Shutter-priority AE (p.110)

f : Aperture-priority AE (p.112)

a : Manual exposure (p.115)

Image Zone

2 : Portrait (p.67)

3 : Landscape (p.68)

4 : Close-up (p.69)

5 : Sports (p.70)

8 : Special Scene Mode (p.71)

6: Night Portrait (p.72)

F: Handheld Night Scene (p.73)

G: HDR Backlight Control (p.74)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu























www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

All you do is press the shutter button. All you do is press the shutter button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The camera sets everything to suit the The camera sets everything to suit the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Scene Intelligent Auto

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Scene Intelligent Auto (p.58)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(p.58)

(p.63)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(p.63)

Creative Autowww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Creative Auto (p.64)www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(p.64)www.devicemanuals.eu


25

Nomenclature

Lens

Lens without a distance scale

Lens with a distance scale

Image Stabilizer switch (p.41)

Lens mount index (p.39)

Contacts (p.17)

Zoom ring (p.40)

Focus mode switch (p.39)

Focusing ring (p.103, 170)

Hood mount (p.344) Zoom position index (p.40)

Filter thread(front of lens) (p.344)

Focus mode switch (p.39)

Zoom ring (p.40)

Image Stabilizer switch (p.41) Lens mount index (p.39)

Contacts (p.17)

Hood mount (p.344)

Distance scale

Zoom position index (p.40)

Focusing ring (p.103, 170)

Filter thread(front of lens) (p.344)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

































(p.41)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(p.41)

Lens mount index

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Lens mount index (p.39)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(p.39)



Hood mount (p.344)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Hood mount (p.344)

26

Nomenclature

Battery Charger LC-E8

Charger for Battery Pack LP-E8 (p.28).

Battery Charger LC-E8E


Battery pack slotPower plug

Charge lamp

Full-charge lamp

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

DANGER-TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,

CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter

of the proper configuration for the power outlet, if needed.

Power cord

Power cord socket

Battery pack slot Charge lamp

Full-charge lamp www.devicemanuals.eu




www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an atta

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an atta

of the proper configuration for the power outlet, if nee

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

of the proper configuration for the power outlet, if nee








27

1Getting Started

This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start shooting and basic camera operations.

Attaching the Strap

Pass the end of the strap through

the camera’s strap mount eyelet

from the bottom. Then pass it

through the strap’s buckle as shown

in the illustration. Pull the strap to

take up any slack and make sure

the strap will not loosen from the

buckle.

The eyepiece cover is also

attached to the strap (p.308).

Eyepiece cover


www.devicemanuals.euGetting Started

www.devic

eman

uals.

euGetting Started

This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start shooting and basic camera operations.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shooting and basic camera operations.

Attaching the Strap

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Attaching the Strap


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


















28

1 Remove the protective cover.

Detach the protective cover provided

with the battery.

2 Attach the battery.

As shown in the illustration, attach the

battery securely to the charger.

To detach the battery, follow the

above procedure in reverse.

3 Recharge the battery.

For LC-E8

As shown by the arrow, flip out the

battery charger’s prongs and insert

the prongs into a power outlet.

For LC-E8E

Connect the power cord to the

charger and insert the plug into a

power outlet.

Recharging starts automatically and

the charge lamp lights up in orange.

When the battery is fully recharged,

the full-charge lamp will light up in

green.

It takes approx. 2 hours to fully recharge a completely

exhausted battery at 23°C / 73°F. The time required to recharge

the battery will vary greatly depending on the ambient

temperature and the battery’s remaining capacity.

For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (6°C - 10°C /

43°F - 50°F) will take longer (up to approx. 4 hours).

Charging the Battery

LC-E8

LC-E8E


To detach the battery, follow the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTo detach the battery, follow the

above procedure in reverse.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euabove procedure in reverse.

Recharge the battery.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euRecharge the battery.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


For LC-E8E

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For LC-E8E

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu
































29

Charging the Battery

Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.

Recharge the battery before using.

Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be

used.

Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose

its capacity.

After recharging the battery, detach it and disconnect the

charger from the power outlet.

When not using the camera, remove the battery.

If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small

amount of power current is released, resulting in excess discharge

and shorter battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover

(provided) attached. Storing the battery when it is fully charged may

lower the battery’s performance.

The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.

The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/

60 Hz power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available

plug adapter for the respective country or region. Do not attach any

portable voltage transformer to the battery charger. Doing so can

damage the battery charger.

If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully

charged, the battery has reached the end of its service life.

Purchase a new battery.

Tips for Using the Battery and Charger

After disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the prongs for

at least 3 sec.

Do not charge any battery other than a Battery Pack LP-E8.

Battery Pack LP-E8 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it with an

incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or

accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable.


After recharging the battery, detach it and disconnect th

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAfter recharging the battery, detach it and disconnect th

When not using the camera, remove the battery.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhen not using the camera, remove the battery.

If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged peri

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged peri

ed, resulting in excess discharge

www.devic

eman

uals.

eued, resulting in excess discharge

and shorter battery life. Store the ba

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

and shorter battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ttery with the protective cover

(provided) attached. Storing the battery when it is fully ch

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(provided) attached. Storing the battery when it is fully ch


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


The battery charger can also be used in foreign countri

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The battery charger can also be used in foreign countri

The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


plug adapter for the respective country or region. Do not

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

plug adapter for the respective country or region. Do not

portable voltage transformer to t

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

portable voltage transformer to t

damage the battery charger.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

damage the battery charger.

30

Load a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E8 into the camera.

1 Open the cover.

Slide the lever as shown by the

arrows and open the cover.

2 Insert the battery.

Insert the end with the battery

contacts.

Insert the battery until it locks in

place.

3 Close the cover.

Press the cover until it snaps shut.

Open the cover and remove the

battery.

Press the battery release lever as shown

by the arrow and remove the battery.

To prevent short circuiting of the

battery contacts, be sure to attach the

protective cover (provided, p.28) to

the battery.

Installing and Removing the Battery

Installing the Battery

Removing the Battery

After opening the battery compartment cover, be careful not to swing it back

further. Otherwise, the hinge may break.

www.devicemanuals.euInsert the end with the battery

www.devic

eman

uals.

euInsert the end with the battery

Insert the battery until it locks in

www.devic

eman

uals.

euInsert the battery until it locks in

Close the cover.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Close the cover.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu








Removing the Batterywww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Removing the Battery

31

The card (sold separately) can be an SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory

card. SDHC and SDXC memory cards with UHS-I can also be used.

The captured images are recorded onto the card.

Make sure the card’s write-protect switch is set upward to

enable writing/erasing.

1 Open the cover.

Slide the cover as shown by the

arrows to open it.

2 Insert the card.

As shown by the illustration, face

the card’s label side toward you

and insert it until it clicks in place.

3 Close the cover.

Close the cover and slide it in the

direction shown by the arrows until it

snaps shut.

When you set the power switch to

<1>, the number of possible shots

(p.35) will be displayed on the LCD

monitor.

Installing and Removing the Card

Installing the Card

Write-protect switch

Possible shots

The number of possible shots depends on the remaining capacity of the

card, image-recording quality, ISO speed, etc.

Setting [z1: Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent

you from forgetting to insert a card (p.204).


Slide the cover as shown by the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSlide the cover as shown by the

arrows to open it.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euarrows to open it.

Insert the card.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Insert the card.

As shown by the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

As shown by the


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

32

Installing and Removing the Card

1 Open the cover.

Set the power switch to <2>.

Make sure the access lamp is off,

then open the cover.

If [Recording...] is displayed, close

the cover.

2 Remove the card.

Gently push in the card, then let go to

eject it.

Pull the card straight out, then close

the cover.

Removing the Card

Access lamp

When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are

being written to or read by the card, being erased, or data is being

transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time. Also,

never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or

blinking. Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera.

� Removing the card.

� Removing the battery.

� Shaking or banging the camera around.

If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not

start from 0001 (p.208).

If a card-related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor, remove

and reinsert the card. If the error persists, use a different card.

If you can transfer all the images on the card to a computer, transfer all

the images and then format the card with the camera (p.48). The card

may then return to normal.

Do not touch the card’s contacts with your fingers or metal objects.

www.devicemanuals.euGently push in the card, then let go to

www.devic

eman

uals.

euGently push in the card, then let go to

Pull the card straight out, then close

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPull the card straight out, then close

the cover.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe cover.


When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates

being written to or read by the card, being erased, or

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

being written to or read by the card, being erased, or

transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during thiswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this

never do any of the following while the access lamp is www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

never do any of the following while the access lamp is

33

After you flip out the LCD monitor, you can set menu functions, use Live

View shooting, shoot movies, and play back images and movies. You

can change the direction and angle of the LCD monitor.

1 Flip out the LCD monitor.

2 Rotate the LCD monitor.

When the LCD monitor is swung out,

you can rotate it up or down, or face it

forward toward the subject.

The indicated angle is only

approximate.

3 Face it toward you.

Normally, face the LCD monitor

toward you.

Using the LCD Monitor

180°

175°

90°

Be careful not to force and break the hinge when rotating the LCD monitor.

When not using the camera, close the LCD monitor with the screen

facing inward. This will protect the screen.

During Live View shooting or movie shooting, facing the LCD monitor

toward the subject will display a mirror image on the screen.

Depending on the angle of the LCD monitor, the display may turn off right

before the LCD monitor is closed.


Rotate the LCD monitor.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euRotate the LCD monitor.

When the LCD monitor is swung out,

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhen the LCD monitor is swung out,

you can rotate it up or down, or face it

www.devic

eman

uals.

euyou can rotate it up or down, or face it

forward toward the subject.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euforward toward the subject.

The indicated angle is only

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe indicated angle is only

approximate.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

approximate.

Face it toward you.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Face it toward you.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu





34

If you turn on the power switch and the time zone and date/time

setting screens appear, see page 36 to set the time zone and date/

time.

<k> : The camera turns on. You can

shoot movies (p.173).

<1> : The camera turns on. You can

shoot still photos.

<2> : The camera is turned off and

does not operate. Set to this

position when not using the

camera.

Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, sensor

cleaning will be executed automatically. (A small sound may be

heard.) During the sensor cleaning, the LCD monitor will display

<f>.

You can still shoot during sensor cleaning. Press the shutter button

halfway (p.43) to stop the sensor cleaning and take a picture.

If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1>/<2> at a short

interval, the <f> icon may not be displayed. This is normal and

not a problem.

To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after

approx. 30 seconds of non-operation. To turn on the camera again,

just press the shutter button halfway (p.43).

You can set the auto power off time with [52: Auto power off]

(p.205).

Turning on the Power

About the Automatic Self-Cleaning Sensor

3 About Auto Power Off

If you set the power switch to <2> while an image is being recorded to

the card, [Recording...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after the

card finishes recording the image.


position when not using the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euposition when not using the

Whenever you set the power switch to <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Whenever you set the power switch to <1

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

1cleaning will be executed automat

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

cleaning will be executed automatically. (A small sound may be

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ically. (A small sound may be

heard.) During the sensor cleaning, the LCD monitor will d

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

heard.) During the sensor cleaning, the LCD monitor will d

You can still shoot during sensor

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can still shoot during sensor


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


If you repeatedly turn the power switch <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If you repeatedly turn the power switch <

f

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

f> icon may not be displayed. This is normal and

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> icon may not be displayed. This is normal and

not a problem. www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

not a problem. www.devicemanuals.eu

Self-Cleaning Sensor

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelf-Cleaning Sensor

35

Turning on the Power

When the power is turned on, the battery level will be indicated in one of

four levels.

z : Battery level is sufficient.

x : Battery level is low, but the

camera can still be used.

c : Battery will be exhausted soon.

(Blinks)

n : Recharge the battery.

Battery Life

The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8, no Live

View shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing

standards.

Possible shots with Battery Grip BG-E8

� With two LP-E8 batteries: approx. twice as many shots as with the camera alone.

� With size-AA/LR6 alkaline batteries (at 23°C / 73°F): approx. 470 shots with

no flash, approx. 270 shots with 50% flash use.

z Checking the Battery Level

Temperature At 23°C / 73°F At 0°C / 32°F

No Flash Approx. 550 shots Approx. 470 shots

50% Flash Use Approx. 440 Shots Approx. 400 shots

The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following

operations:

� Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.

� Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.

� Using the lens Image Stabilizer.

� Using the LCD monitor often.

The number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual

shooting conditions.

The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Depending on

the lens used, the number of possible shots may be lower.

For the number of possible shots with Live View shooting, see page 147.

www.devicemanuals.eu: Recharge the battery.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu: Recharge the battery.

The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8,

View shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Associat

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

View shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Associat


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


With two LP-E8 batteries: approx. twice as many shots as with

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

With two LP-E8 batteries: approx. twice as many shots as with

� With size-AA/LR6 alkaline batteries (at 23°C / 73°F): approwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� With size-AA/LR6 alkaline batteries (at 23°C / 73°F): appro

no flash, approx. 270 swww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

no flash, approx. 270 swww.devicemanuals.eu

C / 73

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

C / 73°

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

°F

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

F


Approx. 550 shots

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Approx. 550 shots


Approx. 440 Shots

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Approx. 440 Shots





36

When you turn on the power for the first time or if the time zone and date/time

have been reset, the Time zone and Date/Time setting screens will appear.

Follow the steps below to set the time zone first. You can also set the time zone

of your current address. Then if you travel to another time zone, you can simply

set your destination’s time zone so that the correct date/time is recorded.

Note that the date/time appended to recorded images will be based

on this date/time setting. Be sure to set the correct date/time.

[London] is set by default.

Press the <M> button.

Under the [52] tab, select [Time

zone], then press <0>.

Press the key to select a time zone.

Press <0> so <a> is displayed.

Press the <V> key to select the time

zone, then press <0>.

1 Display the menu screen.


2 Under the [52] tab, select [Date/

Time].

Press the key to select the

[52] tab.

Press the <V> key to select [Date/

Time], then press <0>.

3 Setting the Time Zone, Date and Time

Set the Time Zone

Set the Date and Time

The menu setting procedure is explained on pages 46-47.

The time displayed on the lower right is the time difference compared

with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). If you do not see your time

zone, set the time zone while referring to the difference with UTC.

www.devicemanuals.euM

www.devic

eman

uals.

euM> button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button.

5

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu52

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu2] tab, select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] tab, select [

], then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu], then press <

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <U

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

UPress <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press <0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

0Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

zone, then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

zone, then press <


Set the Date and Timewww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Set the Date and Timewww.devicemanuals.eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


The time displayed on the lower right is the time differen

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The time displayed on the lower right is the time differen

with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). If you do not see you

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). If you do not see you

zone, set the time zone while referring to the difference w

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

zone, set the time zone while referring to the difference w

37

3 Setting the Time Zone, Date and Time

3 Set the date and time.


date or time number.


Press the <V> key to set the

number, then press <0>. (Returns

to .)

4 Set the daylight saving time.

Set it if necessary.

Press the key to select [Y].


Press the <V> key to select [Z],

then press <0>.

When the daylight saving time is set

to [Z], the time set in step 3 will

advance by 1 hour. If [Y] is set, the

daylight saving time will be canceled

and the time will go back by 1 hour.

5 Exit the setting.

Press the key to select [OK],

then press <0>.

The date/time and daylight saving

time will be set and the menu will

reappear.

If you store the camera without the battery or if the camera’s battery

becomes exhausted, the time zone and date/time may be reset. If this

happens, set the time zone and date/time again.

The date/time that was set will start from when you press <0> in step 5.

After changing the time zone, check that the correct date/time has been set.

You can also set the daylight saving time with [52: Time zone].

The [52: Time zone] and [52: Date/Time] daylight saving time settings

are linked.

www.devicemanuals.eu> key to select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select [

> so <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> so <a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eua> is displayed.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> is displayed.

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPress the <V

www.devic

eman

uals.

euV> key to select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select [

then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthen press <0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0

When the daylight saving time is set

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhen the daylight saving time is set

to [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

to [Z

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Z], the time set in step 3 will

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

], the time set in step 3 will

advance by 1 hour. If [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

advance by 1 hour. If [

daylight saving time

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

daylight saving time


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


5

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

5

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

38


Press the <M> button to display

the menu screen.

2 Under the [52] tab, select

[LanguageK].


[52] tab.

Press the <V> key to select

[LanguageK] (the sixth item from

the top), then press <0>.

3 Set the desired language.

Press the <S> key to select the

language, then press <0>.

The interface language will change.

3 Selecting the Interface Language


> key to select

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select

] (the sixth item from

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] (the sixth item from

the top), then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe top), then press <

3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3 Set the desired language.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the desired language.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

39

The camera is compatible with all Canon EF lenses and EF-S lenses.

The camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses.

1 Remove the caps.

Remove the rear lens cap and the

body cap by turning them as shown

by the arrows.

2 Attach the lens.

Align the lens’ red or white index with

the camera’s index matching the

same color. Turn the lens as shown

by the arrow until it clicks in place.

3 Set the lens focus mode switch to

<AF>.

<AF> stands for Autofocus.

If it is set to <MF> (manual focus),

autofocus will not operate.

4 Remove the front lens cap.

Attaching and Detaching a Lens

White index

Red index

Minimizing Dust

When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.

When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the

body cap to the camera.

Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.


Align the lens’ red or white index with

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAlign the lens’ red or white index with

the camera’s index matching the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe camera’s index matching the

same color. Turn the lens as shown

www.devic

eman

uals.

eusame color. Turn the lens as shown

by the arrow until it clicks in place.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euby the arrow until it clicks in place.

3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3 Set the lens focus

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the lens focus

<AF>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

<AF>.

40

Attaching and Detaching a Lens

To zoom, turn the zoom ring on the lens

with your fingers.

If you want to zoom, do it before

focusing. Turning the zoom ring after

achieving focus may throw off the

focus.

While pressing the lens release

button, turn the lens as shown by

the arrows.

Turn the lens until it stops, then

detach it.

Attach the rear lens cap to the

detached lens.

About Zooming

Detaching the Lens

Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause

loss of vision.

When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera’s power switch to

<2>.

If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do

not touch the rotating part.

If you purchased a lens kit with the EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM

or EF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens, see “Handling

Precautions” on page 346.

Image Conversion Factor

Since the image sensor size is

smaller than the 35mm film

format, it will look like the lens

focal length is increased by

approx. 1.6x.

Image sensor size (Approx.)

(22.3 x 14.9 mm / 0.88 x 0.59 in.)

35mm image size

(36 x 24 mm / 1.42 x 0.94 in.)

www.devicemanuals.euWhile pressing the lens release

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhile pressing the lens release

button, turn the lens as shown by

www.devic

eman

uals.

eubutton, turn the lens as shown by


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


detach it.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

detach it.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


detached lens.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

detached lens.


Do not look at the sun directly th

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Do not look at the sun directly th

When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera’s power www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera’s power

41

When you use the IS lens’ built-in Image Stabilizer, camera shake is

corrected to obtain a sharper shot. The procedure explained here is

based on the EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens as an example.

* IS stands for Image Stabilizer.

1 Set the IS switch to <1>.

Also set the camera’s power switch to

<1>.

2 Press the shutter button halfway.

The Image Stabilizer will operate.

3 Take the picture.

When the picture looks steady in the

viewfinder, press the shutter button

completely to take the picture.

About the Lens Image Stabilizer

The Image Stabilizer cannot correct “subject blur”, when the subject

moves at the time of exposure.

For bulb exposures, set the IS switch to <2>. If <1> is set, Image

Stabilizer misoperation may occur.

The Image Stabilizer may not be effective for excessive shaking such as

on a rocking boat.

The Image Stabilizer can operate with the lens focus mode switch set to

either <AF> or <MF>.

When using a tripod, you can still shoot with the IS switch set to <1>

with no problem. However, to save battery power, setting the IS switch to

<2> is recommended.

The Image Stabilizer is effective even when the camera is mounted on a

monopod.

Some IS lenses enable you to switch the IS mode manually to suit the

shooting conditions. However, the following lenses switch the IS mode

automatically:

� EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM � EF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM

� EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II � EF-S 18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS

� EF-S 15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM


The Image Stabilizer will operate.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe Image Stabilizer will operate.

Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTake the picture.

When the picture looks steady in the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhen the picture looks steady in the

viewfinder, press the shutter button

www.devic

eman

uals.

euviewfinder, press the shutter button


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



The Image Stabilizer cannot correct

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The Image Stabilizer cannot correct


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


For bulb exposures, set the IS switch to <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For bulb exposures, set the IS switch to <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


The Image Stabilizer may not be effect

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The Image Stabilizer may not be effect

on a rocking boat.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

on a rocking boat.

42

Turn the dioptric adjustment

knob.

Turn the knob left or right until the

nine AF points in the viewfinder look

sharp.

To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera shake.

1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly.

2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.

3. Rest your hand’s right index finger lightly on the shutter button.

4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.

5. To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the other.

6. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder.

Basic Operation

Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity

Holding the Camera

If the camera’s dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder

image, using E-series Dioptric Adjustment Lenses (10 types, sold

separately) is recommended.

Vertical shootingHorizontal shooting

To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see page 145.


a still to minimize camera shake.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

a still to minimize camera shake.


stment Lenses (10 types, sold

www.devic

eman

uals.

eustment Lenses (10 types, sold




















43

Basic Operation

The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button

halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely.

Pressing halfway

This activates autofocusing and the

automatic exposure system that sets the

shutter speed and aperture.

The exposure setting (shutter speed and

aperture) is displayed in the viewfinder

(0).

Pressing completely

This releases the shutter and takes the

picture.

Preventing Camera Shake

Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called

camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake,

note the following:

� Hold and steady the camera as shown on the preceding page.

� Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the

shutter button completely.

Shutter Button

If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first

or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely

immediately, the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture.

Even during menu display, image playback, or image recording, you can

instantly go back to shooting-ready by pressing the shutter button

halfway.


aperture) is displayed in the viewfinder

www.devic

eman

uals.

euaperture) is displayed in the viewfinder

Pressing completely

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPressing completely

This releases the shutter and takes the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThis releases the shutter and takes the

picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

picture.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


camera shake. It can cause blurred pi

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

camera shake. It can cause blurred pi

note the following:

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

note the following:

� Hold and steady the camera as shown on the preceding page.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� Hold and steady the camera as shown on the preceding page.

� Press the shutter button halfway towww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� Press the shutter button halfway to

44

You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the

LCD monitor. This is called the Quick Control screen.

1 Press the <Q> button.

The Quick Control screen will appear

(7).

2 Set the desired function.

Press the <S> key to select a

function.

The selected function and Feature

guide (p.52) will appear.

Turn the <6> dial to change the

setting.

3 Take the picture.

Press the shutter button completely to

take the picture.

The captured image will be displayed.

Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions

Basic Zone modes Creative Zone modes

For the functions settable in Basic Zone modes and the setting

procedure, see page 76.

In steps 1 and 2, you can also use the LCD monitor’s touch screen (p.53).


> key to select a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select a


www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe selected function and Feature


www.devic

eman

uals.

euguide (p.52) will appear.

Turn the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Turn the <6

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

6> dial to change the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> dial to change the

setting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

setting.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

45

Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions

Select the desired function and press

<0>. The function’s setting screen

will appear.

Press the key or turn the

<6> dial to change the setting.

There are also functions that are set

by pressing the button.

Press <0> to finalize the setting and

return to the Quick Control screen.

Sample Quick Control Screen

Function Setting Screen

Shutter speed (p.110)

AF operation (p.97)

White balance (p.137)

Shooting mode* (p.24)Highlight tone priority* (p.299)

Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.125)

Metering mode (p.117)

Picture Style (p.95)

Exposure compensation/

AEB setting (p.119, 121)

Flash exposure compensation (p.120)

ISO speed (p.92)

Image-recording quality (p.88)

Aperture (p.112)

Built-in flash settings(p.234)

White balance bracketing (p.140)

Drive mode (p.104, 106)

White balance correction (p.139)

Return

* Asterisked functions cannot be set with the Quick Control screen.

<0>




www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

euAuto Lighting Optimizer (p.125)

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAuto Lighting Optimizer (p.125)

Image-recording quality (p.88)

www.devic

eman

uals.

euImage-recording quality (p.88)


www.devic

eman

uals.

euBuilt-in flash settings(p.234)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(p.234)


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu









* Asterisked functions cannot be set with the Quick Control scre

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

* Asterisked functions cannot be set with the Quick Control scre


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

46

You can set various settings with the menus such as the image-

recording quality, date/time, etc. While looking at the LCD monitor, use

the <M> button, <S> cross keys, and <0> button on the back of

the camera to operate the menus.

3 Menu Operations

<S> Cross keys

Tab

Menu items

Menu settings

z Shooting

LCD monitor

5 Set-up

9 My Menu

<0> button

3 Playback

The menu tabs and items displayed will differ depending on the

shooting mode.

Menu Screen

Basic Zone modes

Creative Zone modes

<M> button

A Live View Shooting

Movie shooting







www.devicemanuals.euS

www.devic

eman

uals.

euS

The menu tabs and items displayed will differ depending o

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The menu tabs and items displayed will differ depending o


Creative Zone modeswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Creative Zone modeswww.devicemanuals.eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Movie shooting

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Movie shooting

47

3 Menu Operations


Press the <M> button to display

the menu screen.

2 Select a tab.

Press the key to select a

menu tab.

For example, the [z3] tab refers to

the screen displayed when the z

(Shooting) tab’s third dot [ ] from

the left is selected.

3 Select the desired item.

Press the <V> key to select the

item, then press <0>.

4 Select the setting.

Press the <V> or key to

select the desired setting. (Some

settings require you to press either

the <V> or key to select it.)

The current setting is indicated in blue.

5 Set the desired setting.

Press <0> to set it.

6 Exit the setting.

Press the <M> button to return to

the shooting settings display.

Menu Setting Procedure

In step 2, you can also turn the <6> dial to select a menu tab.

In steps 2 to 5, you can also use the LCD monitor’s touch screen (p.53).

The explanation of menu functions hereinafter assumes that you have

pressed the <M> button to display the menu screen.

To cancel, press the <M> button.

For details about each menu item, see page 318.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe screen displayed when the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe screen displayed when the

(Shooting) tab’s third dot [ ] from

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(Shooting) tab’s third dot [ ] from

the left is selected.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe left is selected.

Select the desired item.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the desired item.

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

item, then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

item, then press <

4

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select the setting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

48

If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or

computer, format the card with the camera.

When the card is formatted, all images and data in the card will

be erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make

sure there is nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer

the images to a computer, etc., before formatting the card.

1 Select [Format card].

Under the [51] tab, select [Format

card], then press <0>.

2 Format the card.

Select [OK], then press <0>.

The card will be formatted.

When the formatting is completed,

the menu will reappear.

For low-level formatting, press the

<L> button to append [Low level

format] with a checkmark <X>, then

select [OK].

3 Formatting the Card


0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0

Format the card.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFormat the card.

Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [OK

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

OK], then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

], then press <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

49

3 Formatting the Card

The card is new.

The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.

The card is full with images or data.

A card-related error is displayed (p.337).

Execute [Format card] in the following cases:

About Low-level Formatting

Perform low-level formatting if the card’s recording or reading speed seems

slow or if you want to totally erase all data in the card.

Since low-level formatting will format all recordable sectors in the card, the

formatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting.

You can stop the low-level formatting by selecting [Cancel]. Even in this

case, normal formatting will be completed and you can use the card as

usual.

When the card is formatted or data is erased, only the file management

information is changed. The actual data is not completely erased. Be

aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When discarding the

card, execute low-level formatting or destroy the card physically to

prevent the personal data from being leaked.

Before using a new Eye-Fi card, the software in the card must be

installed in your computer. Then format the card with the camera.

The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller

than the capacity indicated on the card.

This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.


slow or if you want to totally erase all data in the card.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euslow or if you want to totally erase all data in the card.

ll recordable sectors in the card, the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eull recordable sectors in the card, the

formatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euformatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting.

You can stop the low-level formatting by selecting [

www.devic

eman

uals.

euYou can stop the low-level formatting by selecting [Cancel

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCancel

case, normal formatting will be completed and you can use t

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucase, normal formatting will be completed and you can use t


50

The LCD monitor can display the shooting settings screen, menu

screen, captured images, etc.

When you turn on the power, the

shooting settings will be displayed.

When your eye is near the viewfinder

eyepiece, the display off sensor

(p.21, 217) will turn off the LCD

monitor to prevent glare. When your

eye leaves the viewfinder eyepiece,

the LCD monitor will turn on again.

By pressing the button, you

can switch the LCD monitor screen

as follows: Display the shooting

settings screen (p.22), turn off the

LCD monitor screen, or display the

camera settings screen (p.213).

Switching the LCD Monitor Display

Shooting Settings

Appears when you press the

<M> button. Press the

button again to return to the

shooting settings screen.

Appears when you press the

<x> button. Press the button

again to return to the shooting

settings screen.

Menu Functions Captured Image

www.devic

eman

uals.

eumonitor to prevent glare. When your

www.devic

eman

uals.

eumonitor to prevent glare. When your

eye leaves the viewfinder eyepiece,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eueye leaves the viewfinder eyepiece,

the LCD monitor will turn on again.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe LCD monitor will turn on again.

By pressing the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euBy pressing the <B

www.devic

eman

uals.

euB

can switch the LCD monitor screen

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucan switch the LCD monitor screen


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




Menu Functions

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Menu Functions


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

51

Switching the LCD Monitor Display

With [52: LCD auto off], you can prevent the LCD monitor from turning

off automatically (p.217).

Even when the menu screen or captured image is displayed, pressing

the shutter button will enable you to shoot immediately.

If you wear sunglasses and look through the viewfinder eyepiece, the

LCD monitor may not turn off automatically. If this occurs, press the

 button to turn off the LCD monitor.

Nearby fluorescent lighting may cause the LCD monitor to turn off. If this

occurs, take the camera away from the fluorescent lighting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

52

The Feature guide is a simple description of the respective function or

option. It is displayed when you change the shooting mode or use the

Quick Control screen to set a shooting function, in Live View shooting,

movie shooting, or during playback. When you select a function or

option on the Quick Control screen, the Feature guide description is

displayed. The Feature guide turns off when you tap the description or

proceed with the operation.

Shooting mode (Sample)

Quick Control (Sample)

Select [Feature guide].

Under the [53] tab, select [Feature

guide], then press <0>. Select

[Disable], then press <0>.

Feature Guide

3 Disabling the Feature Guide

Shooting functions Live View shooting Playback



Disabling the Feature Guidewww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Disabling the Feature Guidewww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Shooting functions

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Shooting functions

53

The LCD monitor is a touch-sensitive panel that you can operate with

your fingers.

Quick Control (Sample display)

Use your finger to tap (touch and let

go) the LCD monitor.

By tapping, you can select menus,

icons, etc., displayed on the LCD

monitor.

Icons that you can tap are displayed

in a frame (excluding the menu

screen).

For example, when you tap [Q], the

Quick Control screen appears. By

tapping [2], you can return to the

preceding screen.

Operations possible by tapping the screen

Setting menu functions after pressing the <M> button

Quick Control

Setting functions after pressing the , <S>, <WB>,

<XA>, <Yi/Q>, or <Zf> button

Setting functions during Live View shooting

Setting functions during movie shooting

Playback operations

d Touch Screen Operations

Tap

www.devicemanuals.euIcons that you can tap are displayed

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIcons that you can tap are displayed

in a frame (excluding the menu

www.devic

eman

uals.

euin a frame (excluding the menu

screen).

www.devic

eman

uals.

euscreen).

For example, when you tap [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For example, when you tap [


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


tapping [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

tapping [

preceding screen.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

preceding screen.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Setting menu functions after pressing the <www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Setting menu functions after pressing the <

Quick Controlwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Quick Controlwww.devicemanuals.eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

54


Menu screen (Sample display)

Slide your finger while touching the

LCD monitor.

Scale display (Sample display)

Operations possible by dragging your finger on the screen

Selecting a menu tab or item after pressing the <M> button

Setting a scale control



Playback operations (swipe)

If [z1: Beep] is set to [Touch to ], the

beep will not sound during touch

operations.

Drag

3 Silencing the Beep during Touch Operations


Operations possible by dragging your finger on the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Operations possible by dragging your finger on the

Selecting a menu tab or item after pressing the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Selecting a menu tab or item after pressing the <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Playback operations (swipe)www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Playback operations (swipe)

55


1 Select [Touch control].

Under the [53] tab, select [Touch

control], then press <0>.

2 Set the Touch control.

Select [Enable].

Setting it to [Disable] will disable

touch operations.

3 Touch Control Settings

Cautions for Touch Screen Operations

Since the LCD monitor is not pressure sensitive, do not use any sharp

objects such as your fingernail, ballpoint pens, etc., for touch operations.

Do not use wet fingers for touch screen operations.

If the LCD monitor has any moisture or if your fingers are wet, the touch

screen may not respond or misoperation may occur. In such a case, turn

off the power and wipe the LCD monitor with a cloth.

Do not attach any protective sheet (commercially available) or sticker on

the LCD monitor. It may make the touch operation response slow.

www.devicemanuals.euDisable

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDisable

touch operations.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eutouch operations.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

57

2Basic Shooting and

Image Playback

This chapter explains how to use the Basic Zone modes on the Mode Dial for best results and how to play back images.

With Basic Zone modes, all you do is point and shoot while the

camera sets everything automatically (p.76, 314). Also, to

prevent botched pictures due to mistaken operations, the main

shooting settings cannot be changed.

Basic Zone

If you set the Mode Dial to <8> while the LCD monitor is off,

press the <Q> button to check the shooting mode before shooting

(p.71).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Basic Shooting and

www.devic

eman

uals.

euBasic Shooting and

Image Playback

www.devic

eman

uals.

euImage Playback

This chapter explains how to use the Basic Zone modes

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

This chapter explains how to use the Basic Zone modes on the Mode Dial for best results and how to play back

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

on the Mode Dial for best results and how to play back

, all you do is point

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

, all you do is point

camera sets everything automatically

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

camera sets everything automatically



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

58

<A> is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene

and sets the optimum settings automatically. It also adjusts focus

automatically by detecting whether the subject is still or moving (p.61).

1 Set the Mode Dial to <A>.

2 Aim any AF point over the

subject.

All the AF points will be used to focus,

and generally the closest object will

be focused.

Aiming the center AF point over the

subject will make focusing easier.

3 Focus the subject.


the lens focusing ring will rotate to

focus.

The dot inside the AF point achieving

focus flashes briefly in red. At the

same time, the beeper will sound and

the focus confirmation light <o> in

the viewfinder will light up.



A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

AF point

Focus confirmation light


All the AF points will be used to focus,

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAll the AF points will be used to focus,

and generally the closest object will

www.devic

eman

uals.

euand generally the closest object will

Aiming the center AF point over the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAiming the center AF point over the

subject will make

www.devic

eman

uals.

eusubject will make

Focus the subject.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Focus the subject.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

59


4 Take the picture.


take the picture.

The captured image will be displayed

for 2 sec. on the LCD monitor.

After taking the picture, retract the

built-in flash by pushing it down with

your fingers.

The focus confirmation light <o> blinks and focus is not

achieved.

Aim the AF point over an area having good contrast, then press the

shutter button halfway (p.43). If you are too close to the subject,

move away and try again.

Multiple AF points flash simultaneously.

This indicates that focus is achieved at all those AF points. When the

AF point covering the desired subject flashes, take the picture.

The beeper continues to beep softly. (The focus confirmation

light <o> does not light up.)

It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving

subject. (The focus confirmation light <o> does not light up.) You

can take sharp pictures of a moving subject.

Note that focus lock (p.61) will not work in this case.

Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus the subject.

If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to <MF> (manual focus),

set it to <AF> (autofocus).

FAQ

The <A> mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor,

and sunset scenes. If the desired color tone is not obtained, use a Creative

Zone mode and select a Picture Style other than <D> and shoot (p.95).


The focus confirmation light <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The focus confirmation light <o

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

o> blinks and focus is not

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> blinks and focus is not

Aim the AF point over an area having good contrast, then pr

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Aim the AF point over an area having good contrast, then pr

shutter button halfway (p.43). If y

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shutter button halfway (p.43). If y


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


This indicates that focus is achiev

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

This indicates that focus is achiev

AF point covering the desired swww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AF point covering the desired s

The beeper continues to beep softly. (The focus confirwww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

The beeper continues to beep softly. (The focus confirwww.devicemanuals.eu

> mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor,

and sunset scenes. If the desired color tone is not obtained

www.devic

eman

uals.

euand sunset scenes. If the desired color tone is not obtained

Zone mode and select a Picture Style other than <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euZone mode and select a Picture Style other than <D

www.devic

eman

uals.

euD> and shoot (p.95).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> and shoot (p.95).

60

The flash was raised even though it was daylight.

For a backlit subject, the flash may pop up to help lighten the

subject’s dark areas. If you do not want the flash to fire, set it to

Flash Off (p.63). Except for the flash setting, the settings will be the

same as in <A>.

The flash fired and the picture came out extremely bright.

Move farther from the subject and shoot. When shooting flash

photography, if the subject is too close to the camera, the picture

may come out extremely bright (overexposure).

In low light, the built-in flash fired a series of flashes.

Pressing the shutter button halfway may trigger the built-in flash to

fire a series of flashes to assist autofocusing. This is called AF-assist

beam. Its effective range is approx. 4 meters/13.1 feet.

When flash was used, the bottom part of the picture came out

unnaturally dark.

You were too close to the subject and the lens barrel created a

shadow. Move further away from the subject. If a hood is attached to

the lens, remove it before taking the flash picture.


In low light, the built-in flash fired a series of flas

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIn low light, the built-in flash fired a series of flas

may trigger the built-in flash to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eumay trigger the built-in flash to

autofocusing. This

www.devic

eman

uals.

euautofocusing. This is called AF-assist

www.devic

eman

uals.

euis called AF-assist

beam. Its effective range is approx. 4 meters/13.1 feet.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eubeam. Its effective range is approx. 4 meters/13.1 feet.

When flash was used, the bottom part of the picture cam

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhen flash was used, the bottom part of the picture cam

You were too close to the subject and the lens barrel cre

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You were too close to the subject and the lens barrel cre

shadow. Move further away from t

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shadow. Move further away from the subject. If a hood is attached to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

he subject. If a hood is attached to


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

61

Depending on the scene, position the subject toward the left or right to

create a balanced background and good perspective.

In the <A> mode, while you press the shutter button halfway to focus

a still subject, the focus will be locked. You can then recompose the

shot and press the shutter button completely to take the picture. This is

called “focus lock”. Focus lock is also possible in other Basic Zone

modes (except <5> ).

In the <A> mode, if the subject moves (distance to camera changes)

while or after you focus, AI Servo AF will take effect to focus the subject

continuously. (The beeper will continue beeping softly.) As long as you

keep aiming the AF point on the subject while pressing the shutter

button halfway, the focusing will be continuous. When you want to take

the picture, press the shutter button completely.

A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)

Recomposing the Shot

Shooting a Moving Subject

www.devicemanuals.euDepending on the scene, position the subject toward the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDepending on the scene, position the subject toward the

create a balanced background and good perspective.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucreate a balanced background and good perspective.

> mode, while you press the shutter button halfway to focus

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> mode, while you press the shutter button halfway to focus

a still subject, the focus will be locked. You can then recomp

www.devic

eman

uals.

eua still subject, the focus will be locked. You can then recomp

shot and press the shutter button completely to take the pi

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shot and press the shutter button completely to take the pi

also possible in other Basic Zone

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

also possible in other Basic Zone



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)

62

You can shoot while viewing the image on the LCD monitor. This is

called “Live View shooting”. For details, see page 145.

1 Display the Live View image on

the LCD monitor.

Press the <A> button.

The Live View image will appear on

the LCD monitor.


Press the shutter button halfway to

focus.

When focus is achieved, the AF point

will turn green and the beeper will

sound.

3 Take the picture.

Press the shutter button completely.

The picture will be taken and the

captured image is displayed on the

LCD monitor.

After the image review ends, the

camera will return to Live View

shooting automatically.

Press the <A> button to end the

Live View shooting.

You can also rotate the LCD monitor in different directions (p.33).


Normal angle Low angle High angle


Focus the subject.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFocus the subject.


www.devic

eman

uals.

euPress the shutter button halfway to


www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhen focus is achieved, the AF point


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


sound.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

sound.

Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu
















www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

63

The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings

automatically. In places where flash photography is prohibited, use the

<7> (Flash Off) mode. This mode is also effective for capturing the

particular ambience of a scene, such as candlelight scenes.

Prevent camera shake if the numeric display in the viewfinder

blinks.

Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the

viewfinder’s shutter speed display will blink. Hold the camera steady

or use a tripod. When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to

reduce blur caused by camera shake.

Take portraits without flash.

In low-light conditions, tell the subject to keep still until the picture is

taken. If the person moves during the exposure, he or she may look

blurred in the picture.

7 Disabling Flash

Shooting Tips


Prevent camera shake if the numeric display in the vie

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Prevent camera shake if the numeric display in the vie

Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the

viewfinder’s shutter speed display will blink. Hold the camewww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

viewfinder’s shutter speed display will blink. Hold the camewww.devicemanuals.eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

64

In the <C> mode, you can easily change the depth of field, drive

mode, and flash firing. You can also choose the ambience you want to

convey in your images. The default settings are the same as the <A>

mode.* CA stands for Creative Auto.

1 Set the Mode Dial to <C>.

2 Press the <Q> button. (7)

The Quick Control screen will appear.

3 Set the desired function.


function to be set.



For setting procedure and details on

each function, see pages 65-66.

4 Take the picture.


take the picture.

C Creative Auto Shooting


> button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button.


www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe Quick Control screen will appear.

Set the desired function.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the desired function.

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

function to be set.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

function to be set.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

65


Pressing the <Q> button enables you to set the following:

(1) Ambience-based shots

You can choose the ambience you want to convey in your images.

Press the key or turn the <6> dial to select the desired

ambience. You can also select it from a list by pressing <0>. For

details, see page 77.

(2) Blurring/sharpening the background

If you move the index mark toward the left, the background will look

more blurred. If you move it toward the right, the background will

look more in focus. If you want to blur the background, see “Shooting

Portraits” on page 67. Press the key or turn the <6> dial to

select the desired ambience.

Depending on the lens and shooting conditions, the background

may not look so blurred. This function cannot be set (grayed out)

while the built-in flash is raised in the <a> or <D> mode. If flash is

used, this setting will not be applied.

Shutter speed (1)

(2)

(4)

Battery check Possible shots

ISO speed

Image-recording quality

Aperture

(3)


> button enables you to set the following:

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button enables you to set the following:

You can choose the ambience you w

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can choose the ambience you w

> key or turn the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> key or turn the <

ambience. You can also select it from a list by pressing <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ambience. You can also select it from a list by pressing <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


If you move the index mark toward www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If you move the index mark toward

more blurred. If you move it toward the right, the backgroundwww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

more blurred. If you move it toward the right, the backgroundwww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

66

(3) Drive mode: Turn the <6> dial to set it as desired. You can also

select it from a list by pressing <0>.

 Single shooting:

Shoot one image at a time.

 Continuous shooting:

While you hold down the shutter button completely,

shots will be taken continuously. You can shoot up to

approx. 5 shots per sec.

<Q> Self-timer: 10sec./remote:

The picture is taken 10 seconds after you press the

shutter button. A remote controller can also be used.

<l>Self-timer: 2sec.:


shutter button.

<q>Self-timer: Continuous:

Press the <V> key to set the number of multiple

shots (2 to 10) to be taken with the self-timer. 10

seconds after you press the shutter button, the set

number of multiple shots will be taken.

(4) Flash firing: Turn the <6> dial to set it as desired. You can also

select it from a list by pressing <0>.

<a> Auto flash : The flash fires automatically when necessary.

 Flash on : The flash fires at all times.

Flash off : The flash is disabled.

If you use an external Speedlite, [Flash firing] cannot be set.

When using the self-timer, see the notes on page 106.

When using , see “Disabling Flash” on page 63.



www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe picture is taken 10 seconds after you press the

shutter button. A remote controller can also be used.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eushutter button. A remote controller can also be used.

conds after you press the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euconds after you press the

> key to set the number of multiple

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> key to set the number of multiple


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


: Turn the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Turn the <6

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

6> dial to set it as desired. You can also

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> dial to set it as desired. You can also

select it from a list by pressing <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

select it from a list by pressing <

Auto flash

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Auto flash : The flash fires automatically when necessary.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: The flash fires automatically when necessary.

Flash on www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Flash on : The flash fires at all times.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: The flash fires at all times.

Flash off www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Flash off

67

The <2> (Portrait) mode blurs the background to make the human

subject stand out. It also makes skin tones and the hair look softer.

The further the distance between the subject and background,

the better.

The further the distance between the subject and background, the

more blurred the background will look. The subject will also stand

out better in front of a plain, dark background.

Use a telephoto lens.

If you have a zoom lens, use the telephoto end to fill the frame with

the subject from the waist up. Move in closer if necessary.

Focus the face.

Check that the AF point covering the face flashes in red. For close-

ups of the face, focus the eyes.

2 Shooting Portraits

Shooting Tips

The default setting is (Continuous shooting). If you hold down the

shutter button, you can shoot continuously to obtain different poses and

facial expressions (max. approx. 5 shots/sec.).

If necessary, the built-in flash will fire automatically.


The further the distance between the subject and backgro

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The further the distance between the subject and backgro


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


more blurred the background will

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

more blurred the background will

out better in front of a plain, dark background.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

out better in front of a plain, dark background.

Use a telephoto lens.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Use a telephoto lens.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

68

Use the <3> (Landscape) mode for wide scenery or to have

everything in focus from near to far. For vivid blues and greens, and

very sharp and crisp images.

With a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end.

When using the wide-angle end of a zoom lens, objects near and far

will be in focus better than at the telephoto end. It also adds breadth

to landscapes.

Shooting night scenes.

Since the built-in flash will be disabled, this mode <3> is also good

for night scenes.

When shooting night scenes, use a tripod to prevent camera shake.

3 Shooting Landscapes

Shooting Tips

The built-in flash will not fire even in backlit or low-light conditions.



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


When using the wide-angle end of a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When using the wide-angle end of a

will be in focus better than at the telephoto end. It

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

will be in focus better than at the telephoto end. It

to landscapes. www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

to landscapes.

Shooting night scenes. www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Shooting night scenes. www.devicemanuals.eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

69

When you want to photograph flowers or small things up close, use the

<4> (Close-up) mode. To make small things appear much larger, use a

macro lens (sold separately).

Use a simple background.

A simple background makes the flower, etc., stand out better.

Move as close as possible to the subject.

Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance. Some lenses

have indications such as <40.25m/0.8ft>. The lens minimum

focusing distance is measured from the <V> (focal plane) mark on

the top of the camera to the subject. If you are too close to the

subject, the focus confirmation light <o> will blink.

Under low light, the built-in flash will fire. If you are too close to the

subject and the bottom of the picture looks dark, move away from

the subject.

With a zoom lens, use the telephoto end.

If you have a zoom lens, using the telephoto end will make the

subject look larger.

4 Shooting Close-ups

Shooting Tips



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance. Some lenses www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance. Some lenses

have indications such as <www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

have indications such as <www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

70

To photograph a moving subject, whether it is a child running or a

moving vehicle, use the <5> (Sports) mode.

Use a telephoto lens.

Using a telephoto lens is recommended so you can shoot from afar.

Use the center AF point to focus.

Aim the center AF point over the subject, then press the shutter

button halfway to autofocus. During autofocusing, the beeper will

continue beeping softly. If focus cannot be achieved, the focus

confirmation light <o> will blink.

The default setting is (Continuous shooting). When you want

to take the picture, press the shutter button completely. If you hold

down the shutter button, continuous shooting (max. approx. 5 shots

per sec.) and autofocusing will take effect to capture the movement

of the subject.

5 Shooting Moving Subjects

Shooting Tips

Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the viewfinder’s

shutter speed display on the bottom left will blink. Hold the camera steady

and shoot.


Using a telephoto lens is recommend

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Using a telephoto lens is recommend


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Aim the center AF point over the subject, then press the shutt

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Aim the center AF point over the subject, then press the shutt

button halfway to autofocus. Duriwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

button halfway to autofocus. Duri

continue beeping softly. If focus cannot be achieved, the www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

continue beeping softly. If focus cannot be achieved, the www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

71

Select “Night Portrait”, “Handheld Night Scene”, or “HDR Backlight

Control” shooting mode. The camera sets everything to suit the

selected shooting mode.

1 Set the Mode Dial to <8>.



3 Select the shooting mode.

Press the <V> or key to

select the shooting mode icon.

Turn the <6> dial to select a

shooting mode.

You can also select the shooting

mode icon and press <0> to display

a selection of shooting modes from

which you can select one.

Available Shooting Modes in the <8> Mode

8: Special Scene Mode

Shooting Mode Page

6 Night Portrait p.72

F Handheld Night Scene p.73

G HDR Backlight Control p.74


Select the shooting mode.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the shooting mode.

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Turn the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Turn the <

shooting mode.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shooting mode.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

72

To shoot people at night and obtain a natural-looking night scene in the

background, use the <6> (Night Portrait) mode.

Use a wide-angle lens and a tripod.

When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to obtain a wide

night view. Also, use a tripod to prevent camera shake.

Check the subject’s brightness.

Under low light, the built-in flash will fire automatically to obtain a

good exposure of the subject. You should then play back the image

to check the image brightness. If the subject looks dark, move

nearer and shoot again.

Also shoot in another shooting mode.

Since camera shake is prone to occur with night shots, shooting also

with <A> and <F> is recommended.

6 Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod)

Shooting Tips

Tell the subject to keep still even after the flash fires.

If you use the self-timer together with flash, the self-timer lamp will light

up briefly after the picture is taken.

See the caution on page 75.



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


When using a zoom lens, use th

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When using a zoom lens, use th


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Under low light, the built-in flash wiwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Under low light, the built-in flash wi

good exposure of the subject. Ywww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

good exposure of the subject. Ywww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

73

Normally, a tripod is necessary to steady your camera when shooting a

night scene. However, with the <F> (Handheld Night Scene) mode,

you can shoot night scenes while handholding the camera. Four shots

are taken continuously for each picture, and the resulting image with

reduced camera shake is recorded.

Hold the camera firmly.

While shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In this mode,

four shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if

there is significant misalignment in any of the four shots due to

camera shake, they may not align properly in the final image.

For shots of people, turn on the flash.

If you want to include people in a night scene shot, press the <Q>

button to set <D> (Flash on).

To take a nice portrait, the first shot will use flash. Tell the person not

to move until all four continuous shots are taken.

F Shooting Night Scenes Handheld

Shooting Tips

See the cautions on page 75.



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


While shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

While shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In

four shots are aligned and merged into a single image. Howww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

four shots are aligned and merged into a single image. Howww.devicemanuals.eu

Shooting Tips

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Shooting Tips

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

74

When shooting a scene having both bright and dark areas, use the

<G> (HDR Backlight Control) mode. When you take one picture in this

mode, three continuous shots are taken at different exposures. This

results in one image, with a wide tonal range, that has minimized the

blocked-up shadows caused by backlighting.* HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.


While shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In this mode,

three shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if

there is significant misalignment in any of the three shots due to

camera shake, they may not align properly in the final image.

G Shooting Backlit Scenes

Shooting Tips

Flash cannot be used. In low light, the AF-assist beam will be emitted

(p.101).

See the cautions on page 75.



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


While shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

While shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In

three shots are aligned and merged into a single image. Howww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

three shots are aligned and merged into a single image. Howww.devicemanuals.eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

75

Caution for <6> (Night Portrait) and <F> (Handheld Night Scene)During Live View shooting, it may be difficult to focus dots of light such as

in a night scene. In such a case, you should set the AF method to [Quick

mode] and shoot. If it is still difficult to focus, set the lens’ focus mode

switch to [MF] and focus manually.

Cautions for <F> (Handheld Night Scene)When shooting flash photography, if the subject is too close to the

camera, the picture may come out extremely bright (overexposure).

If you use flash to shoot a night scene with few lights, the shots may not

align correctly. This can result in a blurry photo.

If you use flash and the human subject is close to the background which

is also illuminated by the flash, the shots may not align correctly. This

can result in a blurry photo. Unnatural shadows and unsuitable colors

may also appear.

Shooting with an external Speedlite

� When using a Speedlite with automatic flash coverage setting, the zoom

position will be fixed to the wide end, regardless of the lens’ zoom position.

� When using a Speedlite with manual flash coverage switch, shoot with

the flash head retracted to the wide (normal) position.

Cautions for <G> (HDR Backlight Control)

Note that the image may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and

may look irregular or have significant noise.

HDR Backlight Control may not be effective for excessively backlit

scenes or extremely high-contrast scenes.

Cautions for <F> (Handheld Night Scene) and <G> (HDR Backlight

Control)Compared with other shooting modes, the shooting area will be smaller.

1+73 or 1 cannot be selected. Even if 1+73 or 1 has been

set for another shooting mode, the picture will be recorded in 73.

If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement will leave

afterimages.

The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns

(lattice, stripes, etc.), flat or single-tone images, or greatly misaligned

shots caused by camera shake.

Compared to normal shooting, recording the image to the card will take

longer. During the processing of the images, “BUSY” will be displayed

and you cannot take another picture until the processing is completed.

If the shooting mode is set to <F> or <G>, direct printing (p.280) is not

possible.


If you use flash and the human subject is close to the ba

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf you use flash and the human subject is close to the ba

flash, the shots may not align correctly. This

www.devic

eman

uals.

euflash, the shots may not align correctly. This

can result in a blurry photo. Unnatural shadows and unsuitab

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucan result in a blurry photo. Unnatural shadows and unsuitab

� When using a Speedlite with automatic flash coverage setti

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� When using a Speedlite with automatic flash coverage setti

position will be fixed to the wide end, regardless of the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

position will be fixed to the wide end, regardless of the

� When using a Speedlite with manual flash coverage switch,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� When using a Speedlite with manual flash coverage switch,


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


> (HDR Backlight Control)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> (HDR Backlight Control)

Note that the image may not be rendered with a smooth grad

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Note that the image may not be rendered with a smooth grad


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


HDR Backlight Control may not be effective for excessively bac

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

HDR Backlight Control may not be effective for excessively bac


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Cautions for <www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Cautions for <Fwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

F> (Handheld Night Scene) and <www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> (Handheld Night Scene) and <

76

In Basic Zone modes when the shooting

settings screen is displayed, you can

press the <Q> button to display the

Quick Control screen. The table below

indicates the functions that can be set

with the Quick Control screen in each

Basic Zone mode.

1 Set the Mode Dial to a Basic Zone mode.

2Press the <Q> button. (7)


3Set the function.

Press the <S> key to select a function. (This step is not

necessary in the <A> and <7> modes.)

The selected function and Feature guide (p.52) will appear.

Press the key or turn the <6> dial to change the setting.

Settable Functions in Basic Zone Modes

o: Default setting k: User selectable : Not selectable

* If you change the shooting mode or set the power switch to <2>, it will revert

to the default settings (except the self-timer).

Q Quick Control

Function A 7 C 2 3 4 58

6 F G

Drive mode

u: Single shooting o o o k o o k o o oi: Continuous shooting k k k o k k o k k k

Self-timer (p.106)

Q k k k k k k k k k kl k k k k k k k k k kq k k k k k k k k k k

Flash firing

:a Automatic firing o o o o oD: Flash on (Fires at all times) k kb: Flash off o k o o o o

Ambience-based shots (p.77) k k k k k k kLight/scene-based shots (p.81) k k k kBlurring/sharpening the background (p.65) k

Example: Portrait mode


> key to select a function. (This step is not

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> key to select a function. (This step is not

7

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

7> modes.)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> modes.)

The selected function and Feature guide (p.52) will appe

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The selected function and Feature guide (p.52) will appe

> key or turn the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> key or turn the <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


: Default setting

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Default setting



: Single shootingwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Single shootingwww.devicemanuals.eu

77

Except in the <A>, <7>, and <G> Basic Zone modes, you can

select the ambience for shooting.

1 Set the Mode Dial to any of the

following modes: <C>, <2>,

<3>, <4>, <5>, or <8>.

If the shooting mode is <8>, set

one of the following: <F> or <6>.

2 Display the Live View image.

Press the <A> button to display the

Live View image.

You can check the ambience effect

on the screen.

3 On the Quick Control screen,

select the desired ambience.

Press the <Q> button (7).

Press the <V> key to select [

Standard setting]. [Ambience-

based shots] will appear on the

screen.

Shoot by Ambience Selection

Ambience C 2 3 4 58

Ambience Effect6 F

Standard setting k k k k k k k No setting

Vivid k k k k k k k Low / Standard / Strong

Soft k k k k k k k Low / Standard / Strong

Warm k k k k k k k Low / Standard / Strong

Intense k k k k k k k Low / Standard / Strong

Cool k k k k k k k Low / Standard / Strong

Brighter k k k k k k k Low / Medium / High

Darker k k k k k k k Low / Medium / High

Monochrome k k k k k k k Blue / B/W / Sepia


Set the Mode Dial to any of the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


following modes: <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

following modes: <

<

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

<3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3>, <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>, <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

2

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

2


Low / Standard / Strong

www.devic

eman

uals.

euLow / Standard / Strong

k k k k k k k

www.devic

eman

uals.

euk k k k k k k

www.devicemanuals.euLow / Medium / High

www.devic

eman

uals.

euLow / Medium / High

k k k k k k k

www.devic

eman

uals.

euk k k k k k k

k k k k k k k

www.devic

eman

uals.

euk k k k k k k









www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

78


<6> dial to select the desired

ambience.

The LCD monitor will display how the

image will look with the selected

ambience.

4 Set the ambience effect.


effect bar so that [Effect] appears at

the bottom.


<6> dial to select the desired effect.

5 Take the picture.


take the picture.

To shoot through the viewfinder, first

press the <A> button to exit Live

View shooting. Then press the shutter

button completely to take the picture.

If you change the shooting mode or

set the power switch to <2>, the

setting will revert back to

[ Standard setting].

The Live View image shown with the ambience setting applied will not

look exactly the same as the actual photo taken.

Using flash may minimize the ambience effect.

In bright outdoors, the Live View image you see on the screen may not

have exactly the same brightness or ambience as the actual photo. Set

[52: LCD brightness] to 4 and look at the image while the screen is

unaffected by stray light.

If you do not want the Live View image to be displayed when setting

functions, press the <Q> button after step 1. Then you can set [Ambience-

based shots] and [Effect] on the Quick Control screen.

www.devicemanuals.eu key or turn the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu key or turn the

dial to select the desired effect.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu dial to select the desired effect.

Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTake the picture.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

take the picture.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

press the <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

79


Ambience Settings

Standard setting

Standard image characteristics for the respective shooting mode.

Note that <2> has image characteristics geared for portraits and

<3> is geared for landscapes. Each ambience is a modification of

the respective shooting mode’s image characteristics.

Vivid

The subject will look sharp and vivid. It makes the photo look more

impressive than with [ Standard setting].

Soft

The subject will look softer and more dainty. Good for portraits, pets,

flowers, etc.

Warm

The subject will look softer with warmer colors. Good for portraits,

pets, and other subjects to which you want to give a warm look.

Intense

While the overall brightness is slightly lowered, the subject is

emphasized for a more intense feeling. Makes the human or living

subject stand out more.

Cool

The overall brightness is slightly lowered with a cooler color cast. A

subject in the shade will look more calm and impressive.

www.devicemanuals.eure dainty. Good for portraits, pets,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eure dainty. Good for portraits, pets,

fter with warmer colors. Good for portraits,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eufter with warmer colors. Good for portraits,

pets, and other subjects to which

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

pets, and other subjects to which you want to give a warm look.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

you want to give a warm look.

ness is slightly lowered, the subject is

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ness is slightly lowered, the subject is

emphasized for a more intense feeling. Makes the human or livin

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

emphasized for a more intense feeling. Makes the human or livin


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


The overall brightness is slightly lo

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The overall brightness is slightly lo

subject in the shade will look

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

subject in the shade will look

80

Brighter

The picture will look brighter.

Darker

The picture will look darker.

Monochrome

The picture will be monochrome. You can select the monochrome

color to be black and white, sepia, or blue. When [Monochrome] is

selected, <0> will appear in the viewfinder.

81

In the <2>, <3>, <4>, and <5> Basic Zone modes, you can shoot

while the settings match the lighting or scene type. Normally,

[ Default setting] is adequate, but if the settings match the lighting

condition or scene, the picture will look more accurate to your eye.

For Live View shooting, if you set both [Light/scene-based shots] and

[Ambience-based shots] (p.77), you should first set [Light/scene-

based shots]. This will make it easier to see the resulting effect on the

LCD monitor.


following modes: <2>, <3>,

<4> or <5>.


Press the <A> button to display the

Live View image.

You can check the resulting effect on

the screen.

Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type

Lighting or Scene 2 3 4 5

Default setting k k k k

Daylight k k k k

Shade k k k k

Cloudy k k k k

Tungsten light k k k

Fluorescent light k k k

Sunset k k k k


1

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



k

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

k



k

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

k






www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

82

3 On the Quick Control screen,

select the lighting or scene type.

Press the <Q> button (7).

Press the <V> key to select [

Default setting]. [Light/scene-

based shots] will appear on the

screen.



lighting or scene type.

The resulting image with the selected

lighting or scene type will be

displayed.

4 Take the picture.


take the picture.


press the <A> button to exit Live


button completely to take the picture.

If you change the shooting mode or

set the power switch to <2>, the

setting will revert back to [ Default

setting].

If you use flash, the setting will switch to [ Default setting]. (However,

the shooting information will display the lighting or scene type that was set.)

If you want to set this together with [Ambience-based shots], set the

[Light/scene-based shots] that best matches the ambience you have

set. In the case of [Sunset] for example, warm colors will become

prominent so the ambience you set may not work well.

If you do not want the Live View image to be displayed when setting

functions, press the <Q> button after step 1. Then you can set [Light/

scene-based shots] on the Quick Control screen.


lighting or scene type.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eulighting or scene type.

The resulting image with the selected

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe resulting image with the selected

lighting or scene type will be

www.devic

eman

uals.

eulighting or scene type will be

Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Take the picture.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

press the <

83


Lighting or Scene Type Settings

Default setting

Default setting suited for most subjects.

Daylight

For subjects under sunlight. Gives more natural-looking blue skies

and greenery, and reproduces light-colored flowers better.

Shade

For subjects in the shade. Suitable for skin tones, which may look

too bluish, and for light-colored flowers.

Cloudy

For subjects under overcast skies. Makes skin tones and

landscapes, which may otherwise look dull on a cloudy day, look

warmer. Also effective for light-colored flowers.

Tungsten light

For subjects lit under tungsten lighting. Reduces the reddish-orange

color cast caused by tungsten lighting.

Fluorescent light

For subjects under fluorescent lighting. Suited for all types of

fluorescent lighting.

Sunset

Suitable when you want to capture the sunset’s impressive colors.

www.devicemanuals.euFor subjects under overcast skies. Makes skin tones and

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFor subjects under overcast skies. Makes skin tones and

look dull on a cloudy day, look

www.devic

eman

uals.

eulook dull on a cloudy day, look

warmer. Also effective for light-colored flowers.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euwarmer. Also effective for light-colored flowers.

For subjects lit under tungsten li

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For subjects lit under tungsten lighting. Reduces the reddish-orange

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ghting. Reduces the reddish-orange


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


For subjects under fluorescent lighting. Suited for all types

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For subjects under fluorescent lighting. Suited for all types

Suitable when you want to capture the sunset’s impressive colo

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Suitable when you want to capture the sunset’s impressive colo

84

The easiest way to play back images is explained below. For more

details on the playback procedure, see page 241.

1 Play back the image.

Press the <x> button.

The last captured image or last image

viewed will appear.

2 Select an image.

To view images starting with the last

image, press the <Y> key. To view

images starting with the first (oldest)

image, press the <Z> key.

Each time you press the 

button, the display format will change.

3 Exit the image playback.

Press the <x> button to exit the

image playback and return to the

shooting settings display.

x Image Playback

No information

Histogram

With basic information

Shooting information display

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTo view images starting with the last

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTo view images starting with the last

image, press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euimage, press the <Y

www.devic

eman

uals.

euY> key. To view

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key. To view

images starting with the first (oldest)

www.devic

eman

uals.

euimages starting with the first (oldest)

image, press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euimage, press the <

Each time you press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



No information

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

No information


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

85

3Creative Shooting

In Basic Zone modes, to prevent spoiled shots, advanced function settings cannot be changed. However, in the <d> (Program AE) mode, you can set various functions and be more creative.

In the <d> mode, the camera sets the shutter speed and

aperture automatically to obtain a standard exposure.

The difference between the Basic Zone modes and <d> is

explained on page 314.

The functions explained in this chapter can also be used in

the <s>, <f>, and <a> modes explained in Chapter

4.

The M mark shown on the right of the page title indicates

that the function is available only in Creative Zone modes

(p.24).

* <d> stands for Program.

* AE stands for Auto Exposure.



Creative Shooting

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCreative Shooting

In Basic Zone modes, to prevent spoiled shots,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

In Basic Zone modes, to prevent spoiled shots, advanced function settings cannot be changed.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

advanced function settings cannot be changed. > (Program AE) mode, you can set

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> (Program AE) mode, you can set various functions and be more creative.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

various functions and be more creative.

> mode, the camera sets the shutter speed and

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> mode, the camera sets the shutter speed and


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


The difference between the Basic Zone modes and <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The difference between the Basic Zone modes and <

explained on page 314.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

explained on page 314.

The functions explained in this www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The functions explained in this

86

The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit

the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.

1 Set the Mode Dial to <d>.


Look through the viewfinder and aim

the selected AF point over the

subject. Then press the shutter button

halfway.


focus lights up briefly in red, and the

focus confirmation light <o> on the

viewfinder’s bottom right lights up (in

One-Shot AF mode).

The shutter speed and aperture will

be set automatically and displayed in

the viewfinder.

3 Check the display.

A standard exposure will be obtained

as long as the shutter speed and

aperture display do not blink.

4 Take the picture.

Compose the shot and press the


d: Program AE


subject. Then press the shutter button

www.devic

eman

uals.

eusubject. Then press the shutter button


www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe dot inside the AF point achieving

focus lights up briefly in red, and the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eufocus lights up briefly in red, and the

focus confirmation light <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eufocus confirmation light <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


One-Shot AF mode).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

One-Shot AF mode).


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


the viewfinder.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the viewfinder.

3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3 Check the display.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Check the display.

87

d: Program AE

Change the ISO speed or use the built-in flash.

To match the subject and ambient lighting level, you can change the

ISO speed (p.92) or use the built-in flash (p.107). In the <d> mode,

the built-in flash will not fire automatically. So under low light, press

the (flash) button to raise the built-in flash.

The program can be shifted. (Program shift)

After pressing the shutter button halfway, turn the <6> dial to

change the shutter speed and aperture setting combination

(program). Program shift is canceled automatically after the picture

is taken. Program shift is not possible with flash.

Shooting Tips

If the “30"” shutter speed and the maximum aperture

blink, it indicates underexposure. Increase the ISO

speed or use flash.

If the “4000” shutter speed and the minimum aperture

blink, it indicates overexposure. Decrease the ISO

speed.

Differences Between <d> and <A> (Scene Intelligent Auto)

In the <A> mode, many functions such as the AF operation and metering

mode are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you can

change are limited. Whereas in the <d> mode, only the shutter speed and

aperture are set automatically. You can freely set the AF operation, metering

mode, and other functions (p.314).


change the shutter speed and aperture setting combination

www.devic

eman

uals.

euchange the shutter speed and aperture setting combination

ed automatically after the picture

www.devic

eman

uals.

eued automatically after the picture

not possible with flash.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu not possible with flash.

88

You can select the pixel count and the image quality. Ten image-

recording quality settings are provided: 73, 83, 74, 84, 7a,

8a, b, c, 1+73, 1.

1 Select [Image quality].

Under the [z1] tab, select [Image

quality], then press <0>.

[Image quality] will appear.

2 Select the image-recording

quality.

The respective quality’s pixel count

and number of possible shots will be

displayed to help you select the

desired quality. Then press <0>.

3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality

Pixels recorded (pixel count)

Possible shots

www.devicemanuals.euThe respective quality’s pixel count

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe respective quality’s pixel count

and number of possible shots will be

www.devic

eman

uals.

euand number of possible shots will be

displayed to help you select the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eudisplayed to help you select the

desired quality. Then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eudesired quality. Then press <

89


* Figures for the file size, number of possible shots, and maximum burst are based on

Canon’s 8 GB test card and testing standards (3:2 aspect ratio, ISO 100, and Standard

Picture Style). These figures will vary depending on the subject, card brand,

aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture Style, Custom Functions, and other settings.

* Figures in parentheses apply to an UHS-I compatible 8 GB card based on Canon’s

testing standards.

Guide to Image-recording Quality Settings (Approx.)

Image QualityPixels Recorded

(megapixels)File Size

(MB)Possible

ShotsMaximum

Burst

73 High quality

JPEG

Approx. 17.9(18M)

6.4 1140 22 (30)

83 3.2 2240 2240 (2240)

74 Medium quality

Approx. 8.0(8M)

3.4 2150 410 (2150)

84 1.7 4200 4200 (4200)

7a

Low quality

Approx. 4.5(4.5M)

2.2 3350 3350 (3350)

8a 1.1 6360 6360 (6360)

bApprox. 2.5

(2.5M)1.3 5570 5570 (5570)

cApprox. 0.35

(0.35M)0.3 21560 21560 (21560)

1+73 High quality

Approx. 17.9(18M)

23.5+6.4 230 3 (3)

1 23.5 290 6 (6)


* Figures for the file size, number of possible shots, and maximu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

* Figures for the file size, number of possible shots, and maximu

Canon’s 8 GB test card and testing standards (3:2 aspect ratio,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Canon’s 8 GB test card and testing standards (3:2 aspect ratio,

These figures will vary depending on the subject, card

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

These figures will vary depending on the subject, card

aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture Style, Custom Functions, a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture Style, Custom Functions, a

* Figures in parentheses apply to an UHS-I compatible 8 GB card

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

* Figures in parentheses apply to an UHS-I compatible 8 GB card


www.devicemanuals.eu5570

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu5570


0.3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0.3


21560

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu21560

23.5+6.4 230 3 (3)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu23.5+6.4 230 3 (3)


23.5

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

23.5








90


I want to select the image-recording quality matching the paper

size for printing.

Refer to the diagram on the left when

choosing the image-recording quality. If

you want to crop the image, selecting a

higher quality (more pixels) such as 73,

83, 1+73, or 1 is recommended.

b is suitable for playing the images on a

digital photo frame. c is suitable for

emailing the image or using it on a Web

site.

What’s the difference between 7 (Fine) and 8 (Normal)?

It indicates a different image quality due to a different compression

rate. Even with the same number of pixels, the 7 image has higher

image quality. If 8 is selected, the image quality will be slightly lower,

but more images can be saved to the card. Both b and c have 7

quality.

I was able to take more shots than the number of possible shots

indicated.

Depending on the shooting conditions, you may be able to take

more shots than was indicated. It may also be fewer than indicated.

The number of possible shots displayed is only approximate.

Does the camera display the maximum burst?

The maximum burst is displayed in the viewfinder’s right side. Since

it is only a single-digit indicator 0 - 9, any number higher than 9 will

be displayed only as “9”. Note that this number will also be displayed

even when no card is installed in the camera. Be careful not to shoot

without a card in the camera.

When should I use 1?

1 images require processing with your computer. For details, see

“About 1” and “About 1+73” on the next page.

FAQ

A4 (29.7x21cm/11.7x8.3in.)

12.7x8.9cm/5.0x3.5in.

A3(42x29.7cm/

16.5x11.7in.)

74

84

A2 (59.4x42cm/23.4x16.5in.)

73

83

1+73

1

7a

8ab

Paper size


c

www.devic

eman

uals.

euc is suitable for

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu is suitable for

emailing the image or using it on a Web

www.devic

eman

uals.

euemailing the image or using it on a Web

(Fine) and

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(Fine) and

It indicates a different image quality due to a different

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

It indicates a different image quality due to a different

rate. Even with the same number of pixels, the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

rate. Even with the same number of pixels, the

is selected, the image quality will be slightly lower,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

is selected, the image quality will be slightly lower,

but more images can be saved to the card. Both

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

but more images can be saved to the card. Both

I was able to take more shots than the number of pos

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

I was able to take more shots than the number of pos

Depending on the shooting conditiwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Depending on the shooting conditi

more shots than was indicated. It may also be fewer than inwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

more shots than was indicated. It may also be fewer than in

91


1 is the raw image data before it is made into 73 or other images.

Although 1 images require software such as Digital Photo

Professional (provided, p.364) so that they can be displayed on the

computer, they also offer flexibility for image adjustments possible only

with 1. 1 is effective when you want to precisely adjust the image

yourself or shoot an important subject.

1+73 records both a 1 and 73 image with a single shot. The

two images are saved to the card simultaneously. The two images will

be saved in the same folder with the same file numbers (file extension

.JPG for JPEG and .CR2 for RAW). 73 images can be viewed or

printed even with a computer that does not have the software provided

with the camera installed.

About 1

About 1+73

File number File extension

0001 . CR21 image

73 image 0001 . JPG

To display 1 images on a computer, using the provided software is

recommended (p.364).

Commercially-available software may not be able to display 1 images

taken with this camera. To see if the 1 images are compatible with

other software, check with the respective software manufacturer.

www.devicemanuals.eu image with a single shot. The

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu image with a single shot. The

multaneously. The two images will

www.devic

eman

uals.

eumultaneously. The two images will

be saved in the same folder with the same file numbers (file

www.devic

eman

uals.

eube saved in the same folder with the same file numbers (file

73

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

73 images can be viewed or

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

images can be viewed or

printed even with a computer that does not have the softwa

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

printed even with a computer that does not have the softwa

















92

Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the

ambient light level. In Basic Zone modes, the ISO speed is set

automatically (p.93).

1 Press the button. (9)

[ISO speed] will appear.

2 Set the ISO speed.


<6> dial to select the desired ISO

speed, then press <0>.

You can also set the ISO speed in the

viewfinder while turning the <6>

dial.

With [AUTO] selected, the ISO speed

will be set automatically (p.93).

ISO Speed Guide

* High ISO speeds will result in grainier images.

i: Changing the ISO SpeedN

ISO SpeedShooting Situation

(No flash)Flash Range

100 - 400 Sunny outdoors The higher the ISO speed,

the farther the flash range

will extend (p.107).

400 - 1600 Overcast skies or evening time

1600 - 12800, H Dark indoors or night

Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [2: ISO expansion] is set to [1:

On], “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) can also be set (p.298).

Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone priority] is

set to [1: Enable], ISO 100 and “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) cannot be

selected (p.299).

Shooting in high temperatures may result in images that look grainier.

Long exposures can also cause irregular colors in the image.

www.devicemanuals.eu> key or turn the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key or turn the

> dial to select the desired ISO

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> dial to select the desired ISO

speed, then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euspeed, then press <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


viewfinder while turning the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

viewfinder while turning the <

dial.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

dial.

With [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

With [AUTO

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AUTO


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



Shooting Situation

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Shooting Situation




Overcast skies or evening timewww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Overcast skies or evening timewww.devicemanuals.eu

93


If the ISO speed is set to [AUTO], the

actual ISO speed to be set will be

displayed when you press the shutter

button halfway. As indicated on the next

page, the ISO speed will be set

automatically to suit the shooting mode.

ISO [AUTO]

When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and

banding) may become noticeable.

If you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject,

overexposure may result.

With ISO 12800 or “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600), the maximum burst for

continuous shooting will greatly decrease.

As “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) is an expanded ISO speed setting,

noise (such as dots of light and banding) and irregular colors will be more

noticeable, and the resolution will be lower than usual.

As the maximum ISO speed that can be set differs between still photo

shooting and movie shooting (manual exposure), the ISO speed you set

may change when you switch from still photo shooting to movie shooting.

Even if you switch back to still photo shooting, the ISO speed will not

revert to the original setting.

The maximum ISO speed settable varies depending on the setting for [2:

ISO expansion] under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)].

� When [0: Off] is set: If you set ISO 12800 during still photo shooting

and then switch to movie shooting, ISO speed will be changed to ISO

6400.

� When [1: On] is set: If you set ISO 12800 or “H” (equivalent to ISO

25600) during still photo shooting and then switch to movie shooting,

the ISO speed will change to “H” (equivalent to ISO 12800).



ISO [AUTO] www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ISO [AUTO] www.devicemanuals.eu

shooting and movie shooting (manual exposure), the ISO spee

www.devic

eman

uals.

eushooting and movie shooting (manual exposure), the ISO spee

may change when you switch from still photo shooting to movie sh

www.devic

eman

uals.

eumay change when you switch from still photo shooting to movie sh

Even if you switch back to still photo shooting, the ISO

www.devic

eman

uals.

euEven if you switch back to still photo shooting, the ISO

The maximum ISO speed settable varies depending on the settin

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe maximum ISO speed settable varies depending on the settin

4: Custom Functions (C.Fn)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


] is set: If you set ISO 12800 during still photo shootin

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] is set: If you set ISO 12800 during still photo shootin

and then switch to movie shooting, ISO speed will be chan

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

and then switch to movie shooting, ISO speed will be chan

] is set: If you set ISO 12800 or “

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] is set: If you set ISO 12800 or “

25600) during still photo shooting and then switch to movie

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

25600) during still photo shooting and then switch to movie

the ISO speed will change to “

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the ISO speed will change to “


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

94


*1: Fixed at ISO 400 for bulb exposures.

*2: Depends on the maximum ISO speed limit set.

*3: If fill flash results in overexposure, ISO 100 or a higher ISO speed will be set.

*4: Except in the A, 6, and F modes.

*5: Automatically set within ISO 400 - ISO 1600 (or up to the maximum limit) in the

C, 2, 3, 4, 5 and <d> modes if you use bounce flash with an external

Speedlite.

For ISO Auto, you can set the maximum ISO speed limit within ISO 400

- ISO 6400.

Under the [z3] tab, select [ISO Auto],

then press <0>. Select the ISO speed,

then press <0>.

Shooting Mode ISO Speed Setting

A/ 7/ C/ 3/ 4/ 5/ 6/ G Automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 6400

2 ISO 100

F Automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 12800

d/ s/ f/ a*1 Automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 6400*2

With flash ISO 400*3*4*5

3 Setting the Maximum ISO Speed for [ISO Auto]N

When [AUTO] is set, the ISO speed is indicated in whole-stop

increments. However, the ISO speed is actually set in finer increments.

Therefore, in the image’s shooting information (p.270), you may find an

ISO speed such as 125 or 640 displayed as the ISO speed.

In the <2> mode, the ISO speed shown in the table is actually used

even if ISO 100 is not displayed.

www.devicemanuals.euhe maximum limit) in the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euhe maximum limit) in the

> modes if you use bounce flash with an external

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> modes if you use bounce flash with an external

For ISO Auto, you can set the maxiwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For ISO Auto, you can set the maxiwww.devicemanuals.eu

Setting the Maximum IS

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Setting the Maximum IS


] is set, the ISO speed is indicated in whole-stop

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] is set, the ISO speed is indicated in whole-stop

increments. However, the ISO speed is actually set in finer

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

increments. However, the ISO speed is actually set in finer

Therefore, in the image’s shooting information (p.270), you

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Therefore, in the image’s shooting information (p.270), you


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


> mode, the ISO speed shown in the table is actually used

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> mode, the ISO speed shown in the table is actually used


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

95

By selecting a Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics

matching your photographic expression or the subject.

In Basic Zone modes, you cannot select the Picture Style.

1 Press the <XA> button.

[Picture Style] will appear.

2 Select a Picture Style.



Picture Style, then press <0>.

D Auto

The color tone will be adjusted to suit the scene. The colors will

look vivid, especially for blue skies, greenery, and sunsets in

nature, outdoor, and sunset scenes.

P Standard

The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose

Picture Style suitable for most scenes.

Q Portrait

For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Suited for close-up

portraits.

By changing the [Color tone] (p.133), you can adjust the skin

tone.

A Optimal Image Characteristics for the SubjectN

Picture Style Characteristics

If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture

Style.www.devicemanuals.eu

Select a Picture Style.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect a Picture Style.

U

www.devic

eman

uals.

euU> key or turn the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key or turn the

> dial to select the desired

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> dial to select the desired

Picture Style, then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPicture Style, then press <

The color tone will be adjusted to suit the scene. The co

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The color tone will be adjusted to suit the scene. The co

look vivid, especiall

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

look vivid, especially for blue skies, greenery, and sunsets in

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

y for blue skies, greenery, and sunsets in


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



If the desired color tone is not obtained with [www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the desired color tone is not obtained with [

96

A Optimal Image Characteristics for the SubjectN

R Landscape

For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images.

Effective for impressive landscapes.

S Neutral

This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with

their computer. For natural colors and subdued images.

U Faithful

This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with

their computer. When the subject is captured under a color

temperature of 5200K, the color is adjusted colorimetrically to

match the subject’s color. Images will appear dull and subdued.

V Monochrome

Creates black-and-white images.

W User Def. 1-3

You can register a basic style such as [Portrait], [Landscape], a

Picture Style file, etc., and adjust it as desired (p.135). Any User

Defined Picture Style that has not been set will have the same

default settings as the [Auto] Picture Style.

Black-and-white images shot in formats other than 1 cannot be

reverted to color. If you want to later shoot pictures in color, make sure

the [Monochrome] setting has been canceled. When [Monochrome] is

selected, <0> will appear in the viewfinder.


temperature of 5200K, the color is adjusted colorimetrically to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eutemperature of 5200K, the color is adjusted colorimetrically to

match the subject’s color. Images will appear dull and subdue

www.devic

eman

uals.

eumatch the subject’s color. Images will appear dull and subdue

You can register a basic style such as [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can register a basic style such as [

Picture Style file, etc., and adjust

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Picture Style file, etc., and adjust

Defined Picture Style that has not been set will have the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Defined Picture Style that has not been set will have the

default settings as the [www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

default settings as the [www.devicemanuals.eu

Black-and-white images shot in formats other than

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Black-and-white images shot in formats other than

reverted to color. If you want to later shoot pictures in col

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

reverted to color. If you want to later shoot pictures in col

] setting has been canceled. When [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] setting has been canceled. When [

> will appear in the viewfinder.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> will appear in the viewfinder.

97

You can select the AF (autofocus) operation characteristics suiting the

shooting conditions or subject. In Basic Zone modes, the optimum AF

operation is set automatically for the respective shooting mode.

1 On the lens, set the focus mode

switch to <AF>.

2 Press the <Zf> button.

[AF operation] will appear.

3 Select the AF operation.


<6> dial to select the desired AF

operation, then press <0>.


Aim the AF point over the subject and

press the shutter button halfway. The

camera will then autofocus in the

selected AF operation.

f: Changing the Autofocus OperationN

www.devicemanuals.eu> button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button.

AF operation

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAF operation] will appear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] will appear.

Select the AF operation.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select the AF operation.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

<

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

<

4

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

4

98


Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button

halfway, the camera will focus only once.

When focus is achieved, the dot inside the AF point achieving focus

lights up briefly in red, and the focus confirmation light <o> in the

viewfinder will also light up.

With evaluative metering (p.117), the exposure setting will be set at

the same time focus is achieved.

While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be

locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.

This AF operation is suited for moving subjects when the focusing

distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button

halfway, the subject will be focused continuously.

The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.

When the AF point selection (p.100) is automatic, the camera first

uses the center AF point to focus. During autofocusing, if the subject

moves away from the center AF point, focus tracking continues as

long as the subject is covered by another AF point.

One-Shot AF for Still Subjects

AI Servo AF for Moving Subjects

If focus cannot be achieved, the focus confirmation light <o> in the

viewfinder will blink. If this occurs, the picture cannot be taken even if the

shutter button is pressed completely. Recompose the picture and try to

focus again. Or see “Subjects Difficult to Focus” (p.103).

If [z1: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus

is achieved.

With AI Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.

Also, the focus confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder will not light up.


While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the fo

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhile you hold down the shutter button halfway, the fo

locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eulocked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.

This AF operation is suited for moving subjects when

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

This AF operation is suited for moving subjects when

distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shu

halfway, the subject will be focused continuously.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

halfway, the subject will be focused continuously.

The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.www.devicemanuals.eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



If focus cannot be achieved, the focus confirmation light <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf focus cannot be achieved, the focus confirmation light <

e picture cannot be

www.devic

eman

uals.

eue picture cannot be

shutter button is pressed completely. Recompose the picture and

www.devic

eman

uals.

eushutter button is pressed completely. Recompose the picture and


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


], the beeper will not sound when focus

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

], the beeper will not sound when focus

99


AI Focus AF switches the AF operation from One-Shot AF to AI

Servo AF automatically if a still subject starts moving.

After the subject is focused in One-Shot AF operation, if the subject

starts moving, the camera will detect the movement, change the AF

operation automatically to AI Servo AF, and keep tracking the

moving subject.

AI Focus AF for Automatic Switching of AF Operation

When focus is achieved with AI Focus AF with the Servo operation active,

the beeper will continue beeping softly. However, the focus confirmation

light <o> in the viewfinder will not light up. Note that focus will not be

locked in this case.



the beeper will continue beeping softly. However, the f

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe beeper will continue beeping softly. However, the focus confirmation

www.devic

eman

uals.

euocus confirmation the beeper will continue beeping softly. However, the focus confirmation the beeper will continue beeping softly. However, the f

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe beeper will continue beeping softly. However, the focus confirmation the beeper will continue beeping softly. However, the f

> in the viewfinder will not light up. Note that focus

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> in the viewfinder will not light up. Note that focus

100

In Basic Zone modes, the camera will normally focus the closest subject

automatically. Therefore, it may not always focus your target subject.

In the <d>, <s>, <f>, and <a> modes, you can select the AF

point and use it to focus the target subject.

1 Press the <S> button. (9)

The selected AF point will be

displayed on the LCD monitor and in

the viewfinder.

2 Select the AF point.

Use the <S> key to select the AF

point.

While looking at the viewfinder, you

can select the AF point by turning the

<6> dial until the desired AF point

lights up in red.

When all the AF points light up,

automatic AF point selection will be

set. The AF point will be selected

automatically to focus the subject.

Pressing <0> toggles the AF point

selection between the center AF point

and automatic AF point selection.


Aim the selected AF point over the

subject and press the shutter button

halfway to focus.

S Selecting the AF PointN

You can also tap the screen to select AF points. During manual AF point

selection, tapping the [ ] icon at the bottom left of the screen will switch

to automatic AF point selection.

www.devicemanuals.euSelect the AF point.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the AF point.

> key to select the AF

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select the AF

While looking at the viewfinder, you

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhile looking at the viewfinder, you


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


6

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

6> dial until the desired AF point

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> dial until the desired AF point

lights up in red.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

lights up in red.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

101


When shooting a portrait up close, use One-Shot AF and focus

the eyes.

If you focus the eyes first, you can then recompose and the face will

remain sharp.

If it is difficult to focus, select and use the center AF point.

The center AF point is the most sensitive among the nine AF points.

To make it easier to focus a moving subject, set the camera to

automatic AF point selection and AI Servo AF (p.98).

The center AF point will first be used to focus the subject. During

autofocusing, if the subject moves away from the center AF point,

focus tracking continues as long as the subject is covered by

another AF point.

Under low-light conditions, when you press the shutter button halfway,

the built-in flash fires a brief burst of flashes. It illuminates the subject to

enable easier autofocusing.

Shooting Tips

AF-Assist Beam with the Built-in Flash

The AF-assist beam will not be fired in the following shooting modes:

<7>, <3>, and <5>.

The AF-assist beam cannot be emitted with AI Servo AF operation.

The effective range of the AF-assist beam emitted by the built-in flash is

approx. 4 meters/13.1 feet.

In Creative Zone modes, when you raise the built-in flash with the 

button (p.107), the AF-assist beam will be emitted when necessary. Note

that depending on the setting for [4: AF-assist beam firing] under [54:

Custom Functions (C.Fn)], AF beam will not be emitted (p.300).


automatic AF point selection and AI Servo AF

www.devic

eman

uals.

euautomatic AF point selection and AI Servo AF

used to focus the subject. During

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu used to focus the subject. During

autofocusing, if the subject moves away from the center AF poin

www.devic

eman

uals.

euautofocusing, if the subject moves away from the center AF poin

as the subject is covered by

www.devic

eman

uals.

euas the subject is covered by

Under low-light conditions, when you

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Under low-light conditions, when you

the built-in flash fires a brief burst of

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the built-in flash fires a brief burst of


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



the Built-in Flash

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the Built-in Flash

102


With maximum apertures up to f/5.6:

Cross-type focusing (vertical and horizontal lines detected

simultaneously) is possible with all AF points. With certain lenses (see

below), the off-center AF points will detect only vertical or horizontal

lines (no cross-type focusing).

With maximum apertures up to f/2.8:

High-precision AF* with vertical and horizontal lines detection is

possible with the center AF point, in addition to the cross-type focusing

(vertical and horizontal lines detected simultaneously).

The remaining eight AF points enable cross-type focusing in the same

way as when using lenses with maximum apertures up to f/5.6.* Except with the EF 28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM and EF 50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro.

The following lenses enable only horizontal-line sensitive focusing with

the three AF points on the left and the three AF points on the right and

only vertical-line sensitive focusing with the top and bottom AF points.

Cross-type focusing is possible only with the center AF point.

EF 35-80mm f/4-5.6

EF 35-80mm f/4-5.6 II

EF 35-80mm f/4-5.6 III

EF 35-80mm f/4-5.6 USM

EF 35-105mm f/4.5-5.6

EF 35-105mm f/4.5-5.6 USM

EF 80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II

EF 80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM

AF Operation and Maximum Lens Apertures

Lenses not Enabling Cross-Type Focusing with all AF Points

If you use an Extender (sold separately) and the maximum aperture

becomes smaller than f/5.6, AF shooting will not be possible (except in

[u+Tracking], [FlexiZone - Multi], and [FlexiZone - Single] during Live

View shooting). For details, refer to the Extender’s instruction manual.


addition to the cross-type focusing

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu addition to the cross-type focusing

(vertical and horizontal lines detected simultaneously).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(vertical and horizontal lines detected simultaneously).

The remaining eight AF points enable cross-type focusing in the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe remaining eight AF points enable cross-type focusing in the

way as when using lenses with maximum apertures up to f/5.6.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euway as when using lenses with maximum apertures up to f/5.6.* Except with the EF 28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM and EF 50mm f/2.5 Comp

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu* Except with the EF 28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM and EF 50mm f/2.5 Comp

The following lenses enable only horizwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The following lenses enable only horiz

the three AF points on the left and the three AF points owww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the three AF points on the left and the three AF points owww.devicemanuals.eu

Lenses not Enabling Cross-Type Focusing with all AF Poi

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Lenses not Enabling Cross-Type Focusing with all AF Poi


If you use an Extender (sold separately) and the maximum apertu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If you use an Extender (sold separately) and the maximum apertu

becomes smaller than f/5.6, AF shooting will not be possibl

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

becomes smaller than f/5.6, AF shooting will not be possibl

FlexiZone - Multi

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

FlexiZone - Multi], and [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

], and [FlexiZone - Single

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

FlexiZone - Single

View shooting). For details, refer to the Extender’s instru

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

View shooting). For details, refer to the Extender’s instru

103

Autofocus can fail to achieve focus (viewfinder’s focus confirmation light

<o> blinks) with certain subjects such as the following:

Very low-contrast subjects

(Example: Blue sky, solid-color walls, etc.)

Subjects in very low light

Extremely backlit or reflective subjects

(Example: Car with a highly reflective body, etc.)

Near and far subjects covered by an AF point

(Example: Animal in a cage, etc.)

Repetitive patterns

(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)

In such cases, do either of the following:

(1) With One-Shot AF, focus an object at the same distance as the

subject and lock the focus before recomposing (p.61).

(2) Set the lens focus mode switch to <MF> and focus manually.


<MF>.


Focus by turning the lens focusing

ring until the subject looks sharp in

the viewfinder.

Subjects Difficult to Focus

MF: Manual Focusing

For subjects difficult to focus during Live View shooting with [u+Tracking],

[FlexiZone - Multi], or [FlexiZone - Single], see page 165.

Focusing ring

If you hold down the shutter button halfway during manual focusing, the AF

point achieving focus will light up briefly in red, the beeper will sound, and

the focus confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder will light up.


(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)

(1) With One-Shot AF, focus an object at the same distance as t

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(1) With One-Shot AF, focus an object at the same distance as t

subject and lock the focus before recomposing (p.61).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eusubject and lock the focus before recomposing (p.61).

(2) Set the lens focus mode switch to <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(2) Set the lens focus mode switch to <MF

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

MF> and focus manually.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> and focus manually.


MF: Manual Focusing

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

MF: Manual Focusing


during Live View shooting with [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

during Live View shooting with [

FlexiZone - Single

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

FlexiZone - Single

104

You can shoot up to approx. 5 shots per second. This is effective for

shooting a child running toward you or capturing different facial

expressions.

1 Press the <YiQ> button.

2 Select .


<6> dial to select continuous

shooting, then press <0>.

3 Take the picture.

The camera shoots continuously

while you hold down the shutter

button completely.

Also set the AF operation (p.97) matching the subject.

� For a moving subject

When AI Servo AF is set, focusing will be continuous during

continuous shooting.

� For still subjects

When One-Shot AF is set, the camera will focus only once during


Flash can also be used.

Since the flash will require recycling time, the continuous shooting

speed will be slower.

i Continuous Shooting

Shooting Tips


shooting, then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eushooting, then press <

Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTake the picture.

The camera shoots continuously

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe camera shoots continuously

while you hold down the shutter

www.devic

eman

uals.

euwhile you hold down the shutter

button completely.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

button completely.

Also set the AF operation

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Also set the AF operation (p.97)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(p.97)

For a moving subject

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For a moving subject

When AI Servo AF is set, focu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When AI Servo AF is set, focu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


For still subjectswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For still subjects

When One-Shot AF is set, the camera will focus only once during www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When One-Shot AF is set, the camera will focus only once during

105

i Continuous Shooting

The maximum continuous shooting speed of approx. 5 shots per second

is achieved* with a shutter speed of 1/500 sec. or faster and at the

maximum aperture (differs depending on the lens). The continuous

shooting speed may decrease due to shutter speed, aperture, subject

conditions, brightness, lens, flash use, etc.

* With the following lenses, 5 shots per second is achieved with

One-Shot AF and the Image Stabilizer turned off: EF 300mm f/4L IS

USM, EF 28-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM, EF 75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM,

and EF 100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM.

In AI Servo AF operation, the continuous shooting speed may become

slightly slower depending on the subject and the lens used.

When the battery level is low, the continuous shooting speed will become

slightly slower.



subject and the lens used.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eusubject and the lens used.

When the battery level is low, the continuous shooting spee

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhen the battery level is low, the continuous shooting spee

106

1 Press the <YiQ> button.

2 Select the self-timer.


<6> dial to select the self-timer,

then press <0>.

Q: 10-sec. self-timer

The remote controller can also be used (p.307).

l: 2-sec. self-timer (p.142)

q: 10-sec. self-timer plus

continuous shots

Press the <V> key to set the

number of multiple shots (2 to 10)

to be taken with the self-timer.

3 Take the picture.

Look through the viewfinder, focus the subject,

then press the shutter button completely.

You can check the self-timer operation with

the self-timer lamp, beeper, and countdown

display (in seconds) on the LCD monitor.

Two seconds before the picture is

taken, the self-timer lamp will light up

and the beeper will sound faster.

j Using the Self-timer

With <q>, the interval between the multiple shots may be prolonged depending on the shooting functions settings such as the image-recording quality or flash.If you do not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter button, attach the eyepiece cover (p.308). If stray light enters the viewfinder when the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.

The <l> enables you to shoot while not touching the camera mounted on a

tripod. This prevents camera shake while you shoot still lifes or long exposures.

After taking self-timer shots, playing back the image (p.84) to check focus and exposure is recommended.When using the self-timer to shoot only yourself, use focus lock (p.61) on an object at about the same distance as where you will stand.To cancel the self-timer after it starts, press the <YiQ> button.


10-sec. self-timer plus

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu10-sec. self-timer plus

continuous shots

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucontinuous shots

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPress the <V

www.devic

eman

uals.

euV> key to set the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to set the

number of multiple shots (2 to 10)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eunumber of multiple shots (2 to 10)


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Take the picture.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

107

In indoors, low light, or backlit conditions in daylight, just raise the built-

in flash and press the shutter button to take flash pictures. In the <d>

mode, the shutter speed (1/60 sec. - 1/200 sec.) will be set

automatically to prevent camera shake.

1 Press the <D> button.

In Creative Zone modes, you can

press the <D> button anytime to take

flash pictures.

While the flash is recycling, “DbuSY”

is displayed in the viewfinder, and

[BUSYD] is displayed on the LCD

monitor.

2 Press the shutter button halfway.

In the bottom left of the viewfinder,

check that the <D> icon is lit.

3 Take the picture.

When focus is achieved and you

press the shutter button completely,

the flash will fire for the picture.

Effective Flash Range [Approx. in meters/feet]

D Using the Built-in Flash

ISO Speed(p.92)

EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STMEF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM

Wide Angle Telephoto

100 1 - 3.7 / 3.3 - 12.1 1 - 2.3 / 3.3 - 7.5

200 1 - 5.3 / 3.3 - 17.4 1 - 3.3 / 3.3 - 10.8

400 1 - 7.4 / 3.3 - 24.3 1 - 4.6 / 3.3 - 15.1

800 1 - 10.5 / 3.3 - 34.4 1 - 6.6 / 3.3 - 21.7

1600 1 - 14.9 / 3.3 - 48.9 1 - 9.3 / 3.3 - 30.5

3200 1 - 21.0 / 3.3 - 68.9 1 - 13.1 / 3.3 - 43.0

6400 1 - 29.7 / 3.3 - 97.4 1 - 18.6 / 3.3 - 61.0

12800 1 - 42.0 / 3.3 - 137.8 1 - 26.3 / 3.3 - 86.3

H: 25600 1 - 59.4 / 3.3 - 194.9 1 - 37.1 / 3.3 - 121.7


While the flash is recycling, “

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhile the flash is recycling, “

is displayed in the viewfinder, and

www.devic

eman

uals.

euis displayed in the viewfinder, and

] is displayed on the LCD

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] is displayed on the LCD

Press the shutter button halfway.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPress the shutter button halfway.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


check that the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

check that the <

3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3 Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Effective Flash Rangewww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Effective Flash Rangewww.devicemanuals.eu

108


If the subject is far away, increase the ISO speed (p.92).

By increasing the ISO speed, you can extend the flash range.

In bright light, decrease the ISO speed.

If the exposure setting in the viewfinder blinks, decrease the ISO speed.

Detach the lens hood and do not get too close to the subject.

If the lens has a hood attached or you are too close to the subject,

the bottom of the picture may look dark due to the obstructed flash.

For important shots, check the image on the LCD monitor to make

sure the flash exposure looks natural (not dark at the bottom).

Using the red-eye reduction lamp before taking a flash picture can

reduce red eye.

Red-eye reduction will function in any shooting mode except <7>,

<3>, <5>, or <G>.

Under the [z1] tab, select [Red-eye

reduc.], then press <0>. Select

[Enable], then press <0>.

For flash photography, when you press

the shutter button halfway, the red-eye

reduction lamp will light up. Then when

you press the shutter button

completely, the picture will be taken.

Shooting Tips

3 Red-eye Reduction

The red-eye reduction feature is most effective when the subject looks at

the red-eye reduction lamp, when the room is well lit, or when you are

close to the subject.

When you press the shutter button halfway, the

scale display on the bottom of the viewfinder will

shrink and turn off. For best results, take the picture

after this scale display turns off.

The effectiveness of red-eye reduction varies depending on the subject.


For important shots, check the image on the LCD monitor to make

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFor important shots, check the image on the LCD monitor to make

sure the flash exposure looks natural (not dark at the bottom).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eusure the flash exposure looks natural (not dark at the bottom).

before taking a flash picture can

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

before taking a flash picture can

in any shooting mode except <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

in any shooting mode except <



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Under the [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Under the [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

109

4Advanced Shooting

This chapter builds on Chapter 3 and introduces more ways to shoot creatively.

The first half of this chapter explains how to use the <s>,

<f>, and <a> modes on the Mode Dial.

All the functions explained in Chapter 3 can also be used in

the <s>, <f>, and <a> modes.

To see which functions can be used in each shooting mode,

see page 314.

The M mark shown on the right of the page title indicates

that the function is available only in Creative Zone modes

(p.24).

The pointer icon <c> displayed

together with the shutter speed, aperture

setting, or exposure compensation

amount indicates that you can turn the

<6> dial to adjust the respective

setting.

c About the Main Dial Pointer


www.devicemanuals.euAdvanced Shooting

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAdvanced Shooting

This chapter builds on Chapter 3 and introduces more

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

This chapter builds on Chapter 3 and introduces more

The first half of this chapter explains how to use the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The first half of this chapter explains how to use the <

> modes on the Mode Dial.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> modes on the Mode Dial.

All the functions explained in Chapter 3 can also be used

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

All the functions explained in Chapter 3 can also be used

f

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

f>, and <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>, and <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


see page 314.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

see page 314.

mark shown on the right of the page title indicates www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

mark shown on the right of the page title indicates

110

You can either freeze the action or create motion blur with the <s>

(Shutter-priority AE) mode on the Mode Dial.

* <s> stands for Time value.

1 Set the Mode Dial to <s>.

2 Set the desired shutter speed.

See “Shooting Tips” for advice on

setting the shutter speed.

Turning the <6> dial to the right

sets a faster shutter speed, and

turning it to the left sets a slower one.

3 Take the picture.

When you focus and press the

shutter button completely, the picture

will be taken at the selected shutter

speed.

s: Conveying the Subject’s Movement

Blurred motion

(Slow shutter speed: 1/30 sec.)

Frozen action

(Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.)

Shutter Speed Display

The LCD monitor displays the shutter speed as a fraction. However, the

viewfinder displays only the denominator. Also, “0"5” indicates 0.5 sec. and

“15"” is 15 sec.




Set the Mode Dial to <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSet the Mode Dial to <

Set the desired shutter speed.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the desired shutter speed.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Frozen action

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFrozen action

(Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.)


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

111

s: Conveying the Subject’s Movement

To freeze the motion of a fast-moving subject

Use a fast shutter speed such as 1/4000 sec. to 1/500 sec.

To blur a running child or animal and convey an impression of

motion

Use a medium shutter speed such as 1/250 sec. to 1/30 sec. Follow

the moving subject through the viewfinder and press the shutter

button to take the picture. If you use a telephoto lens, hold it steady

to prevent camera shake.

To blur a flowing river or fountain

Use a slow shutter speed of 1/30 sec. or slower. Use a tripod to

prevent hand-held camera shake.

Set the shutter speed so that the aperture display does not blink.

If you press the shutter button halfway and change

the shutter speed while the aperture is displayed,

the aperture display will also change to maintain the

same exposure (amount of light reaching the image

sensor). If you exceed the adjustable aperture

range, the aperture display will blink to indicate that

the standard exposure cannot be obtained.

If the exposure will be too dark, the maximum aperture (smallest

number) will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the left to

set a slower shutter speed or increase the ISO speed.

If the exposure will be too bright, the minimum aperture (highest

number) will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the right to

set a faster shutter speed or decrease the ISO speed.

To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be set

automatically (autoflash exposure) to match the automatically-set

aperture. The shutter speed can be set from 1/200 sec. to 30 sec.

Shooting Tips



Use a slow shutter speed of 1/30 sec. or slower. Use a tripod

www.devic

eman

uals.

euUse a slow shutter speed of 1/30 sec. or slower. Use a tripod

Set the shutter speed so that the aperture display does not b

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the shutter speed so that the aperture display does not b


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


If the exposure will be too dark, the maximum aperture (smallestwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the exposure will be too dark, the maximum aperture (smallest

112

To blur the background or to make everything near and far look sharp,

set the Mode Dial to <f> (Aperture-priority AE) to adjust the depth of

field (range of acceptable focus).

* <f> stands for Aperture value, which is the size of the diaphragm hole inside the lens.

1 Set the Mode Dial to <f>.

2 Set the desired aperture.

The higher the f/number, the wider

the depth of field where sharper focus

is obtained in both the foreground

and background.

Turning the <6> dial to the right will

set a higher f/number (smaller

aperture opening), and turning it to

the left will set a lower f/number

(larger aperture opening).

3 Take the picture.

Focus and press the shutter button

completely. The picture will be taken

with the selected aperture.

f: Changing the Depth of Field

Sharp foreground and background

(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)

Blurred background

(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6)

Aperture Display

The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The

apertures displayed will differ depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to

the camera, “00” will be displayed for the aperture.





www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Set the desired aperture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the desired aperture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devicemanuals.euSharp foreground and background

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSharp foreground and background

(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

113


When using an aperture with a high f/number or shooting in low

light scenes, note that camera shake can occur.

A higher aperture f/number will make the shutter speed slower.

Under low light, the shutter speed can be as long as 30 sec. In such

cases, increase the ISO speed and hold the camera steady or use a

tripod.

The depth of field depends not only on the aperture, but also on

the lens and on the subject distance.

Since wide-angle lenses have a wide depth of field (range of

acceptable focus in front of and behind the point of focus), you need

not set a high aperture f/number to obtain a sharp picture from the

foreground to the background. On the other hand, a telephoto lens

has a narrow depth of field.

The closer the subject, the narrower the depth of field. A farther

subject will have a wider depth of field.

Set the aperture so that the shutter speed display does not

blink.


the aperture while the shutter speed is displayed,

the shutter speed display will also change to

maintain the same exposure (amount of light

reaching the image sensor). If you exceed the

adjustable shutter speed range, the shutter speed

display will blink to indicate that the standard

exposure cannot be obtained.

If the picture will be too dark, the “30"” (30 sec.) shutter speed

display will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the left to set

a lower aperture f/number or increase the ISO speed.

If the picture will be too bright, the “4000” (1/4000 sec.) shutter

speed display will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the

right to set a higher aperture f/number or decrease the ISO speed.

Shooting Tips

www.devicemanuals.euSince wide-angle lenses have a wide depth of field (range

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSince wide-angle lenses have a wide depth of field (range

acceptable focus in front of and behind the point of focu

www.devic

eman

uals.

euacceptable focus in front of and behind the point of focu

not set a high aperture f/number to obtain a sharp picture

www.devic

eman

uals.

eunot set a high aperture f/number to obtain a sharp picture

foreground to the background. On the other hand, a telep

www.devic

eman

uals.

euforeground to the background. On the other hand, a telep

The closer the subject, the narrower the depth of field. A

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The closer the subject, the narrower the depth of field. A


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Set the aperture so that the shutter speed display does n

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the aperture so that the shutter speed display does n


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


maintain the same exposure (amount of light www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

maintain the same exposure (amount of light

reaching the image sensor). If you exceed the www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

reaching the image sensor). If you exceed the

114



automatically to match the set aperture (autoflash exposure). The

shutter speed will be set automatically between 1/200 sec. - 30 sec. to

suit the scene’s brightness.

In low light, the main subject is exposed with the automatic flash, and

the background is exposed with a slow shutter speed set automatically.

Both the subject and background look properly exposed (automatic

slow-speed flash sync). If you are handholding the camera, keep it

steady to prevent camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended.

To prevent a slow shutter speed, under [z1: Flash control], set

[Flash sync. speed in Av mode] to [1/200-1/60 sec. auto] or [1/200

sec. (fixed)] (p.219).

The aperture opening (diaphragm) changes only at the moment when

the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open.

Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the

LCD monitor, the depth of field will look narrow.

Press the depth-of-field preview button

to stop down the lens to the current

aperture setting and check the depth of

field (range of acceptable focus).


Depth of Field PreviewN

While looking at the Live View image (p.146) and holding down the depth-of-

field preview button, you can change the aperture and see how the depth of

field changes.


steady to prevent camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eusteady to prevent camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended.

1: Flash control

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu1: Flash control

1/200-1/60 sec. auto

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu1/200-1/60 sec. auto

The aperture opening (diaphragm) changes only at the moment

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The aperture opening (diaphragm) changes only at the moment

the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully o

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully o

Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfind

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfind


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu























115

You can set both the shutter speed and aperture manually as desired.

While referring to the exposure level indicator in the viewfinder, you can

set the exposure as desired. This method is called manual exposure.

* <a> stands for Manual.

1 Set the Mode Dial to <a>.

2 Set the ISO speed (p.92).

3 Set the shutter speed and aperture.

To set the shutter speed, turn the

<6> dial.

To set the aperture, hold down the

<O> button and turn the <6> dial.



The exposure setting will be

displayed in the viewfinder.

The exposure level mark <h>

indicates how far the current

exposure level is from the standard

exposure level.

5 Set the exposure and take the picture.

Check the exposure level and set the desired shutter speed and

aperture.

If the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±2 stops from

the standard exposure, the end of the exposure level indicator

will display or <J> in the viewfinder. (On the LCD monitor, if

the exposure level exceeds ±3 stops, or <J> will be

displayed.)

a: Manual Exposure

<6>

<O> + <6>

Exposure level mark

Standard exposure index

If ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed setting will change to suit the shutter speed

and aperture to obtain a standard exposure. Therefore, you may not obtain

the desired exposure effect.


Set the shutter speed and aperture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSet the shutter speed and aperture.


www.devic

eman

uals.

euTo set the shutter speed, turn the

> dial.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> dial.


www.devic

eman

uals.

euTo set the aperture, hold down the

O

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

O> button and turn the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> button and turn the <

Focus the subject.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Focus the subject.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Set the exposure and take the picture.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Set the exposure and take the picture.

116

a: Manual Exposure


automatically (autoflash exposure) to match the manually-set aperture.

The shutter speed can be set from 1/200 sec. to 30 sec. or <BULB>.

A bulb exposure keeps the shutter open

for as long as you hold down the shutter

button. It can be used to photograph

fireworks and other subjects requiring

long exposures.

In step 3 on the preceding page, turn the

<6> dial to the left to set <BULB>.

The elapsed exposure time will be

displayed on the LCD monitor.

I Using the Built-in Flash

BULB: Bulb Exposures

In [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], if the checkmark <X> for [Disable

during man expo] is removed, it can be set in the <a> mode (p.125).

When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO speed.

After recomposing the picture, you can see the exposure level difference

on the exposure level indicator (p.22, 23) compared to when you pressed

the <A> button.

During the bulb exposure, do not point the lens toward the sun. The sun’s heat can damage the camera’s internal components.Since bulb exposures produce more noise than usual, the image may look a little grainy.When [z3: Long exp. noise reduction] is set to [Auto] or [Enable], noise generated by the long exposure can be reduced (p.127).If ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed will be ISO 400 (p.94).

For bulb exposures, using a tripod and Remote Switch (sold separately,

p.308) is recommended.

You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.307) for bulb

exposures. When you press the remote controller’s transmit button, the

bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button

again to stop the bulb exposure.


to match the manually-set aperture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euto match the manually-set aperture.

The shutter speed can be set from 1/200 sec. to 30 sec. or <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe shutter speed can be set from 1/200 sec. to 30 sec. or <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


long exposures.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

long exposures.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



During the bulb exposure, do not point the lens toward twww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

During the bulb exposure, do not point the lens toward t

117

Four methods (metering modes) to measure the subject’s brightness

are provided. Normally, evaluative metering is recommended.

In Basic Zone modes, evaluative metering is set automatically.

1 Select [Metering mode].

Under the [z2] tab, select [Metering

mode], then press <0>.

2 Set the metering mode.

Select the metering mode, then press

<0>.

q Evaluative metering

This is a general-purpose metering mode suited

even for backlit subjects. The camera sets the

exposure automatically to suit the scene.

w Partial metering

Effective when the background is much brighter

than the subject due to backlighting, etc. The

gray area in the left figure is where the

brightness is metered to obtain the standard

exposure.

r Spot metering

This is for metering a specific part of the subject

or scene. The gray area in the left figure is

where the brightness is metered to obtain the

standard exposure. This metering mode is for

advanced users.

q Changing the Metering ModeN

www.devicemanuals.euSet the metering mode.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSet the metering mode.

Select the metering mode, then press

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the metering mode, then press

Evaluative metering

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Evaluative metering


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


w

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

w Partial metering

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Partial metering

118

q Changing the Metering ModeN

e Center-weighted average metering

The brightness is metered at the image center

and then averaged for the entire scene. This

metering mode is for advanced users.

With q (evaluative metering) and e (center-weighted average

metering), the metering range is almost the same as with viewfinder

shooting.

With w (partial metering) and r (spot metering), the metering

range slightly differs from viewfinder shooting. The approximate

metering ranges are as shown below:

* The figures show when [Grid 2 m] is set. The metering ranges are not


Metering Range During Live View Shooting

Partial metering Spot metering

With q (evaluative metering) during viewfinder shooting, the exposure

setting will be locked when you press the shutter button halfway and focus is

achieved. With w (partial metering), r (spot metering), and e (center-

weighted average metering), exposure setting is set at the moment of

exposure. (The exposure setting is not locked when you press the shutter

button halfway.) During Live View shooting, the exposure setting is set at the

moment of exposure, regardless of the metering mode setting.


metering), the metering range is almost the same as with view

www.devic

eman

uals.

eumetering), the metering range is almost the same as with view

(spot metering), the metering

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu (spot metering), the metering

finder shooting. The approximate

www.devic

eman

uals.

eufinder shooting. The approximate

* The figures show when [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

* The figures show when [Grid 2

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Grid 2


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu








www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


119

Set exposure compensation if the exposure (without flash) does not come out

as desired. This feature can be used in Creative Zone modes (except <a>).

You can set the exposure compensation up to ±5 stops in 1/3-stop increments.

Making it brighter:

Hold down the <O> button and

turn the <6> dial to the right.

(Increased exposure)

Making it darker:

Hold down the <O> button and

turn the <6> dial to the left.

(Decreased exposure)

As shown in the figure, the exposure

level is displayed on the LCD monitor

and in the viewfinder.

After taking the picture, cancel the

exposure compensation by setting

it back to 0.

Setting Exposure CompensationN

O Setting Exposure Compensation

Increased exposure for a brighter image

Decreased exposure for a darker image

The exposure compensation amount displayed in the viewfinder goes up

to only ±2 stops. If the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±2

stops, the end of the exposure level indicator will display or <J>.

If you want to set exposure compensation exceeding ±2 stops, setting it

with [z2: Expo.comp./AEB] (p.121) or with the Quick Control screen

(p.44) is recommended.

Dark exposure Increased exposure for a brighter image

www.devicemanuals.euHold down the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euHold down the <O

www.devic

eman

uals.

euO6

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu6> dial to the left.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> dial to the left.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(Decreased exposure)


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu






















www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

120

Setting Exposure CompensationN

Set flash exposure compensation if the flash exposure of the subject

does not come out as desired. You can set the exposure compensation

up to ±2 stops in 1/3-stop increments.


The Quick Control screen will appear

(p.44).

2 Select [y].

Press the <S> key to select [y*].

[Flash exposure comp.] will be

displayed at the bottom.

3 Set the exposure compensation amount.

To make the flash exposure brighter,

turn the <6> dial to the right

(increased exposure). To make it

darker, turn the <6> dial to the left

(decreased exposure).

When you press the shutter button

halfway, the <y> icon will appear in

the viewfinder.


flash exposure compensation by

setting it back to 0.

y Flash Exposure Compensation

If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.125) is set to any setting other than

[Disable], the image may look bright even if a decreased exposure

compensation or decreased flash exposure compensation is set.

You can also set flash exposure compensation with [Built-in flash settings]

in [z1: Flash control] (p.220).


Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPress the <S

www.devic

eman

uals.

euS> key to select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select [

Flash exposure comp.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFlash exposure comp.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Set the exposure compensation amount.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the exposure compensation amount.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


turn the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

turn the <

121

This feature takes exposure compensation a step further by varying the

exposure automatically (up to ±2 stops in 1/3-stop increments) with

three shots as shown below. You can then choose the best exposure.

This is called AEB (Auto Exposure Bracketing).

1 Select [Expo.comp./AEB].

Under the [z2] tab, select

[Expo.comp./AEB], then press <0>.

2 Set the AEB range.

Turn the <6> dial to set the AEB

range.

Press the key to set the

exposure compensation amount. If

AEB is combined with exposure

compensation, AEB will be applied

centering on the exposure

compensation amount.

Press <0> to set it.

When you press the <M> button

to exit the menu, the AEB range will

be displayed on the LCD monitor.

3 Take the picture.

Focus and press the shutter button

completely. The three bracketed

shots will be taken in this sequence:

standard exposure, decreased

exposure, and increased exposure.

3 Auto Exposure BracketingN

Standard exposure Darker exposure


Brighter exposure


AEB rangewww.devicemanuals.eu



Select [Expo.comp./AEB].

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect [Expo.comp./AEB].

Under the [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Under the [z

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

zExpo.comp./AEB

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Expo.comp./AEB

Set the AEB range.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the AEB range.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Turn the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Turn the <


Brighter exposure

www.devic

eman

uals.

euBrighter exposure


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(Increased exposure)


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AEB rangewww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AEB range

122

3 Auto Exposure BracketingN

Follow steps 1 and 2 to turn off the AEB level display.

The AEB setting will also be canceled automatically if the power

switch is set to <2>, flash recycling is completed, etc.

Using AEB with continuous shooting

If continuous shooting (p.104) is set and you press the shutter

button completely, the three bracketed shots will be taken

continuously in this sequence: standard exposure, decreased

exposure, and increased exposure.

Using AEB with single shootingPress the shutter button three times to take the three bracketed

shots. The three bracketed shots will be exposed in the following

sequence: standard exposure, decreased exposure, and increased

exposure.

Using AEB with the self-timer or a remote controller (sold

separately)

With the self-timer or a remote control shooting (<Q> or <l>),

you can take three continuous shots after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay.

With <q> (p.106) set, the number of continuous shots will be three

times the number set.

Canceling AEB

Shooting Tips

AEB cannot be used with flash, Multi Shot Noise Reduction, Creative

filters, or bulb exposures.

If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.125) is set to any setting other

than [Disable], the AEB’s effect may be minimal.


button completely, the three bracketed shots will be taken

www.devic

eman

uals.

eubutton completely, the three bracketed shots will be taken

standard exposure, decreased

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu standard exposure, decreased

Press the shutter button three times to take the three bracket

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPress the shutter button three times to take the three bracket

shots. The three bracketed shots will be exposed in the foll

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shots. The three bracketed shots will be exposed in the foll

sequence: standard exposure, decr

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

sequence: standard exposure, decreased exposure, and increased

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

eased exposure, and increased


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


With the self-timer or a remote control shooting (<

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

With the self-timer or a remote control shooting (<

you can take three continuous shots after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. de

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

you can take three continuous shots after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. de

> (p.106) set, the number of continuous shots will be three

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> (p.106) set, the number of continuous shots will be three

times the number set.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

times the number set.

123

You can lock the exposure when the area of focus is to be different from the

exposure metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at the same

exposure setting. Press the <A> button to lock the exposure, then recompose

and take the shot. This is called AE lock. It is effective for backlit subjects.




displayed.

2 Press the <A> button. (0)

The <A> icon lights up in the

viewfinder to indicate that the

exposure setting is locked (AE lock).

Each time you press the <A> button,

the current autoexposure setting is

locked.

3 Recompose and take the picture.

If you want to maintain the AE lock

while taking more shots, hold down

the <A> button and press the shutter

button to take another shot.

* When the lens’ focus mode switch is set to <MF>, AE lock is applied at the

center AF point.

A Locking the ExposureN

AE Lock Effects

Metering Mode (p.117)

AF Point Selection Method (p.100)

Automatic Selection Manual Selection

q*AE lock is applied at the AF point that achieved focus.

AE lock is applied at the selected AF point.

wre AE lock is applied at the center AF point.


> button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button.

> icon lights up in the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> icon lights up in the

viewfinder to indicate that the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euviewfinder to indicate that the

exposure setting is locked (AE lock).

www.devic

eman

uals.

euexposure setting is locked (AE lock).


www.devic

eman

uals.

euEach time you press the <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


locked.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

locked.

3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3 Recompose and take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Recompose and take the picture.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

124

If the subject is on the side of the frame and you use flash, the subject may

turn out to be too bright or dark depending on the background, etc. This is

when you should use FE lock. After setting the proper flash exposure for

the subject, you can recompose (put the subject toward the side) and

shoot. This feature can also be used with a Canon EX-series Speedlite.* FE stands for Flash Exposure.

1 Press the <D> button.

The built-in flash will rise.

Press the shutter button halfway and

look in the viewfinder to check that

the <D> icon is lit.


3 Press the <A> button. (8)

Aim the spot metering circle over the

subject, then press the <A> button.

The flash will fire a preflash and the

required flash output is calculated

and retained in memory.

In the viewfinder, “FEL” is displayed

for a moment and <d> will light up.

Each time you press the <A> button, a

preflash is fired and the required flash output

is calculated and retained in memory.

4 Take the picture.

Compose the shot and press the


The flash is fired when the picture is

taken.

A Locking the Flash ExposureN


If the subject is too far away and beyond the effective range of the flash,

the <D> icon will blink. Get closer to the subject and repeat steps 2 to 4.

FE lock cannot be used during Live View shooting.


look in the viewfinder to check that

www.devic

eman

uals.

eulook in the viewfinder to check that

> icon is lit.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> icon is lit.

Focus the subject.

www.devic

eman

uals.


Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <A

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AAim the spot metering circle over the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Aim the spot metering circle over the

subject, then press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

subject, then press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

125

If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and

contrast can be corrected automatically. This function is called Auto

Lighting Optimizer. The default setting is [Standard]. With JPEG

images, the correction is done when the image is captured.

In Basic Zone modes, [Standard] is set automatically.

1 Select [Auto Lighting Optimizer].

Under the [z2] tab, select [Auto

Lighting Optimizer], then press

<0>.


Select the desired setting, then press

<0>.

3 Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with the

brightness and contrast corrected if

necessary.

3 Auto Correction of Brightness and ContrastN

Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone priority] is

set to [1: Enable], the Auto Lighting Optimizer will be set automatically to

[Disable] and the setting cannot be changed.

If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure

compensation or flash exposure compensation to darken the exposure,

the image may still come out bright. If you want a darker exposure, set

this function to [Disable].

Depending on the shooting conditions, noise may increase.

In step 2, if you press the button and uncheck <X> the [Disable

during man expo] setting, the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set in the

<a> mode.


Select the setting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the setting.


www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the desired setting, then press

3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3 Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

126

This function reduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise

reduction is applied at all ISO speeds, it is particularly effective at high

ISO speeds. At low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker parts of the

image (shadow areas) is further reduced. Change the setting to suit the

noise level.

1 Select [High ISO speed NR].

Under the [z3] tab, select [High ISO

speed NR], then press <0>.

2 Set the setting.


<0>.

The setting screen closes and the

menu will reappear.

[M: Multi Shot Noise Reduction]

Noise reduction with higher image quality than when [High] is

applied. For a single photo, four shots are taken continuously and

aligned and merged automatically into a single JPEG image.

3 Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with noise

reduction applied.

3 Noise Reduction SettingsN

High ISO Speed Noise Reduction

With [High] or [Multi Shot Noise Reduction], the maximum burst for

continuous shooting will greatly decrease.


] tab, select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] tab, select [

], then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu], then press <

Set the setting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSet the setting.


www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the desired setting, then press

>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


menu will reappear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

menu will reappear.

: Multi Shot Noise Reduction]

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Multi Shot Noise Reduction]

Noise reduction with higher image quality than when [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Noise reduction with higher image quality than when [

applied. For a single photo, four shots are taken continu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

applied. For a single photo, four shots are taken continu

aligned and merged automaticallywww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

aligned and merged automatically

127


You can reduce noise in long exposures.

1 Select [Long exp. noise

reduction].

Under the [z3] tab, select [Long

exp. noise reduction], then press

<0>.

Long Exposure Noise Reduction

About [Multi Shot Noise Reduction]

The following functions cannot be set: AEB, WB bracketing, [z3: Long

exp. noise reduction], 1+73/1. If any of these has already been

set, [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] cannot be set.

Flash shooting is not possible. The AF-assist beam will be emitted according to

the [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)]’s [4: AF-assist beam firing] setting.

You cannot set [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] for bulb exposures.

If you turn off the power or change the shooting mode to a Basic Zone

mode, movie shooting, or bulb, the setting will change to [Standard].

If the images are greatly misaligned due to camera shake or if there is a

moving subject, the noise reduction effect may be minimal.

If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera

shake. Using a tripod is recommended.

The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns

(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.

Recording the image to the card will take longer than with normal

shooting. During the processing of the images, “BUSY” will be displayed

and you cannot take another picture until the processing is completed.

[z3: Dust Delete Data] cannot be set.

If [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is set, direct printing (p.280) is not

possible.

If you play back a 1+73 or 1 image with the camera or print an image

directly, the effect of the high ISO speed noise reduction may look minimal.

Check the noise reduction effect or print noise-reduced images with Digital

Photo Professional (provided software, p.364).www.devicemanuals.eu


moving subject, the noise reduction effect may be minimal.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eumoving subject, the noise reduction effect may be minimal.

If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent

The image alignment may not function properly with repet

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe image alignment may not function properly with repet

(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.

Recording the image to the card will take longer than wi

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Recording the image to the card will take longer than wi

shooting. During the processing of the images, “

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shooting. During the processing of the images, “

and you cannot take another picture until the processing i

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

and you cannot take another picture until the processing i

] cannot be set.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] cannot be set.

Multi Shot Noise Reduction

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Multi Shot Noise Reduction]

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

]


If you play back a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If you play back a 1

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

1+

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

+73

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

73

directly, the effect of the high ISO speed noise reduction

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

directly, the effect of the high ISO speed noise reduction

Check the noise reduction effect or print noise-reduced images wwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Check the noise reduction effect or print noise-reduced images w

Photo Professional (provided software, p.364).www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Photo Professional (provided software, p.364).

128


2 Set the setting.


<0>.


menu will reappear.

[Auto]

For 1 sec. or longer exposures, noise reduction is performed

automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This

[Auto] setting is effective in most cases.

[Enable]

Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer.

The [Enable] setting may be able to reduce noise that otherwise

cannot be detected with the [Auto] setting.

3 Take the picture.


reduction applied.

With [Auto] and [Enable], the noise reduction process after the picture is

taken may take the same amount of time as the exposure. You cannot

take another picture until the noise reduction process is completed.

Images taken at ISO 1600 or higher may look grainier with the [Enable]

setting than with the [Disable] or [Auto] setting.

With [Auto] and [Enable], if a long exposure is shot with the Live View

image displayed, “BUSY” will be displayed during the noise reduction

process. The Live View display will not reappear until the noise reduction

is completed. (You cannot take another picture.)


long exposures is detected. This

www.devic

eman

uals.

eulong exposures is detected. This

Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or long

www.devic

eman

uals.

euNoise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or long

] setting may be able to reduce noise that otherwise

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] setting may be able to reduce noise that otherwise

] setting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] setting.

Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Take the picture.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


reduction applied.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

reduction applied.

129

Peripheral light fall-off is a phenomenon that makes the image corners

look darker due to the lens characteristics. Color fringing along subject

outlines is another chromatic aberration. Both lens aberrations can be

corrected. 1 images can be corrected with Digital Photo Professional

(provided software, p.364).

1 Select [Lens aberration

correction].

Under the [z1] tab, select [Lens

aberration correction], then press

<0>.


Check that [Correction data

available] is displayed for the

attached lens.

Select [Peripheral illumin.], then

press <0>.

Select [Enable], then press <0>.

If [Correction data not available] is

displayed, see “About the Lens

Correction Data” on page 131.

3 Take the picture.


peripheral illumination corrected.

3 Lens Peripheral Illumination / Chromatic Aberration Correction

Peripheral Illumination Correction

Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image

periphery.

The correction amount applied will be slightly lower than the maximum

correction amount settable with Digital Photo Professional (provided

software).

The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.


] tab, select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] tab, select [

aberration correction

www.devic

eman

uals.

euaberration correction

Select the setting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the setting.

Check that [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Check that [

available

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

available

attached lens.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

attached lens.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

130



Check that [Correction data

available] is displayed for the

attached lens.

Select [Chromatic aberration], then

press <0>.


If [Correction data not available] is


Correction Data” on the next page.

2 Take the picture.


chromatic aberration corrected.

Chromatic Aberration Correction

With [Enable], the maximum burst for continuous shooting will greatly

decrease.

If you play back a 1 image shot with the chromatic aberration

corrected, the image will be displayed on the camera without the

chromatic aberration correction applied. Check the chromatic aberration

correction with Digital Photo Professional (provided software, p.364).



www.devic

eman

uals.

eudisplayed, see “About the Lens

Correction Data” on the next page.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCorrection Data” on the next page.

Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTake the picture.


www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe image will be recorded with the


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

131


The camera already contains lens peripheral illumination correction

data and chromatic aberration correction data for approx. 25 lenses. If

you select [Enable], the peripheral illumination correction and

chromatic aberration correction will be applied automatically for any

lens whose correction data is registered in the camera.

With EOS Utility (provided software), you can check which lenses have

their correction data registered in the camera. You can also register the

correction data for unregistered lenses. For details, refer to the EOS

Utility Instruction Manual PDF on the CD-ROM (p.367).

Notes for Peripheral Illumination Correction and Chromatic Aberration

Correction

About the Lens Correction Data

Peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction

cannot be applied to JPEG images already taken.

When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is

recommended, even if [Correction data available] is displayed.

If you use the magnified view during Live View shooting, the peripheral

illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction will not be

reflected in the image shown on the screen.

If the effect of the correction is not visible, magnify the image and check

it.

Corrections can be applied even when an Extender or Life-size

Converter is attached.

If the correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the

camera, the result will be the same as when the correction is set to

[Disable].

If the lens does not have distance information, the correction amount will

be lower.


es. For details, refer to the EOS

www.devic

eman

uals.

eues. For details, refer to the EOS

Utility Instruction Manual PDF on the CD-ROM (p.367).

www.devic

eman

uals.

euUtility Instruction Manual PDF on the CD-ROM (p.367).

Notes for Peripheral Illumination Co

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Notes for Peripheral Illumination Co


Peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration corre

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration corre


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [

recommended, even if [www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

recommended, even if [

If you use the magnified view during www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

If you use the magnified view during

132

You can customize a Picture Style by adjusting individual parameters

such as [Sharpness] and [Contrast]. To see the resulting effects, take

test shots. To customize [Monochrome], see page 134.


2 Select a Picture Style.

Select a Picture Style, then press the

 button.

The Detail setting screen will appear.

3 Select a parameter.

Select a parameter such as

[Sharpness], then press <0>.

4 Set the parameter.

Press the key to adjust the

parameter as desired, then press

<0>.

Press the <M> button to save the

adjusted parameters. The Picture

Style selection screen will reappear.

Any parameter settings different from

the default will be displayed in blue.

A Customizing Image CharacteristicsN

By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can revert the respective

Picture Style to its default parameter settings.

To shoot with the Picture Style you modified, follow step 2 on page 95 to

select the modified Picture Style and then shoot.



www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe Detail setting screen will appear.

Select a parameter.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect a parameter.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Sharpness

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Sharpness

4

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the parameter.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

133


Sharpness

Adjusts the sharpness of the image.

To make it less sharp, set it toward the E end. The closer it is to E,

the softer the image will look.

To make it sharper, set it toward the F end. The closer it is to F, the

sharper the image will look.

Contrast

Adjusts the image contrast and the vividness of colors.

To decrease the contrast, set it toward the minus end. The closer it is

to G, the more muted the image will look.

To increase the contrast, set it toward the plus end. The closer it is to

H, the crisper the image will look.

Saturation

The image’s color saturation can be adjusted.

To decrease the color saturation, set it toward the minus end. The

closer it is to G, the more diluted the colors will look.

To increase the color saturation, set it toward the plus end. The

closer it is to H, the bolder the colors will look.

Color tone

The skin tones can be adjusted.

To make the skin tone redder, set it toward the minus end. The

closer it is to G, the redder the skin tone will look.

To make the skin tone less red, set it toward the plus end. The closer

it is to H, the more yellow the skin tone will look.

Parameter Settings and Effects


Adjusts the image contrast and the vividness of colors

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAdjusts the image contrast and the vividness of colors

rd the minus end. The closer it is

www.devic

eman

uals.

eurd the minus end. The closer it is

the plus end. The closer it is to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu the plus end. The closer it is to


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


To decrease the color saturation, set it toward the minus en

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

To decrease the color saturation, set it toward the minus en

, the more diluted the colors will look.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

, the more diluted the colors will look.

To increase the color saturation, set it toward the plus e

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

To increase the color saturation, set it toward the plus e

, the bolder the colors will look.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

, the bolder the colors will look.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


To make the skin tone redder, set it toward the minus end. www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

To make the skin tone redder, set it toward the minus end.

closer it is to www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

closer it is to Gwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

G

134


For Monochrome, you can also set [Filter effect] and [Toning effect] in

addition to [Sharpness] and [Contrast] explained on the preceding

page.

kFilter Effect

With a filter effect applied to a

monochrome image, you can make

white clouds or green trees stand out

more.

lToning Effect

By applying a toning effect, you can

create a monochrome image in that

color. It can make the image look more

impressive.

The following can be selected: [N:None],

[S:Sepia], [B:Blue], [P:Purple] or

[G:Green].

V Monochrome Adjustment

Filter Sample Effects

N : None Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.

Ye: YellowThe blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will look crisper.

Or : OrangeThe blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more brilliant.

R : RedThe blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and brighter.

G : GreenSkin tones and lips will appear muted. Tree leaves will look crisper and brighter.

Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu


Sample Effects

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSample Effects


Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.


The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds w

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds w

The blue sky will look slightly dark

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The blue sky will look slightly dark


The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look


Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Tree leaves will loo

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Tree leaves will loocrisper and brighter.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

crisper and brighter.









135

You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],

adjust its parameters as desired and register it under [User Def. 1],

[User Def. 2], or [User Def. 3].

You can create multiple Picture Styles whose parameter settings such

as sharpness and contrast are different.

You can also adjust the parameters of a Picture Style that has been

registered to the camera with EOS Utility (provided software, p.364).


2 Select [User Def.*].

Select a [User Def.*] style, then press

.


3 Press <0>.

With [Picture Style] selected, press

<0>.

4 Select the base Picture Style.

Press the <S> key or turn the <6>

dial to select the base Picture Style,

then press <0>.

To adjust the parameters of a Picture

Style that has been registered to the

camera with EOS Utility (provided

software), select the Picture Style

here.

A Registering Preferred Image CharacteristicsN


Select [User Def.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect [User Def.*

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu*].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu].

User Def.*

www.devic

eman

uals.

euUser Def.*


www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe Detail setting screen will appear.

3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3 Press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

136

A Registering Preferred Image CharacteristicsN

5 Select a parameter.


[Sharpness], then press <0>.




<0>. For details, see “Customizing

Image Characteristics” on pages 132-

134.

Press the <M> button to register

the modified Picture Style. The

Picture Style selection screen will

then reappear.

The base Picture Style will be

indicated on the right of [User Def.*].

If a Picture Style has already been registered under [User Def.*],

changing the base Picture Style in step 4 will nullify the parameter

settings of the registered Picture Style.

If you execute [Clear all camera settings] (p.214), all the [User Def.*]

settings will revert to their defaults. Picture Styles registered via EOS

Utility (provided software) will have only their modified parameters

reverted to their default settings.

To shoot with a registered Picture Style, follow step 2 on page 95 to

select [User Def.*], then shoot.

For the procedure to register a Picture Style file to the camera, refer to

the EOS Utility Instructions (p.367).



www.devic

eman

uals.

euparameter as desired, then press

>. For details, see “Customizing

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu>. For details, see “Customizing

Image Characteristics” on pages 132-

www.devic

eman

uals.

euImage Characteristics” on pages 132-

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <M

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Mthe modified Picture Style. The

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the modified Picture Style. The


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


then reappear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

then reappear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

137

The function adjusting the color tone so that white objects look white in

the picture is called white balance (WB). Normally, the <Q> (Auto)

setting will obtain the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors

cannot be obtained with <Q>, you can select the white balance that

matches the light source or set it manually by shooting a white object.

1 Press the <WB> button.

[White balance] will appear.

2 Select the white balance.


<6> dial to select the desired white

balance, then press <0>.

The “Approx. ****K” (K: Kelvin)

displayed for the white balance

settings <W>, <E>, <R>, <Y>

or is the respective color

temperature.

Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance

for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure

under the actual light source to be used.

1 Photograph a white object.

The plain, white object should fill the

spot metering circle.

Focus manually and set the standard

exposure for the white object.

You can set any white balance.

B: Matching the Light SourceN

O Custom White Balance


www.devicemanuals.eu> key or turn the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key or turn the

> dial to select the desired white

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> dial to select the desired white

balance, then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eubalance, then press <

The “Approx. ****K” (K: Kelvin)

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe “Approx. ****K” (K: Kelvin)

displayed for the white balance

www.devic

eman

uals.

eudisplayed for the white balance

settings <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

settings <W

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

W

or <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

or is the respective color

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> is the respective color

temperature.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

temperature.

Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white

for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this proced

under the actual light source to be used.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

under the actual light source to be used.www.devicemanuals.eu

Custom White Balance

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

138

B: Matching the Light SourceN

2 Select [Custom White Balance].

Under the [z2] tab, select [Custom

White Balance], then press <0>.

The custom white balance selection

screen will appear.

3 Import the white balance data.

Select the image that was captured in

step 1, then press <0>.

On the dialog screen that appears,

select [OK] and the data will be

imported.

When the menu reappears, press the

<M> button to exit the menu.

4 Select the custom white balance.

Press the <WB> button.

Select <O>, then press <0>.

If the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard

exposure, a correct white balance may not be obtained.

An image captured while the Picture Style was set to [Monochrome]

(p.96) or an image processed with a Creative filter cannot be selected in

step 3.

Instead of a white object, an 18% gray card (commercially available) can

produce a more accurate white balance.

The personal white balance registered with EOS Utility (provided

software, p.364) will be registered under <O>. If you perform step 3,

the data for the registered personal white balance will be erased.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0

On the dialog screen that appears,

www.devic

eman

uals.

euOn the dialog screen that appears,

] and the data will be

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] and the data will be

When the menu reappears, press the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhen the menu reappears, press the

> button to exit the menu.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> button to exit the menu.

Select the custom white balance.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select the custom white balance.

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

139

You can correct the white balance that has been set. This adjustment

will have the same effect as using a commercially-available color

temperature conversion filter or color compensating filter. Each color

can be corrected to one of nine levels.

This function is for advanced users who are familiar with using color

temperature conversion or color compensating filters.

1 Select [WB Shift/Bkt.].

Under the [z2] tab, select [WB

Shift/Bkt.], then press <0>.

The WB correction/WB bracketing

screen will appear.

2 Set the white balance correction.

Press the <S> key to move the “ ”

mark to the desired position.

B is for blue, A for amber, M for

magenta, and G for green. The color

in the respective direction will be

corrected.

On the upper right, “SHIFT” indicates

the direction and correction amount.

Pressing the <L> button will cancel

all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.

Press <0> to exit the setting and

return to the menu.

u Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light SourceN

White Balance Correction

Sample setting: A2, G1

When the white balance is corrected, will be displayed in the

viewfinder and on the LCD monitor.

One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds

of a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Measuring unit indicating

the density of a color temperature conversion filter.)


] tab, select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] tab, select [

], then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu], then press <

The WB correction/WB bracketing

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe WB correction/WB bracketing

screen will appear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euscreen will appear.

Set the white balance correction.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the white balance correction.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu








www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

140

u Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light SourceN

With just one shot, three images having a different color balance can be

recorded simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current white

balance setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber bias or

magenta/green bias. This is called white balance bracketing (WB-BKT). White

balance bracketing is possible up to ±3 levels in single-level increments.

Set the white balance bracketing amount.

In step 2 for white balance correction,

when you turn the <6> dial, the “ ”

mark on the screen will change to

“ ” (3 points). Turning the dial to the

right sets the B/A bracketing, and turning

it to the left sets the M/G bracketing.

On the right, “Bracket” indicates the

bracketing direction and correction

amount.

Pressing the <L> button will cancel

all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.

Press <0> to exit the setting and

return to the menu.

Bracketing Sequence

The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard

white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard

white balance, 2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.

White Balance Auto Bracketing

B/A bias ±3 levels

During WB bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will

be lower and the number of possible shots will also decrease to approx.

one-third the normal number.

You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white

balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance

bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.

Since three images are recorded for one shot, it takes longer to record

the shot to the card.

“Bkt.” stands for bracketing.


when you turn the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euwhen you turn the <6

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu6

mark on the screen will change to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eumark on the screen will change to

“ ” (3 points).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu“ ” (3 points). Turning the dial to the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Turning the dial to the

right sets the B/A bracketing, and turning

www.devic

eman

uals.

euright sets the B/A bracketing, and turning

it to the left sets the M/G bracketing.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euit to the left sets the M/G bracketing.

On the right, “

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

On the right, “


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


amount.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

amount.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Pressing the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Pressing the <

all the [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

all the [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Bracketing Sequencewww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Bracketing Sequence

The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

141

The range of reproducible colors is called the color space. With this

camera, the color space for captured images can be set to sRGB or

Adobe RGB. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.

In Basic Zone modes, sRGB is set automatically.

1 Select [Color space].

Under the [z2] tab, select [Color

space], then press <0>.

2 Set the desired color space.

Select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], then

press <0>.

This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other

industrial uses. This setting is not recommended if you do not know

about image processing, Adobe RGB, and Design rule for Camera File

System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). The image will look very subdued in a

sRGB personal computer environment and with printers not compatible

with Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). Post-

processing of the image with software will therefore be required.

3 Setting the Color Reproduction RangeN

About Adobe RGB

If the captured still photo was shot in the Adobe RGB color space, the

first character in the file name will be an underscore “_”.

The ICC profile is not appended. Refer to explanations about the ICC

profile in the PDF Software Instruction Manual on the CD-ROM (p.367).


] or [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] or [Adobe RGB

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAdobe RGB

This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and othe

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and othe

industrial uses. This setting is not

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

industrial uses. This setting is not

about image processing, Adobe RGB, and Design rule for Camera

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

about image processing, Adobe RGB, and Design rule for Camera

System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). T

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). T

sRGB personal computer environment and with printers not compa

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

sRGB personal computer environment and with printers not compa

with Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or highwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

with Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or high

processing of the image with software will therefore be rwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

processing of the image with software will therefore be r

142

The camera’s mechanical shake caused by the reflex mirror action can

blur images taken with a super telephoto lens or close-up (macro) lens.

In such cases, mirror lockup is effective.

Mirror lockup is enabled by setting [5: Mirror lockup] to [1: Enable]

in the [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)] (p.300).

1 Focus the subject, then press the shutter button

completely.

The mirror will swing up.

2 Press the shutter button completely again.

The picture is taken and the mirror goes back down.

After taking the picture, set [5: Mirror lockup] to [0: Disable].

Using the self-timer <Q>, <l> with mirror lockup

When you press the shutter button completely, the mirror locks up,

then the picture is taken 10 sec. or 2 sec. later.

Remote control shooting

Since you do not touch the camera when the picture is taken, remote

control shooting together with mirror lockup can further prevent

camera shake (p.307). With Remote Controller RC-6 (sold

separately) set to a 2-sec. delay, press the transmit button and the

mirror will lockup before the picture is taken 2 sec. later.

Mirror Lockup to Reduce Camera ShakeN

Shooting Tips


Press the shutter button completely again.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPress the shutter button completely again.

The picture is taken and the mirror goes back down.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe picture is taken and the mirror goes back down.

5: Mirror lockup

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu5: Mirror lockup] to [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] to [

l

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

l> with mirror lockup

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> with mirror lockup

When you press the shutter button completely, the mirror l

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When you press the shutter button completely, the mirror l


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Since you do not touch the camera when the picture is taken,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Since you do not touch the camera when the picture is taken,

control shooting together with mi

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

control shooting together with mi


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


separately) set to a 2-sec. delay, press the transmit button anwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

separately) set to a 2-sec. delay, press the transmit button an

143

Mirror Lockup to Reduce Camera ShakeN

In very bright light such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day,

take the picture promptly after mirror lockup.

Do not point the camera toward the sun. The sun’s heat can damage the

camera’s internal components.

If you use the self-timer and bulb exposure in combination with a mirror

lockup, keep pressing the shutter button completely (self-timer delay

time + bulb exposure time). If you let go of the shutter button during the

self-timer countdown, there will be a shutter-release sound, but no

picture will be taken.

Even if or <q> is set for drive mode, single shooting will take

effect.

When [z3: High ISO speed NR] is set to [Multi Shot Noise

Reduction], four continuous shots will be taken for the single picture

regardless of the [5: Mirror lockup] setting.

If 30 seconds elapse after the mirror has locked up, it will go back down

automatically. Pressing the shutter button completely again locks up the

mirror again.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


> is set for drive mode, single shooting will take

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> is set for drive mode, single shooting will take

] is set to [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] is set to [Multi Shot Noise

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMulti Shot Noise

], four continuous shots will be taken for the single pi

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu], four continuous shots will be taken for the single pi

] setting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] setting.

If 30 seconds elapse after the mirror has locked up, it will g

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If 30 seconds elapse after the mirror has locked up, it will g

automatically. Pressing the shutter button completely agai

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

automatically. Pressing the shutter button completely agai

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

145

5Shooting with the LCD Monitor

(Live View Shooting)

You can shoot while viewing the image on the camera’s LCD monitor. This is called “Live View shooting”.

If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the

LCD monitor, camera shake can cause blurred images.

Using a tripod is recommended.

About Remote Live View Shooting

With EOS Utility (provided software, p.364) installed in your

computer, you can connect the camera to the computer and shoot

remotely while viewing the computer screen. For details, refer to

the PDF Software Instruction Manual on the CD-ROM (p.367).



Shooting with the LCD Monitor

www.devic

eman

uals.

euShooting with the LCD Monitor

(Live View Shooting)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(Live View Shooting)

You can shoot while viewing the image on the camera’s

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can shoot while viewing the image on the camera’s LCD monitor. This is called “Live View shooting”.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

LCD monitor. This is called “Live View shooting”.

If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


146




the LCD monitor. In the <A> mode,

the scene icon for the scene detected

by the camera is displayed on the

upper left (p.149).

By default, Continuous AF (p.156) will

take effect.

The Live View image will closely

reflect the brightness level of the

actual image you capture.



halfway, the camera will focus with

the current AF method (p.159).

3 Take the picture.


The picture will be taken and the captured

image is displayed on the LCD monitor.

After the image review ends, the

camera will return to Live View

shooting automatically.

Press the <A> button to exit Live

View shooting.

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

The image’s field of view is approx. 99% (when the image-recording

quality is set to JPEG 73).

In Creative Zone modes, you can check the depth of field by pressing the

depth-of-field preview button.

During continuous shooting, the exposure set for the first shot will also

be applied to subsequent shots.

You can also tap the subject on the LCD monitor to focus (p.159-167)

and shoot (p.168).

You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.307) for Live View shooting.


The Live View image will closely

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe Live View image will closely

reflect the brightness level of the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eureflect the brightness level of the

actual image you capture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euactual image you capture.

Focus the subject.

www.devic

eman

uals.



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




























www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

147


Set [A: Live View shoot.] to [Enable].

Battery Life with Live View Shooting

The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8 and CIPA

(Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.

With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8, continuous Live View shooting is

possible as for approx. 1 hr. 30 min. at 23°C / 73°F.

Enabling Live View Shooting

TemperatureShooting Conditions

No Flash 50% Flash Use

At 23°C / 73°F Approx. 200 shots Approx. 180 shots


In the <F> and <G> shooting modes, the picture area will be smaller

than with other shooting modes.

During Live View shooting, do not point the lens toward the sun. The

sun’s heat can damage the camera’s internal components.

Cautions for using Live View shooting are on pages 171-172.

When flash is used, there will be two shutter sounds, but only one shot

will be taken. Also, the time it takes to take the picture after you press the

shutter button completely will be slightly longer than with viewfinder

shooting.

If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period, the power will turn

off automatically as set with [52: Auto power off] (p.205). If [52: Auto

power off] is set to [Disable], Live View shooting will end automatically

after approx. 30 min. (camera power remains on).

With the stereo AV cable AVC-DC400ST (sold separately) or HDMI cable

HTC-100 (sold separately), you can display the Live View image on a TV

(p.262, 265).


The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8 an

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8 an


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8,


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devicemanuals.euShooting Conditions

www.devic

eman

uals.

euShooting Conditions

No Flash 50% Flash Use

www.devic

eman

uals.

euNo Flash 50% Flash Use




www.devic

eman

uals.

eu









> and <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> and <G

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

G> shooting modes, the picture area will be smaller

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> shooting modes, the picture area will be smaller


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


During Live View shooting, do not point the lens toward

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

During Live View shooting, do not point the lens toward

sun’s heat can damage the camera’s internal components.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

sun’s heat can damage the camera’s internal components.

Cautions for using Live View shooting are on pages 17www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Cautions for using Live View shooting are on pages 17

148


Each time you press the button, the information display will

change.

Information Display

ISO speedExposure level indicator/AEB range

Aperture

Shutter speed

Picture Style

Battery check

Exposure

simulation

Image-recording

quality

White balance

AF point (Quick AF)

Histogram

Drive mode

AE lock

D Flash-ready

b Flash off

Auto Lighting

OptimizerAF method

Possible shots

Eye-Fi card

transmission

status

Shooting mode

Touch shutter


Switch to auto

selection (AF point)

Digital compass

AEB/FEB/

Multi Shot Noise

Reduction

Magnified view

Quick Control

Metering mode

Built-in flash

settings

Highlight tone priority

Creative filters

Flash exposure compensation

When <g> is displayed in white, it indicates that the Live View image

brightness is close to what the captured image will look like.

If <g> is blinking, it indicates that the Live View image is displayed at

a brightness that differs from the actual shooting result because of low-

or bright-light conditions. However, the actual image recorded will reflect

the exposure setting. Note that noise may be more noticeable than the

actual image recorded.

If you use the <F> or <G> shooting mode, bulb exposure, or flash, the

<g> icon and histogram will be grayed out (for your reference). The

histogram may not be properly displayed in low- or bright-light conditions.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Exposure level indicator/AEB rangewww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Exposure level indicator/AEB range

Aperture

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Aperture

Shutter speed

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Shutter speed














www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

149


During Live View shooting in the <A> mode, an icon representing the

scene detected by the camera will be displayed and the shooting will be

adapted to that scene. For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the

icon displayed may not match the actual scene.

*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF method is

set, the “Non-Portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is detected.

*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an Extension Tube

or Closeup Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.

*3: The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed.

*4: Displayed when all the following conditions apply: The shooting scene is dark, it is a

night scene, and the camera is mounted on a tripod.

<→ Continued on next page>

Scene Icons

Subject Portrait*1 Non-PortraitBackground

ColorBackground MovementNature and Outdoor Scene

Movement Close*2

Bright

Gray

Backlit

Blue sky included

Light blue

Backlit

Sunset *3 *3 Orange

Spotlight

Dark blueDark

With tripod *4*5 *3 *4*5 *3www.devicemanuals.eu












With tripod www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

With tripod www.devicemanuals.eu

150


*5: Displayed with any of the lenses below:

� EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II � EF-S 55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS II

� EF 300mm f/2.8L IS II USM � EF 400mm f/2.8L IS II USM

� Image Stabilizer lenses marketed in 2012 or later.

*4*5: If the conditions in both *4 and *5 apply, the shutter speed will become slow.

The final image simulation reflects the effects of the Picture Style, white

balance, etc., in the Live View image so you can see how the captured

image will look like.

During shooting, the Live View image will automatically reflect the

function settings listed below.

Final Image Simulation During Live View Shooting

Picture Style* All settings such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color tone will

be reflected.

White balance

White balance correction

Ambience-based shots

Light/scene-based shots

Creative filters

Metering mode

Exposure

Depth of field (with depth-of-field preview button ON)

Auto Lighting Optimizer

Peripheral illumination correction


Aspect ratio (image area confirmation)

Final Image Simulation

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDuring shooting, the Live View image will automatically re

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDuring shooting, the Live View image will automatically re

Final Image Simulation During Live View Shooting

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFinal Image Simulation During Live View Shooting

* All settings such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, an

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

* All settings such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, an


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Depth of field (with depth-of-field preview button ON)www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Depth of field (with depth-of-field preview button ON)

Auto Lighting Optimizerwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu


151

Function settings particular to Live View shooting are explained here.

If you press the <Q> button while the image is displayed on the LCD

monitor in a Creative Zone mode, you can set any of the following: AF

method, drive mode, metering mode, image-recording quality, built-

in flash settings, white balance, Picture Style, Auto Lighting Optimizer,

and Creative filters.

In Basic Zone modes, you can set the functions in bold and the settings

shown in the table on page 76.


The settable functions will be

displayed.

2 Select a function and set it.

Press the <V> key to select a

function.





To set the drive mode’s <q> setting

or Picture Style parameters, press the

 button.

3 Exit the setting.


return to Live View shooting.

You can also select <2> to return to

Live View shooting.

Shooting Function Settings

Q Quick Control

In Creative Zone modes, you can set the ISO speed by pressing the

 button.

For details on metering modes, see page 117.

www.devicemanuals.euQ

www.devic

eman

uals.

euQ> button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button.


www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe settable functions will be

displayed.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eudisplayed.

Select a function and set it.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

function.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

function.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

152

While looking at the Live View screen, you can shoot while applying a

filter effect (Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,

Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, and Miniature effect). These

are called Creative filters.

When you shoot with a Creative filter applied, only images applied with

a Creative filter will be saved. If you also want to save the image without

a Creative filter, shoot the image without the Creative filter and apply

the Creative filter afterward, then save it as a separate image (p.274).

1 Set any shooting mode except

<F> or <G>.



3 Select [ ].

Press the <V> key to select [ ]

(Creative filter) on the screen’s right

side.

4 Select the Creative filter effect.

Press the key to select a

Creative filter (p.154).

The Creative filter’s effect will appear

on the screen.

U Using Creative Filters


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button.


www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe Quick Control screen will appear.

Select [ ].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [ ].

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


side.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

side.

4

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

4







www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

153


5 Adjust the Creative filter’s effect.

Press the button (except for

the Miniature effect).


Creative filter’s effect, then press

<0>.

For the Miniature effect, press <0>,

then press the <V> key to move the

white frame to where you want it to

look sharp.

6 Take the picture.

The picture will be applied with the

Creative filter.

Even if you set the drive mode to or the self-timer to <q>, single

shooting will take effect.

Creative filters cannot be used if any of the following is set: 1+JPEG

or 1 image quality, AEB, white balance bracketing, or multi shot noise

reduction.

When you shoot with a Creative filter, the histogram will not be displayed.

www.devicemanuals.euTake the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTake the picture.

The picture will be applied with the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe picture will be applied with the

Creative filter.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCreative filter.

154


Grainy B/W

Makes the image grainy and black and white. By adjusting the

contrast, you can change the black-and-white effect.

Soft focus

Gives the image a soft look. By adjusting the blur, you can change

the degree of softness.

Fish-eye effect

Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type

distortion.

Depending on the level of this filter effect, the amount trimmed along

the image periphery will change. Also, since this filter effect

magnifies the image center, the apparent resolution at the center

may degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels. Set the

filter effect while checking the resulting image. The AF method will

either be FlexiZone - Single (fixed at center) or Quick mode.

Art bold effect

Makes the photo look like an oil painting and the subject look three-

dimensional. You can adjust the contrast and saturation. Note that

the sky, white walls, and similar subjects may not be rendered with a

smooth gradation and may look irregular or have significant noise.

Water painting effect

Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors. You

can adjust the color density. Note that night scenes or dark scenes

may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and may look irregular

or have significant noise.

Creative Filter Characteristics


Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a b

www.devic

eman

uals.

euGives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a b

Depending on the level of this filter effect, the amoun

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDepending on the level of this filter effect, the amoun

, since this filter effect

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu, since this filter effect

magnifies the image center, the apparent resolution at th

www.devic

eman

uals.

eumagnifies the image center, the apparent resolution at th

may degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels. Se

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

may degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels. Se

filter effect while checking the resulting image. The AF me

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

filter effect while checking the resulting image. The AF me


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Makes the photo look like an oil pa

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Makes the photo look like an oil pa

dimensional. You can adjust the c

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

dimensional. You can adjust the c

the sky, white walls, and similar subjects may not be rendere

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


smooth gradation and may look irregul

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

smooth gradation and may look irregul

Water painting effectwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colwww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft col

155


Toy camera effect

Gives a color cast typical of toy cameras and darkens the image’s

four corners. By adjusting the color tone, you can change the color

cast.

Miniature effect

Creates a diorama effect. You can change where the image is to

look sharp. In step 5, you can press the button (or tap [ ] on

the screen) to change the white frame’s orientation (horizontal/

vertical) where you want the image to look sharp. The AF method

will be FlexiZone - Single with the camera focusing the center of the

white frame.

With Grainy B/W, the grainy effect displayed on the LCD monitor will not

look the same as the actual photo.

With the Soft focus or Miniature effect, the blur effect displayed on the

LCD monitor may not look the same as the actual photo. You can check

the blur effect for the actual photo by pressing the depth-of-field preview

button (only in Creative Zone modes).


will be FlexiZone - Single with the camera focusing the ce

www.devic

eman

uals.

euwill be FlexiZone - Single with the camera focusing the ce

156

The menu options below are displayed.

The functions settable on this menu

screen only apply during Live View

shooting. These functions do not take

effect during viewfinder shooting.

Live View shooting

You can set Live View shooting to [Enable] or [Disable].

AF method

You can select [u+Tracking] (p.159), [FlexiZone - Multi] (p.161),

[FlexiZone - Single] (p.162), or [Quick mode] (p.166).

Continuous AF

The default setting is [Enable].

Since the focus is constantly close to the subject, when you press

the shutter button, the camera quickly focuses the subject. If

[Enable] is set, the lens will operate frequently and consume more

battery power. This will reduce the number of possible shots (battery

life). Also, if the AF method is set to [Quick mode], Continuous AF

will be automatically set to [Disable]. If you select another AF

method, Continuous AF will revert to the original setting.

During Continuous AF, turn off the power before you set the lens’s

focus mode switch to <MF>.

Touch Shutter

Just by tapping the LCD monitor screen, you can focus and take the

picture automatically. For details, see page 168.

Grid display

With [Grid 1l] or [Grid 2m], you can display grid lines to help

you level the camera vertically or horizontally.

A Menu Function Settings

www.devicemanuals.euFlexiZone - Multi

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFlexiZone - Multi

Quick mode

www.devic

eman

uals.

euQuick mode] (p.166).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] (p.166).

ose to the subject, when you press

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ose to the subject, when you press


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


] is set, the lens will operate frequently and consume more

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] is set, the lens will operate frequently and consume more

battery power. This will reduce the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

battery power. This will reduce the

life). Also, if the AF method is set to [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

life). Also, if the AF method is set to [

will be automatically set to [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

will be automatically set to [Disable

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Disable

method, Continuous AF will revert to the original settin

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

method, Continuous AF will revert to the original settin

During Continuous AF, turn off the power before you set th

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

During Continuous AF, turn off the power before you set th

focus mode switch to <www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

focus mode switch to <

157


Aspect ratioNThe image’s aspect ratio can be set to [3:2], [4:3], [16:9], or [1:1].

The area surrounding the Live View image is masked in black when

the following aspect ratios are set: [4:3] [16:9] [1:1].

JPEG images will be saved with the set aspect ratio. 1 images

will always be saved with the [3:2] aspect ratio. Since the aspect

ratio information is appended to the 1 image, the image will be

generated in the respective aspect ratio when you process the 1

image with the provided software. In the case of the [4:3], [16:9], and

[1:1] aspect ratios, the aspect-ratio lines will appear during image

playback, but the lines are not actually drawn on the image.

Image Quality

Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (approx.)

3:2 4:3 16:9 1:1

3 5184x3456(17.9 megapixels)

4608x3456(16.0 megapixels)

5184x2912*(15.1 megapixels)

3456x3456(11.9 megapixels)1

43456x2304

(8.0 megapixels)3072x2304



(5.3 megapixels)

a2592x1728


(4.0 megapixels)2592x1456*


(3.0 megapixels)

b1920x1280




(1.6 megapixels)

c720x480

(350,000 pixels)640x480

(310,000 pixels)720x400*

(290,000 pixels)480x480

(230,000 pixels)

Asterisked image-recording qualities do not exactly match the set aspect

ratio.

The image area displayed for the asterisked aspect ratio is slightly larger

than the recorded area. Check the captured images on the LCD monitor

when shooting.

If you use a different camera to directly print images shot with this

camera in the 1:1 aspect ratio, the images may not be correctly printed.


playback, but the lines are not actually drawn on the image

www.devic

eman

uals.

euplayback, but the lines are not actually drawn on the image

www.devicemanuals.euAspect Ratio and Pixel Count (approx.)

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAspect Ratio and Pixel Count (approx.)

3:2 4:3 16:9 1:1

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu3:2 4:3 16:9 1:1

(16.0 megapixels)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(15.1 megapixels)

3072x2304

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(7.0 megapixels)

2304x1728

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(4.0 megapixels)

(2.5 megapixels)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(2.2 megapixels)

720x480

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

720x480(350,000 pixels)www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

(350,000 pixels)www.devicemanuals.eu










158


Metering timerNYou can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock

time). In Basic Zone modes, metering timer is fixed at 16 sec.

The Live View shooting will stop with any of the following operations. To

resume Live View shooting, press the <A> button again.

� When selecting [z3: Dust Delete Data], [53: Sensor cleaning],

[54: Clear settings], or [54: z firmware ver.]

Even if a low ISO speed is set, noise may be noticeable in the displayed

Live View image under low light. However, when you shoot, the image

recorded will have minimal noise. (The image quality of the Live View

image is different from that of the recorded image.)

159

You can select the AF method suiting the shooting conditions or subject. The

following AF methods are provided: [u(face)+Tracking], [FlexiZone -

Multi] (p.161), [FlexiZone - Single] (p.162), and [Quick mode] (p.166).

AF methods other than the [Quick mode] use the image sensor to

autofocus while displaying the Live View image.

Select the AF method.

Under the [A] tab, select [AF method].

Select the desired AF method, then

press <0>.

While the Live View image is

displayed, you can also press the

<Q> button to select the AF method

on the Quick Control screen (p.151).

Human faces are detected and focused. If a face moves, the AF point

 also moves to track the face.




the LCD monitor.

2 Select an AF point.

When a face is detected, the AF point

will appear over the face to be focused.

If multiple faces are detected, <q>

will be displayed. Press the 

key to move the <q> frame over

the desired target face.

You can also tap the LCD monitor screen

to select the face or subject. If the subject

is not a face, < > will be displayed.

Changing the Autofocus Method (AF Method)

Selecting the AF Method

u(face)+Tracking: c


Select the desired AF method, then

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the desired AF method, then

While the Live View image is

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhile the Live View image is

displayed, you can also press the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eudisplayed, you can also press the

> button to select the AF method

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button to select the AF method


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Human faces are detected and focused. If a face moves, the AF

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Human faces are detected and focused. If a face moves, the AF



> also moves to track the face.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> also moves to track the face.



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

160


If no faces are detected or if you tap

the LCD monitor but do not select any

face or subject, the camera will switch

to [FlexiZone - Multi] with automatic

selection (p.161).



focus.



sound.

If focus is not achieved, the AF point

will turn orange.

4 Take the picture.

Check the focus and exposure, then

press the shutter button completely to

take the picture (p.146).

If the focus is far off, face detection will not be possible. If you set

[Continuous AF] to [Enable], you can prevent the image from becoming

greatly out of focus.

An object other than a human face may be detected as a face.

Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the

picture, too bright or too dark, or partially hidden.

The may cover only part of the face.

If you press <0> or the <L> button, the AF point < > will appear at

the center and you can use the <S> keys to move the AF point.

Since AF is not possible with a face detected near the edge of the picture,

the will be grayed out. If you press the shutter button halfway, the

subject will be focused in FlexiZone - Multi method with automatic

selection.



www.devic

eman

uals.

euwill turn green and the beeper will


www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf focus is not achieved, the AF point

will turn orange.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euwill turn orange.

Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Take the picture.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



If the focus is far off, face detection will not be powww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the focus is far off, face detection will not be po

Continuous AFwww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Continuous AF

161


Up to 31 AF points (automatically selected) covering a wide area can be

used to focus. This wide area can also be divided into 9 zones for

focusing (zone selection).




the LCD monitor.

2 Select the AF zone. NPressing <0> or the <L> button

will toggle between automatic

selection and zone selection. In Basic

Zone modes, automatic selection is

set automatically.

Use the <S> keys to select a zone.

To return to the center zone, press

<0> or the <L> button again.

You can also tap the LCD monitor

screen to select a zone. When a zone

is selected, tap [ ] on the screen

to switch to automatic selection.

FlexiZone - Multi: o

When [Continuous AF] (p.156) or [Movie servo AF] (p.196) is set to

[Enable]

When [u+Tracking] or [FlexiZone - Multi] with automatic selection is

set, the AF point will be momentarily displayed in the image center if the

subject is not detected. If you press the shutter button halfway, the

camera will focus in FlexiZone - Multi method with automatic selection. If

you press the shutter button halfway during movie shooting, the center

AF point will be used to focus.

Area frame

www.devicemanuals.euUp to 31 AF points (automatically selected) covering a wide

www.devic

eman

uals.

euUp to 31 AF points (automatically selected) covering a wide

also be divided into 9 zones for

www.devic

eman

uals.

eualso be divided into 9 zones for



Display the Live View image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Display the Live View image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

162




press the shutter button halfway.



sound.

If focus is not achieved, the area

frame will turn orange.

4 Take the picture.




Since only one AF point is used to focus, you can focus the target subject.




the LCD monitor.

The AF point < > will appear. During

movie shooting, if [Movie servo AF]

is set to [Enable], the AF point will be

displayed in a larger size.

FlexiZone - Single: d

When the camera does not focus the desired target subject with

automatic AF point selection, switch the AF method to zone selection or

[FlexiZone - Single], and refocus.

Depending on the aspect ratio setting, the number of AF points will differ.

At [3:2], there will be 31 AF points. At [1:1] and [4:3], there will be 25 AF

points. At [16:9], 21 AF points. Also, at [16:9], there will be only three

zones.

For movie shooting, there will be 21 AF points (or 25 AF points if

[640x480] is set) and three zones (or 9 zones if [640x480] is set).

AF point



www.devic

eman

uals.

euCheck the focus and exposure, then


www.devic

eman

uals.

eupress the shutter button completely to


www.devic

eman

uals.

eutake the picture (p.146).


FlexiZone - Single: www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

FlexiZone - Single: www.devicemanuals.eu

When the camera does not focus the desired target subject with

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhen the camera does not focus the desired target subject with

automatic AF point selection, switch the AF method to zone sel

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

automatic AF point selection, switch the AF method to zone sel

Depending on the aspect ratio setting, the number of AF po

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Depending on the aspect ratio setting, the number of AF po

], there will be 31 AF points. At [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

], there will be 31 AF points. At [

], 21 AF points. Also, at [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

], 21 AF points. Also, at [

For movie shooting, there will be 21 AF points (or 25 AF p

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For movie shooting, there will be 21 AF points (or 25 AF p

] is set) and three zones (or 9 zones if [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] is set) and three zones (or 9 zones if [

163


2 Move the AF point.

Press the <S> key to move the AF

point to where you want to focus. (It

cannot be moved to the edges of the

picture.) To return the AF point to the

center, press <0> or the <L>

button.


screen to move the AF point.






sound.


will turn orange.

4 Take the picture.




www.devic

eman

uals.


www.devic

eman

uals.



www.devic

eman

uals.

euAim the AF point over the subject and


www.devic

eman

uals.

eupress the shutter button halfway.


www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhen focus is achieved, the AF point


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


sound.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

sound.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


will turn orange.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

will turn orange.

4

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

4


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

164


AF Operation

Focusing will take longer than with [Quick mode].

Even when focus has been achieved, pressing the shutter button

halfway will focus again.

The image brightness may change during and after the AF operation.

If the light source changes while the Live View image is displayed,

the screen may flicker and focusing may be difficult. If this happens,

exit Live View shooting and autofocus under the actual light source.

When [FlexiZone - Multi] is set and you press the button (or

tap < > on the screen), the center of the selected zone (or image

center with automatic selection) will be magnified. If you press the

shutter button halfway, the display will return to normal and the

camera will focus.

When [FlexiZone - Single] is set and you press the button (or

tap < > on the screen), the area covered by the AF point will be

magnified. Press the shutter button halfway to focus while in the

magnified view. This is effective when the camera is attached to a

tripod and you need to attain very precise focus. If focusing is difficult

in the magnified view, return to the normal display and use AF. Note

that the AF speed may differ between the normal and magnified views.

If you magnify the view after focusing with [FlexiZone - Multi] or

[FlexiZone - Single] in the normal view, it may not look focused.

If [u+Tracking] is set, magnified view is not possible.

Notes About [u+Tracking], [FlexiZone - Multi], and

[FlexiZone - Single]

If you shoot a peripheral subject and it is slightly out of focus, aim the

center AF point or zone over the subject to focus, focus again and then

take the picture.

The AF-assist beam will not be emitted. However, if an EX-series

Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light is used, the LED

light will turn on for AF-assist when necessary.

In magnified view, the higher the magnification, the more difficult

focusing will be because of camera shake when shooting hand-held (as

well as when the lens focus mode switch is set to <MF>). Using a tripod

is recommended.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe screen may flicker and focusing may be difficult. If this hap

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe screen may flicker and focusing may be difficult. If this hap

us under the actual light source.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euus under the actual light source.

] is set and you press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] is set and you press the on the screen), the center of the selected zone (or i

www.devic

eman

uals.

eutap < > on the screen), the center of the selected zone (or i

center with automatic selection) will be magnified. If you

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucenter with automatic selection) will be magnified. If you

shutter button halfway, the display will return to normal

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shutter button halfway, the display will return to normal


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


on the screen), the area cove

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

on the screen), the area cove

magnified. Press the shutter button halfway to focus while in

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

magnified. Press the shutter button halfway to focus while in

magnified view. This is effective when the camera is att

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

magnified view. This is effective when the camera is att

tripod and you need to attain very precise focus. If focusing

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

tripod and you need to attain very precise focus. If focusing

in the magnified view, return to the normal display and use

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

in the magnified view, return to the normal display and use

that the AF speed may differ bet

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

that the AF speed may differ bet

If you magnify the view after focusing with [www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If you magnify the view after focusing with [

FlexiZone - Singlewww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

FlexiZone - Single

165


Shooting conditions that make focusing difficult

Low-contrast subjects such as the blue sky, solid-color flat surfaces

or when highlights or shadow details are lost.

Subjects in low light.

Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the

horizontal direction.

Subjects with repetitive patterns (skyscraper windows, computer

keyboards, etc.).

Fine lines and subject outlines.

Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps changing.

Night scenes or points of light.

When the image flickers under fluorescent or LED light sources.

Extremely small subjects.

Subjects at the edge of the picture.

Subjects strongly reflecting light.

The AF point covers both a near and faraway subject (such as an

animal in a cage).

Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and cannot keep still

due to camera shake or subject blur.

A subject approaching or moving away from the camera.

Autofocusing while the subject is very far out of focus.

Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.

A special effect filter is used.

Noise (spots, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.

If focus is not achieved with the above shooting conditions, set the lens

focus mode switch to <MF> and focus manually.

If you use AF with any of the following lenses, using [Quick mode] is

recommended. If you use the [u+Tracking], [FlexiZone - Multi] or

[FlexiZone - Single] for AF, it may take a longer time to achieve focus or

the camera may not be able to achieve correct focus.

EF 50mm f/1.4 USM, EF 50mm f/1.8 II, EF 50mm f/2.5 Compact

Macro, EF 75-300mm f/4-5.6 III, EF 75-300mm f/4-5.6 III USM

For information on discontinued lenses, refer to your local Canon Web

site.


Under a light source whose brightness, color, or patte

www.devic

eman

uals.

euUnder a light source whose brightness, color, or patte

When the image flickers under fluorescent or LED light sources.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhen the image flickers under fluorescent or LED light sources.

The AF point covers both a near

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The AF point covers both a near and faraway subject (such as an

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

and faraway subject (such as an

Subjects that keep moving within

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Subjects that keep moving within


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


A subject approaching or movi

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

A subject approaching or movi


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


A special effect filter is used.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

A special effect filter is used.

Noise (spots, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Noise (spots, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.

166


The dedicated AF sensor is used to focus in One-Shot AF operation

(p.98), using the same AF method as with viewfinder shooting.

Although you can focus the target subject quickly, the Live View image

will be interrupted momentarily during the AF operation.

You can use nine AF points to focus (automatically selected). You can

also select one AF point to focus and focus only the area covered by

that AF point (manually selected). In Basic Zone modes, the AF point

will be selected automatically. You cannot select the AF point.




the LCD monitor.

The small boxes are the AF points.

2 Select the AF point. NPressing <0> or the <L> button

will toggle between automatic

selection and manual selection.

Use the <S> keys to select an AF

point. To return the AF point to the

center, press <0> or the <L>

button.


screen to select the AF point. During

manual selection, tap [ ] on the

screen to switch to automatic

selection.

Quick Mode: f

AF point



www.devicemanuals.euDisplay the Live View image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDisplay the Live View image.

A

www.devic

eman

uals.

euA> button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button.


www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe Live View image will appear on

the LCD monitor.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe LCD monitor.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


2

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

2 Select the AF point.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select the AF point.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

167





The Live View image will turn off, the

reflex mirror will go back down, and

AF will be executed. (No picture is

taken.)


that achieved focus will turn green

and the Live View image will

reappear.


will turn orange and blink.

4 Take the picture.




When [Quick mode] is set, [Continuous AF] cannot be set (p.156).

The [Quick mode] cannot be set for movie shooting.

You cannot take a picture during autofocusing. Take the picture while the

Live View image is displayed.


and the Live View image will

www.devic

eman

uals.

euand the Live View image will


www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf focus is not achieved, the AF point

will turn orange and blink.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euwill turn orange and blink.

Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Take the picture.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

168

Just by tapping the LCD monitor screen, you can focus and take the

picture automatically. This works in all shooting modes.




the LCD monitor.

2 Enable the touch shutter.

Tap [y] on the screen’s bottom left.

Each time you tap the icon, it will

toggle between [y] and [x].

[x] (Touch Shutter: Enable)

Enables you to focus and shoot by

tapping the screen.

[y] (Touch Shutter: Disable)

You can tap where you want to focus

on the screen. Then press the shutter

button completely to shoot.

3 Tap the screen to shoot.

Tap the face or subject on the screen.

At the point you tap, the camera will

focus in the AF method that was set

(p.159-167). When [FlexiZone -

Multi] is set, it will switch to

[FlexiZone - Single].


turns green and the picture is taken

automatically.


turns orange. Tap the face or subject

on the screen again.

x Shooting with the Touch Shutter


] on the screen’s bottom left.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] on the screen’s bottom left.

Each time you tap the icon, it will

www.devic

eman

uals.

euEach time you tap the icon, it will

toggle between [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eutoggle between [y

www.devic

eman

uals.

euy] and [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] and [

] (Touch Shutter: Enable)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] (Touch Shutter: Enable)


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


tapping the screen.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

tapping the screen.

y

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

y] (Touch Shutter: Disable)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] (Touch Shutter: Disable)


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3 Tap the screen to shoot.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Tap the screen to shoot.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu






169

x Shooting with the Touch Shutter

Even if (continuous shooting) is set, single shooting will take

effect.

The touch shutter does not work with the magnified view.

When [6: Shutter/AE lock button] is set to [1: AE lock/AF] or [3: AE/

AF, no AE lock] under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], autofocusing

does not take effect.

You can also enable the touch shutter by setting [Touch Shutter:

Enable] in the [A] tab.

To take a bulb exposure, tap the screen twice. The first tap on the screen

will start the bulb exposure. Tapping it again will stop the exposure. Be

careful not to shake the camera when tapping the screen.



will start the bulb exposure. Tapping it again will sto

www.devic

eman

uals.

euwill start the bulb exposure. Tapping it again will stop the exposure. Be

www.devic

eman

uals.

eup the exposure. Be

careful not to shake the camera when tapping the screen.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucareful not to shake the camera when tapping the screen.

170

You can magnify the image and focus precisely with manual focus.


<MF>.

Turn the lens focusing ring to focus

roughly.

2 Display the magnifying frame.

Press the button.

The magnifying frame will appear.

You can also tap [ ] on the screen to

magnify the image.

3 Move the magnifying frame.

Press the <S> key to move the

magnifying frame to the position

where you want to focus.

To return the magnifying frame to the

center, press <0> or the <L> button.

4 Magnify the image.

Each time you press the button,

the magnification within the frame will

change as follows:

5 Focus manually.

While looking at the magnified image,

turn the lens focusing ring to focus.

After achieving focus, press the 

button to return to the normal view.

6 Take the picture.


press the shutter button to take the

picture (p.146).

MF: Focus Manually

Magnifying frame

AE lock

Magnified area position

Magnification

1x → 5x → 10x → Magnification canceledwww.devicemanuals.eu

The magnifying frame will appear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe magnifying frame will appear.

You can also tap [ ] on the screen to

www.devic

eman

uals.

euYou can also tap [ ] on the screen to

magnify the image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eumagnify the image.

Move the magnifying frame.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMove the magnifying frame.

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <S

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Smagnifying frame to the position

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

magnifying frame to the position


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


center, press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

center, press <

4

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Magnify the image.

171

Live View Shooting Cautions

Image Quality

When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and

banding) may become noticeable.

Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in

the image.

If Live View shooting is used continuously for a long period, the camera’s

internal temperature may rise, and image quality may deteriorate. Stop

Live View shooting when not shooting images.

If you shoot a long exposure while the camera’s internal temperature is

high, image quality may deteriorate. Stop Live View shooting and wait a

few minutes before shooting again.

White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning

If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live

View shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a white icon <s>

will appear. If you continue shooting while this icon is displayed, the

image quality of still photos may deteriorate. It is recommended to

temporarily exit Live View shooting and allow the camera to cool down

before shooting again.

If the camera’s internal temperature further increases while the white

icon <s> is displayed, a red icon <E> will start blinking. This blinking

icon indicates that the Live View shooting will soon stop automatically. If

this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the camera’s

internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the camera

rest for a while.

Using Live View shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period

will cause the <s> and <E> icons to appear earlier. When you are not

shooting, turn off the camera.

If the camera’s internal temperature is high, the image quality of high ISO

speed images or long exposures may be degraded even before the white

icon <s> is displayed.


camera’s internal temperature is

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucamera’s internal temperature is

high, image quality may deteriorate. Stop Live View shoot

www.devic

eman

uals.

euhigh, image quality may deteriorate. Stop Live View shoot

> Internal Temperature Warning

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> Internal Temperature Warning

If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolon

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolon

View shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a whit

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

View shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a whit

will appear. If you continue shooting while this icon is

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

will appear. If you continue shooting while this icon is

image quality of still photos may deteriorate. It is recommend

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

image quality of still photos may deteriorate. It is recommend

temporarily exit Live View shooting and allow the camera to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

temporarily exit Live View shooting and allow the camera to

If the camera’s internal temperature further increases while

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


> is displayed, a red icon <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> is displayed, a red icon <

icon indicates that the Live View shooting will soon sto

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

icon indicates that the Live View shooting will soon sto

this happens, you will not be able to shoot again unti

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

this happens, you will not be able to shoot again unti

internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and le

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and le

rest for a while.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

rest for a while.

Using Live View shooting at a high temperature for a prolonwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Using Live View shooting at a high temperature for a prolon

172

Live View Shooting Cautions

Shooting Result

If you take the picture in magnified view, the exposure may not come out

as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture. In

magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed in

orange. Even if you take the picture in magnified view, the image will be

captured in the normal view.

If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.125) is not set to [Disable], the

image may look bright even if a decreased exposure compensation or

decreased flash exposure compensation is set.

If you use a TS-E lens (other than the TS-E 17mm f/4L or TS-E 24mm

f/3.5L II) and shift or tilt the lens or use an Extension Tube, the standard

exposure may not be obtained or an irregular exposure may result.

Live View Image

Under low- or bright-light conditions, the Live View image may not reflect

the brightness of the captured image.

If the light source within the image changes, the screen may flicker. If this

happens, exit Live View shooting and resume shooting under the actual

light source.

If you point the camera to a different direction, it may throw off the Live

View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brightness

level stabilizes before shooting.

If there is a very bright light source in the picture, the bright area might

appear black on the LCD monitor. However, the actual captured image

will correctly show the bright area.

In low light, if you set the [52: LCD brightness] to a bright setting,

chrominance noise may appear in the Live View image. However, the

chrominance noise will not be recorded in the captured image.

When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more

pronounced than in the actual image.

Custom Functions

During Live View shooting, certain Custom Function settings will not take

effect (p.297).

Lens and Flash

The focus preset function is possible for Live View shooting only when

using a (super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode

marketed since the second half of 2011.

FE lock is not possible when the built-in flash or an external Speedlite is

used. Modeling flash will not work with an external Speedlite.


If you use a TS-E lens (other than the TS-E 17mm f/4L or TS-E 24mm

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf you use a TS-E lens (other than the TS-E 17mm f/4L or TS-E 24mm

sion Tube, the standard

www.devic

eman

uals.

eusion Tube, the standard

exposure may not be obtained or an irregular exposure may resul

www.devic

eman

uals.

euexposure may not be obtained or an irregular exposure may resul

Under low- or bright-light conditions, the Live View image

www.devic

eman

uals.

euUnder low- or bright-light conditions, the Live View image

If the light source within the image changes, the screen may f

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the light source within the image changes, the screen may f

happens, exit Live View shooting and resume shooting under t

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

happens, exit Live View shooting and resume shooting under t

If you point the camera to a different direction, it may th

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If you point the camera to a different direction, it may th

View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brig

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brig


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


If there is a very bright light source in the picture, the b

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


appear black on the LCD monitor. However, the actual cap

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

appear black on the LCD monitor. However, the actual cap


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


In low light, if you set the [www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

In low light, if you set the [

chrominance noise may appear in the Live View image. However, www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

chrominance noise may appear in the Live View image. However,

173

6Shooting Movies

You can shoot movies by setting the power switch to <k>. The movie recording format will be MOV.

Cards that can record movies

When shooting movies, use a large-capacity SD card rated SD

Speed Class 6 “ ” or higher.

If you use a slow-writing card when shooting movies, the movie

may not be recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a

card with a slow reading speed, the movie may not play back

properly.

To check the card’s read/write speed, refer to the card

manufacturer’s Web site.

About Full HD 1080

Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with High-

Definition featuring 1080 vertical pixels (scanning

lines).


www.devicemanuals.euShooting Movies

www.devic

eman

uals.

euShooting Movies

You can shoot movies by setting

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can shoot movies by setting the power switch to <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the power switch to <movie recording format will be

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

movie recording format will be MOV.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

MOV.



Cards that can record movieswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Cards that can record movies

When shooting movies, use a large-capacity SD card ratedwww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

When shooting movies, use a large-capacity SD card rated

174

Connecting the camera to a TV set is recommended to play back the

movies shot (p.262, 265).

When the shooting mode is not set to <a>, autoexposure control will

take effect to suit the scene’s current brightness.

1 Set the power switch to <k>.

The reflex mirror will make a sound,

then the image will appear on the

LCD monitor.

2 Set the shooting mode.

Set the Mode Dial to any shooting

mode except <a>.


Before shooting a movie, focus with

AF or manual focus (p.159-167, 170).

By default, [Movie Servo AF:

Enable] is set so that the camera will

always focus. To stop Movie Servo

AF, see page 196.

4 Shoot the movie.

Press the <A> button to start

shooting a movie. To stop movie

shooting, press <A> again.

While the movie is being shot, the

“o” mark will be displayed on the

upper right of the screen.

k Shooting Movies

Autoexposure Shooting

Recording movie

Microphone

www.devicemanuals.euSet the shooting mode.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSet the shooting mode.

Set the Mode Dial to any shooting

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSet the Mode Dial to any shooting

mode except <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eumode except <a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eua

Focus the subject.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Focus the subject.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

By default, [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

By default, [

175

k Shooting Movies

This camera is compatible with the function turning on the LED light

automatically in low-light conditions during autoexposure shooting. For

details, refer to the Speedlite’s instruction manual.

Using an EX-series Speedlite (Sold Separately) Equipped with an LED Light

Cautions for movie shooting are on pages 200 and 201.

If necessary, also read the Live View shooting cautions on pages

171 and 172.

In Basic Zone modes, the shooting result will be the same as in the

<A> mode. Also, the scene icon for the scene detected by the camera

is displayed on the upper left (p.176).

In the <f> and <s> shooting modes, the settings will be the same

as in the <d> mode.

Settable menu functions will differ between Basic Zone modes and

Creative Zone modes (p.322).

The ISO speed (ISO 100 - ISO 6400), shutter speed, and aperture are

set automatically.

In Creative Zone modes, you can press the <A> button to lock the

exposure (AE lock, p.123,198). After applying AE lock during movie

shooting, you can cancel it by pressing the <S> button. (AE lock setting

is retained until you press the <S> button.)

In Creative Zone modes, you can hold down the <O> button and turn

the <6> dial to set the exposure compensation.

Pressing the shutter button halfway displays the shutter speed and ISO

speed at the bottom of the screen. This is the exposure setting for taking

a still photo (p.179). The exposure setting for movie shooting is not

displayed. Note that the exposure setting for movie shooting may differ

from that for still photo shooting.

If you shoot a movie with autoexposure, the shutter speed and aperture

will not be recorded in the image information (Exif).www.devicemanuals.euThe ISO speed (ISO 100 - ISO 6400), shutter speed, and ap

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe ISO speed (ISO 100 - ISO 6400), shutter speed, and ap

In Creative Zone modes, you can press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIn Creative Zone modes, you can press the <A

www.devic

eman

uals.

euA> button to lock the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button to lock the

exposure (AE lock, p.123,198). After applying AE lock during movie

www.devic

eman

uals.

euexposure (AE lock, p.123,198). After applying AE lock during movie

shooting, you can cancel it by pressing the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shooting, you can cancel it by pressing the <

S

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

S> button.)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> button.)

In Creative Zone modes, you can hold down the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

In Creative Zone modes, you can hold down the <

> dial to set the exposure compensation.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> dial to set the exposure compensation.

Pressing the shutter button halfway displays the shutter speed

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Pressing the shutter button halfway displays the shutter speed

speed at the bottom of the screen. This is the exposure settin

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

speed at the bottom of the screen. This is the exposure settin

a still photo (p.179). The exposure setting for movie shooti

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

a still photo (p.179). The exposure setting for movie shooti

displayed. Note that the exposure setting for movie shooting

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

displayed. Note that the exposure setting for movie shooting


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


If you shoot a movie with autoexposure, the shutter speed anwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If you shoot a movie with autoexposure, the shutter speed an

will not be recorded in the image information (Exif).www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

will not be recorded in the image information (Exif).

176

k Shooting Movies

During movie shooting in a Basic Zone mode, an icon representing the

scene detected by the camera will be displayed and the shooting will be

adapted to that scene. For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the

icon displayed may not match the actual scene.

*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF method is

set, the “Non-Portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is detected.

*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an Extension Tube

or Closeup Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.

*3: The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed.

Scene Icons

Subject

Portrait*1Non-Portrait

Background ColorBackground

Nature and Outdoor Scene

Close*2

Bright

Gray

Backlit

Blue sky included

Light blue

Backlit

Sunset *3 *3 Orange

Spotlight

Dark blue

Dark


*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [

set, the “Non-Portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

set, the “Non-Portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person

*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance informatiowww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance informatiowww.devicemanuals.eu























































177

k Shooting Movies

In the <a> mode, you can freely set the shutter speed, aperture, and

ISO speed for the movie shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot

movies is for advanced users.

1 Set the power switch to <k>.

The reflex mirror will make a sound,

then the image will appear on the

LCD monitor.

2 Set the Mode Dial to <a>.

3 Set the shutter speed and

aperture.


<6> dial. The settable shutter

speeds depend on the frame rate

<9>.

�8 / 7 : 1/4000 sec. - 1/60 sec.

�6 / 5 / 4 : 1/4000 sec. - 1/30 sec.


<O> button and turn the <6>

dial.

4 Set the ISO speed.

Press the button and press

the key or turn the <6> dial

to select the ISO speed.

For details on the ISO speed, see the

next page.

Manual Exposure Shooting

<6>

<O> + <6>

www.devic

eman

uals.


www.devic

eman

uals.


Set the shutter speed and

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the shutter speed and

aperture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

aperture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

178

k Shooting Movies

5 Focus and shoot the movie.

The procedure is the same as steps 3

and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”

(p.174).

ISO speed during manual-exposure shooting

With [Auto], the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 -

ISO 6400.

You can set the ISO speed manually within ISO 100 - ISO 6400 in

whole-stop increments. Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if

[2: ISO expansion] is set to [1: On], the manual setting range will

expand so you can also select H (equivalent to ISO 12800).

Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone

priority] is set to [1: Enable], the ISO speed will be ISO 200 - ISO

6400.

Since shooting a movie at ISO 12800 may result in much noise, it is

designated as an expanded ISO speed (displayed as “H”).

Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [2: ISO expansion] is set to

[1: On] and you switch from still photo shooting to movie shooting, the

manual setting range’s maximum will be H (equivalent to ISO 12800).

Even if you switch back to still photo shooting, the ISO speed will not


Exposure compensation cannot be set.

Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not

recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded.

If you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED

lighting, image flicker may be recorded.

When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO

speed.

After recomposing the picture, you can see the exposure level difference

on the exposure level indicator (p.179) compared to when you pressed

the <A> button.

By pressing the button, you can display the histogram.

When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of 1/30 sec.

to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less

smooth the subject’s movement will look.



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu4: Custom Functions (C.Fn)

], the manual setting range will

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu], the manual setting range will

expand so you can also select H (equivalent to ISO 12800).

www.devic

eman

uals.

euexpand so you can also select H (equivalent to ISO 12800).

], if [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu], if [3: Highlight tone

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu3: Highlight tone

], the ISO speed will be ISO 200 - ISO

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu], the ISO speed will be ISO 200 - ISO


Since shooting a movie at ISO 12800 may result in much noise,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Since shooting a movie at ISO 12800 may result in much noise,

designated as an expanded ISO speed (displayed as “

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

designated as an expanded ISO speed (displayed as “


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


] and you switch from still photo shooting to movie shootin

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] and you switch from still photo shooting to movie shootin

manual setting range’s maximum will be H (equivalent to I

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

manual setting range’s maximum will be H (equivalent to I


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Exposure compensati

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Exposure compensati

Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shootingwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting

recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded.

179

k Shooting Movies

Each time you press the button, the information display will

change.

Information Display

AF point (FlexiZone - Single)

Exposure modeL: Autoexposure K: Manual exposure

ISO speed

Exposure level indicator

Aperture

AE lock

White balance

Movie recording

size

Image-recordingquality

Shutter speed

Auto Lighting

Optimizer

AF method

� c: u+Tracking

� o : FlexiZone - Multi

� d : FlexiZone - Single

Battery check

Picture Style

Movie shooting mode

: Autoexposure (Basic Zone modes): Autoexposure (Creative Zone modes): Manual exposure

LED light

Recording level:

Manual

Video snapshot

Possible shots


Frame rate

Drive mode

Magnified view


Quick Control

Movie Servo AF

Movie shooting remaining time/Elapsed time

Eye-Fi card

transmission

Digital compass

Wind filter

Attenuator

When movie shooting starts, the movie shooting remaining time will change

to the elapsed time.



www.devic

eman

uals.

euAF point (FlexiZone - Single)

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAF point (FlexiZone - Single)

AE lock

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AE lock

www.devicemanuals.euBattery check

www.devic

eman

uals.

euBattery check

LED lightwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

LED lightwww.devicemanuals.eu

180

k Shooting Movies

Notes on Movie Shooting

During movie shooting, do not point the lens toward the sun. The sun’s

heat can damage the camera’s internal components.

If <Q> is set, you should not change the ISO speed or aperture during

movie shooting because it may also change the white balance.

If you shoot a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting, the movie may flicker.

Zooming the lens during movie shooting is not recommended. Zooming

the lens can cause changes in the exposure regardless of whether the

lens’ maximum aperture changes or not. Exposure changes may be

recorded as a result.

You cannot magnify the image during movie shooting.

Be careful not to cover the microphone (p.174) with your finger, etc.


If necessary, also read the Live View shooting cautions on pages

171 and 172.

Movie-related settings are under the [Z1] and [Z2] tabs (p.196).

A movie file is recorded each time you shoot a movie. If the file size

exceeds 4 GB, a new file will be automatically created.

The movie image’s field of view is approx. 100% (with movie recording

size set to [A]).

The sound will be recorded in stereo by the camera’s built-in microphone

(p.174).

Most commercially-available external stereo microphones with a 3.5 mm

diameter miniplug can be connected to the camera. If an external

microphone has been connected to the camera’s external microphone IN

terminal (p.20), it will be given priority over the built-in microphone.

You can use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.307) to start

and stop the movie shooting if the drive mode is <Q>. Set the shooting

timing switch to <2> (2-sec. delay), then press the transmit button. If the

switch is set to <o> (immediate shooting), still photo shooting will take

effect.

With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8, the total movie shooting time

will be as follows: approx. 1 hr. 40 min. at room temperature (23°C/73°F),

and approx. 1 hr. 20 min. at low temperature (0°C/32°F).

The focus preset function is possible for movie shooting only when using

a (super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode marketed

since the second half of 2011.



You cannot magnify the image during movie shooting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euYou cannot magnify the image during movie shooting.

Be careful not to cover the microphone (p.174) with your fin

www.devic

eman

uals.

euBe careful not to cover the microphone (p.174) with your fin


www.devic

eman

uals.

euCautions for movie shooting are on pages 200 and 201.

If necessary, also read the Live View shooting caution

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf necessary, also read the Live View shooting caution


Movie-related settings are under the [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Movie-related settings are under the [Z

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Z1

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

1] and [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] and [

A movie file is recorded each time you shoot a movie. If the f

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

A movie file is recorded each time you shoot a movie. If the f


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


The movie image’s field of view is approx. 100% (with movie reco

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The movie image’s field of view is approx. 100% (with movie reco

The sound will be recorded in stereo by the camera’s built

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The sound will be recorded in stereo by the camera’s built

Most commercially-available external stereo microphones with a 3.5

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Most commercially-available external stereo microphones with a 3.5

diameter miniplug can be connected to the camera. If an externwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

diameter miniplug can be connected to the camera. If an extern

microphone has been connected to the camera’s external microphowww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

microphone has been connected to the camera’s external micropho

181

k Shooting Movies

The final image simulation is a function that allows you to see the

effects of the Picture Style, white balance, etc., on the image.

During movie shooting, the image displayed will automatically reflect

the effects of the settings listed below.

Final image simulation for movie shooting

Picture Style* All settings such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color tone will

be reflected.

White balance


Exposure

Depth of field




Final Image Simulation



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


182

k Shooting Movies

While shooting a movie, you can also

take a still photo by pressing the shutter

button completely.

Taking still photos during movie shooting

If you take a still photo during movie shooting, the movie will record

a still moment lasting approx. 1 sec.

The captured still photo will be recorded to the card, and the movie

shooting will resume automatically when the Live View image is

displayed.

The movie and still photo will be recorded as separate files on the card.

Functions particular to still photo shooting are shown below. Other

functions will be the same as for movie shooting.

* If highlight tone priority is set, the ISO speed range will start from ISO 200.

Shooting Still Photos

Function Settings

Image-Recording Quality

As set in [z1: Image quality].When the movie recording size is [1920x1080] or [1280x720], the aspect ratio will be 16:9. When the size is [640x480], the aspect ratio will be 4:3.

ISO Speed*

� With autoexposure shooting: Automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 6400.

� With manual exposure shooting: See “ISO speed during manual-exposure shooting” on page 178.

Exposure Setting

� Autoexposure shooting: Automatically-set shutter speed and aperture (displayed when pressing the shutter button halfway).

� Manual exposure shooting: Manually-set shutter speed and aperture.

AEB Canceled

Flash Flash off

Regardless of the drive mode setting, single shooting will take effect for still

photo shooting during movie shooting.


shooting, the movie will record

www.devic

eman

uals.

eushooting, the movie will record

The captured still photo will be recorded to the card, and

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe captured still photo will be recorded to the card, and

shooting will resume automatically when the Live View image

www.devic

eman

uals.

eushooting will resume automatically when the Live View image

The movie and still photo will be recorded as separate fil

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The movie and still photo will be recorded as separate fil

o shooting are shown below. Other

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

o shooting are shown below. Other


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



1: Image quality

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

1: Image qualityWhen the movie recording size is [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When the movie recording size is [aspect ratio will be 16:9. When the size is [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

aspect ratio will be 16:9. When the size is [ratio will be 4:3.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ratio will be 4:3.

� With autoexposure shooting: Automatically set within ISO www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� With autoexposure shooting: Automatically set within ISO ISO 6400.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

ISO 6400.www.devicemanuals.eu



183

k Shooting Movies

When you press the shutter button halfway to autofocus during movie

shooting, the following phenomena may occur.

� Focus may become far off momentarily.

� The brightness of the recorded movie may be different from that of the

actual scene.

� The recorded movie may be momentarily still.

� Lens operation noise may be recorded.

� You may not take a still photo when focus is not achieved in cases such as

the subject is moving.


184

Function settings particular to movie shooting are explained here.

If you press the <Q> button while the image is displayed on the LCD

monitor, you can set any of the following: AF method, drive mode,

image-recording quality (still photos), movie-recording size,　video snapshots, white balance, Picture Style, and Auto Lighting

Optimizer.

In Basic Zone modes, only the functions in bold can be set.



displayed.



function.

The function and Feature guide (p.52)

will appear.



To set the drive mode’s <q> setting

or Picture Style parameters, press the

 button.

3 Exit the setting.


return to movie shooting.

You can also select <2> to return to

movie shooting.

Shooting Function Settings

Q Quick Control


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button.


www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe settable functions will be


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

185

The menu option [Z2: Movie rec. size]

enables you to select the movie’s image

size [****x****] and frame rate [9]

(frames recorded per second). The 9

(frame rate) switches automatically

depending on the [52: Video system]

setting.

Image size

A [1920x1080] : Full High-Definition (Full HD) recording quality.

The aspect ratio will be 16:9.

B [1280x720] : High-Definition (HD) recording quality.


C [640x480] : Standard-definition recording quality.


Frame rate (fps: frames per second)

6/8 : For areas where the TV format is NTSC (North America,

Japan, Korea, Mexico, etc.).

5/7 : For areas where the TV format is PAL (Europe, Russia,

China, Australia, etc.).

4 : Mainly for motion pictures.

3 Setting the Movie-recording Size


] : Full High-Definition (Full HD) recording quality.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] : Full High-Definition (Full HD) recording quality.


www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe aspect ratio will be 16:9.

] : High-Definition (HD) recording quality.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] : High-Definition (HD) recording quality.


www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe aspect ratio will be 16:9.

] : Standard-definition recording quality.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] : Standard-definition recording quality.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


(fps: frames per second)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(fps: frames per second)

: For areas where the TV format is NTSC (North America,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: For areas where the TV format is NTSC (North America,


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


: For areas where the TV format is PAL (Europe, Russia,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: For areas where the TV format is PAL (Europe, Russia,


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


: Mainly for motion pictures.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Mainly for motion pictures.

186

3 Setting the Movie-recording Size

Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute

About Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB

Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep shooting

without interruption.

During movie shooting, approx. 30 sec. before the movie reaches

the 4 GB file size, the elapsed shooting time displayed in the movie

shooting screen will start blinking. If you keep shooting the movie

and the file size exceeds 4 GB, a new movie file will be created

automatically and the elapsed shooting time or time code will stop

blinking.

When you play back the movie, you will have to play each movie file

individually. Movie files cannot play back consecutively automatically.

After the movie playback ends, select the next movie to be played.

Movie Shooting Time Limit

The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 29 min. 59 sec. If

the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting

will stop automatically. You can resume movie shooting by pressing

the <A> button. (A new movie file is recorded.)

Movie-RecordingSize

Total Recording Time (approx.) File Size (approx.)4 GB Card 8 GB Card 16 GB Card

[1920x1080]

6

11 min. 22 min. 44 min. 330 MB/min.5

4

[1280x720]8

11 min. 22 min. 44 min. 330 MB/min.7

[640x480]6

46 min. 1 hr. 32 min. 3 hr. 4 min. 82.5 MB/min.5

An increase of the camera’s internal temperature may cause movie shooting

to stop before the maximum recording time shown in the table above (p.200).


ng 4 GB, you can keep shooting

www.devic

eman

uals.

eung 4 GB, you can keep shooting

During movie shooting, approx. 30 sec. before the movie reache

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

During movie shooting, approx. 30 sec. before the movie reache

the 4 GB file size, the elapsed sh

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the 4 GB file size, the elapsed shooting time displayed in the movie

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ooting time displayed in the movie

shooting screen will start blinki

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shooting screen will start blinking. If you keep shooting the movie

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ng. If you keep shooting the movie

and the file size exceeds 4 GB,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

and the file size exceeds 4 GB, a new movie file will be created

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

a new movie file will be created

automatically and the elapsed shooti

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

automatically and the elapsed shooti

When you play back the movie, you

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When you play back the movie, you

individually. Movie files cannot play back consecutively automat

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

individually. Movie files cannot play back consecutively automat

After the movie playback ends, select the next movie to be plawww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

After the movie playback ends, select the next movie to be pla

Movie Shooting Time Limitwww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Movie Shooting Time Limit

46 min. 1 hr. 32 min. 3 hr. 4 min. 82.5 MB/min.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu46 min. 1 hr. 32 min. 3 hr. 4 min. 82.5 MB/min.

187

You can easily create a short movie with the video snapshot function.

A video snapshot is a short movie clip lasting approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8

sec. A collection of video snapshots is called a video snapshot album

and can be saved to the card as a single movie file. By changing the

scene or angle in each video snapshot, you can create dynamic short

movies.

A video snapshot album can also be played together with background

music (p.193, 255).

1 Select [Video snapshot].

Under the [Z2] tab, select [Video

snapshot], then press <0>.

2 Select [Enable].


3 Shooting Video Snapshots

Setting the Video Snapshot Shooting Duration

Video Snapshot Album Concept

Video snapshot album

Video

snapshot 1

Video

snapshot 2

Video

snapshot x


1

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

1 Select [Video snapshot].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [Video snapshot].



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu














www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Video snapshot albumVideo snapshot album

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Video

www.devic

eman

uals.

euVideo

snapshot x

www.devic

eman

uals.

eusnapshot x


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

188


3 Select [Album settings].

Select [Album settings], then press

<0>.

If you want to continue shooting for

an existing album, go to “Adding to an

Existing Album” (p.192).

4 Select [Create a new album].

Select [Create a new album], then

press <0>.

5 Select the Snapshot length.

Press <0> and use <V> to select

the snapshot’s length, then press

<0>.

6 Select [OK].


Press the <M> button to exit the

menu and return to the movie

shooting screen. A blue bar will

appear to indicate the snapshot

length.

Go to “Creating a Video Snapshot

Album” (p.189).

Shooting duration


Select the Snapshot length.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the Snapshot length.

Press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press <0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

0> and use <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> and use <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


<

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

<0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

0>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>.

6

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

6


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

189


7 Shoot the first video snapshot.

Press the <A> button and shoot.

The blue bar indicating the shooting

duration will gradually decrease. After

the set shooting duration elapses, the

shooting stops automatically.

After the LCD monitor turns off and the

access lamp stops blinking, the

confirmation screen will appear (p.190).

8 Save as a video snapshot album.

Press the key to select

[JSave as album], then press

<0>.

The movie clip will be saved as the

video snapshot album’s first video

snapshot.

9 Continue to shoot more video

snapshots.

Repeat step 7 to shoot the next video

snapshot.

Press the key to select

[JAdd to album], then press <0>.

To create another video snapshot

album, select [W Save as a new

album], then select [OK].

Creating a Video Snapshot Album


access lamp stops blinking, the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euaccess lamp stops blinking, the

confirmation screen will appear (p.190).

www.devic

eman

uals.

euconfirmation screen will appear (p.190).

Save as a video snapshot album.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSave as a video snapshot album.

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPress the .

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


9

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

9


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

190


10 Quit the video snapshot shooting.

Set [Video snapshot] to [Disable].

To return to normal movie

shooting, be sure to set [Disable].


menu and return to the normal movie

shooting screen.

On-screen Options in Steps 8 and 9

Function Description

JSave as album(Step 8)

The movie clip will be saved as the video snapshot album’s first video snapshot.

JAdd to album(Step 9)

The video snapshot just recorded will be added to the album recorded immediately before.

W Save as a new album(Step 9)

A new video snapshot album is created and the movie clip is saved as the first video snapshot. The new album will be a different file from the previously recorded album.

1 Playback video snapshot (Steps 8 and 9)

The video snapshot just recorded will be played. For playback operations, see the table on the next page.

rDo not save to album(Step 8)

rDelete without saving to album (Step 9)

If you want to delete the video snapshot you just recorded and not save it to the album, select [OK].



Description

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDescription

www.devicemanuals.euThe movie clip will be saved as the video

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe movie clip will be saved as the video rst video snapshot.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eurst video snapshot.


The video snapshot just recorded will be added

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe video snapshot just recorded will be added to the album recorded immediately before.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euto the album recorded immediately before.


A new video snapshot album is created and the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

A new video snapshot album is created and the movie clip is saved as

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

movie clip is saved as The new album will be a different file from the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The new album will be a different file from the previously recorded album.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

previously recorded album.



The video snapshot just recorded will be played.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The video snapshot just recorded will be played. For playback operations, see the table on the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For playback operations, see the table on the next page.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

next page.


Delete without saving to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Delete without saving to


If you want to delete the video snapshot you just

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If you want to delete the video snapshot you just








191


[Playback video snapshot] Operations

* With [Skip backward] or [Skip forward], the skipping duration will correspond to the

number of seconds set under [Video snapshot] (approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec.).

Function Playback Description

7 PlayBy pressing <0>, you can play or pause the just-recorded video snapshot.

5 First frame Displays the first scene of the album’s first video snapshot.

Skip backward*Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips back by a few seconds.

3 Previous frameEach time you press <0>, the previous frame is displayed. If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the movie.

6 Next frameEach time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-by-frame. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the movie.

Skip forward*Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips forward by a few seconds.

4 Last frame Displays the last scene of the album’s last video snapshot.

Playback position

mm’ ss” Playback time (minutes:seconds)

9 VolumeYou can adjust the built-in speaker’s (p.254) volume by turning the <6> dial.

32 Pressing the <M> button returns to the previous screen.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[Skip forward

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[Skip forward

number of seconds set under [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

number of seconds set under [Video snapshot

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Video snapshot


>, the movie will play frame-by-

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu>, the movie will play frame-by-

>, it will fast forward the movie.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu>, it will fast forward the movie.

www.devicemanuals.eu>, the video snapshot skips forward

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu>, the video snapshot skips forward


Displays the last scene of the album’s last video snapshot.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDisplays the last scene of the album’s last video snapshot.



Playback time (minutes:seconds)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



You can adjust the built-in speaker’s (p.254) volume by

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can adjust the built-in speaker’s (p.254) volume by 6

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

6> dial.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> dial.


Pressing the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Pressing the <M

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

M

192


1 Select [Add to existing album].

Follow step 4 on page 188 to select

[Add to existing album], then press

<0>.

2 Select an existing album.

Press the key to select an

album, then press <0>.

Check the text, select [OK], then

press <0>.

Certain video snapshot settings will

change to match the existing album’s

settings.



shooting screen.

3 Shoot the video snapshot.

Go to “Creating a Video Snapshot

Album” (p.189).

Adding to Existing Album

You cannot select an album shot with another camera.


> key to select an

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select an

album, then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eualbum, then press <0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0Check the text, select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCheck the text, select [

0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu>.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


settings.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

settings.

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3

193


You can play back a completed album in the same way as a normal

movie (p.254).

1 Play back the movie.

Press the <x> button to display

images.

2 Select the album.

Press the key to select an album.

On the single-image display, the

[ ] icon displayed on the upper

left indicates that the image is a video

snapshot.

3 Play back the album.

Press <0>.

On the movie playback panel

displayed, select [7] (Play), then

press <0>.

Playing an Album

Cautions for Shooting Video Snapshots

You can add to an album only video snapshots with the same duration

(approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec. each).

Note that if you do any of the following while shooting video snapshots, a

new album will be created for subsequent video snapshots.

� Changing the [Movie rec. size] (p.185).

� Changing the [Sound rec.] setting from [Auto] or [Manual] to [Disable]

or from [Disable] to [Auto] or [Manual] (p.198).

� Updating the firmware.

You cannot take still photos while shooting a video snapshot.

The shooting duration of a video snapshot is only approximate.

Depending on the frame rate, the shooting duration displayed during

playback may not be exact.



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


1

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Play back the movie.


The shooting duration of a video snapshot is only approximat

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe shooting duration of a video snapshot is only approximat

Depending on the frame rate, the shooting duration di

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDepending on the frame rate, the shooting duration displayed during

www.devic

eman

uals.

eusplayed during































www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

194


After shooting, you can rearrange, delete, or play back the video

snapshots in the album.

1 On the playback panel, select [X]

(Edit).

The editing screen will be displayed.

2 Select an editing operation.

Use the keys to select an

editing operation, then press <0>.

Editing an Album

Background Music

Music recorded on the memory card must be used only for private

enjoyment. Do not violate the rights of the copyright holder.

You can play background music when you play back albums, normal

movies, and slide shows on the camera (p.255, 258). To play background

music, you must first copy the background music to the card using EOS

Utility (provided software). For information on how to copy the background

music, refer to the PDF Software Instruction Manual on the CD-ROM.

Function Description

Move snapshot

Press the key to select the video snapshot you

want to move, then press <0>. Press the key to

move the snapshot, then press <0>.

Delete snapshot

Press the key to select the video snapshot you

want to delete, then press <0>. The [L] icon will be

displayed on the selected video snapshot. Pressing <0>

again will cancel the selection and [L] will disappear.

Play snapshotPress the key to select the video snapshot you

want to play, then press <0>.

www.devicemanuals.euAfter shooting, you can rearrange, delete, or play back the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAfter shooting, you can rearrange, delete, or play back the

On the playback panel, select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

euOn the playback panel, select [

The editing screen wi

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The editing screen wi

2

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

2 Select an editing operation.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select an editing operation.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

195


3 Save the edited album.


the Editing panel at the screen’s

bottom.

Press the key to select [W]

(Save), then press <0>.

The save screen will appear.

To save it as a new movie, select

[New file]. To save it and overwrite

the original movie file, select

[Overwrite], then press <0>.

Provided Software Usable with Albums

EOS Video Snapshot Task: Editing albums is possible. Add-on function

for ImageBrowser EX is automatically downloaded from the Internet

using auto update function.

If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be

available.

When the battery level is low, editing albums is not possible. Use a fully-

charged battery.



www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe original movie file, select

], then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu], then press <

196

When you set the power switch to <k>, the tabs [Z1] and [Z2] will

show functions dedicated to movie shooting. The menu options are as

follows.

[Z1] menu [Z2] menu

AF method

The AF methods are the same as described on pages 159-165. You

can select [u+Tracking], [FlexiZone - Multi], or [FlexiZone -

Single].

Movie Servo AF

The default setting is [Enable]. You can focus by pressing the

shutter button halfway regardless of the setting.

� When [Enable] is set:

� You can shoot a movie while focusing a moving subject

continuously. Note that the camera may record the lens operation

noise. To reduce the recording of the lens operation noise, use

a commercially-available external microphone. Using EF-S

18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM or EF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM

lens can minimize the focusing noise recorded during movie

shooting.

� During Movie Servo AF, turn off the power before you set the

lens’s focus mode switch to <MF>.

3 Movie Menu Function Settings


The AF methods are the same as described on pages 159-165. You

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe AF methods are the same as described on pages 159-165. You

FlexiZone - Multi

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

FlexiZone - Multi

Enable

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Enable]. You can focus by pressing the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

]. You can focus by pressing the


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


continuously. Note that the camera may record the lens operati

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

continuously. Note that the camera may record the lens operati

noise. To reduce the recording ofwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

noise. To reduce the recording of

a commercially-available extewww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

a commercially-available extewww.devicemanuals.eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

197


� If you want to hold the focus at a certain point or avoid recording

the lens operation noise before or during movie shooting, you

can temporally stop Movie Servo AF by performing one of the

operations below. When you stop Movie Servo AF, the AF point

will turn gray. When you perform the same operation below

again, Movie Servo AF will resume.

� Tap the [ ] icon on the lower left of the screen.

� Press the <D> button.

� If [6: Shutter/AE lock button] is set to [2: AF/AF lock, no AE

lock] in the [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], Movie Servo AF

will stop while you hold down the <A> button. When you let go

of the <A> button, Movie Servo AF will resume.

� While Movie Servo AF is stopped, if you press the <M>

button, <x> button etc. and then return to movie shooting,

Movie Servo AF will resume.

� For cautions when [Movie servo AF] is set to [Enable], see

page 202.

� When [Disable] is set:

� You can focus only when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

AF with shutter button during k (movie recording)

When you press the shutter button while shooting a movie, you can

shoot a still photo. The default setting is [ONE SHOT].

� When [ONE SHOT] is set:

� You can refocus and shoot a still photo by pressing the shutter

button halfway while shooting a movie.

� When shooting a static subject (not moving), you can perform

shooting in precise focus.

� When [Disable] is set:

� You can immediately start shooting a still photo by pressing the

shutter button, even though focus is not achieved. It is effective

when you want give priority to the shutter chance rather than to

focus.


> button. When you let go

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button. When you let go

> button, Movie Servo AF will resume.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button, Movie Servo AF will resume.

� While Movie Servo AF is stopped, if you press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu� While Movie Servo AF is stopped, if you press the <

> button etc. and then return to movie shooting,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button etc. and then return to movie shooting,

� For cautions when [Movie servo AF] is set to [Enable]

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� For cautions when [Movie servo AF] is set to [Enable]

� You can focus only when the shutter button is pressed ha

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� You can focus only when the shutter button is pressed ha

AF with shutter button during

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AF with shutter button during

When you press the shutter button while shooting a movie,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When you press the shutter button while shooting a movie,

shoot a still photo. The default setting is [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shoot a still photo. The default setting is [


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


� You can refocus and shoot a still photo by pressing the shutwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� You can refocus and shoot a still photo by pressing the shut

198


Grid display

With [Grid 1l] or [Grid 2m], you can display grid lines to help

you level the camera vertically or horizontally.

Metering timerNYou can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock

time).

Movie recording size

You can set the movie recording size (image size and frame rate).

For details, see pages 185-186.

Sound recordingNNormally, the built-in microphone will

record stereo sound. If a commercially-

available microphone equipped with a

mini plug (3.5 mm diameter) is

connected to the camera’s external

microphone IN terminal (p.20), it will be

given priority.

Sound recording options

[Auto] : The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically.

Auto level control will operate automatically in

response to the sound level.

[Manual] : For advanced users. You can adjust the sound

recording level to one of 64 levels. Select [Rec. level]

and look at the level meter while pressing the 

key to adjust the sound recording level.

While looking at the peak hold indicator (approx. 3

sec.), adjust so that the level meter sometimes lights

up the “12” (-12 dB) mark on the right for the loudest

sounds. If it exceeds “0”, the sound will be distorted.

[Disable] : Sound will not be recorded.

Level meter

www.devicemanuals.euNormally, the built-in microphone will

www.devic

eman

uals.

euNormally, the built-in microphone will

record stereo sound. If a commercially-

www.devic

eman

uals.

eurecord stereo sound. If a commercially-

available microphone equipped with a

www.devic

eman

uals.

euavailable microphone equipped with a


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


given priority.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

given priority.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


] : The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] : The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


] : For advanced users. You can adjust the sound www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] : For advanced users. You can adjust the sound

recording level to one of 64 levels. Select [www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

recording level to one of 64 levels. Select [

199


[Wind filter]

When set to [Enable], it reduces wind noise when there is wind

outdoors. This feature takes effect only with the built-in

microphone.

Note that [Enable] will also reduce low bass sounds, so set this

function to [Disable] when there is no wind. It will record a more

natural sound than with [Enable].

[Attenuator]

Even if you set [Sound recording] to [Auto] or [Manual] and

shoot, sound distortion may still result if there is a very loud sound.

In such a case, setting it to [Enable] is recommended.

Video snapshot

You can shoot video snapshots. For details, see page 187.

In Basic Zone modes, the settings available for [Sound recording] will

be [On] or [Off]. If [On] is set, the sound-recording level will be adjusted

automatically (same as with [Auto]). However, the wind filter function will

not take effect.

The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be

adjusted.

Both L and R record audio at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.


shoot, sound distortion may still result if there is a very loud

www.devic

eman

uals.

eushoot, sound distortion may still result if there is a very loud

] is recommended.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] is recommended.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



In Basic Zone modes, the settings available for [

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIn Basic Zone modes, the settings available for [Sound recording

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSound recording

] is set, the sound-recording level will be adjusted

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] is set, the sound-recording level will be adjusted

]). However, the wind filter function will

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu]). However, the wind filter function will

The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) can

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) can


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


200

Movie Shooting Cautions

White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons

If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie

shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a white icon <s> will

appear. Even if you shoot a movie while this icon is displayed, the

movie’s image quality will hardly be affected. However, if you shoot still

photos, the image quality of the still photos may deteriorate. It is

recommended to stop still photo shooting for a while and allow the

camera to cool down.

If the camera’s internal temperature further increases while the white

icon <s> is displayed, a red icon <E> will start blinking. This blinking

icon indicates that movie shooting will soon stop automatically. If this

happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the camera’s internal

temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the camera rest for a

while.

Shooting a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause

the <s> and <E> icons to appear earlier. When you are not shooting,

turn off the camera.

Recording

If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image

Stabilizer (IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all

times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image

Stabilizer consumes battery power and may shorten the total movie

shooting time or decrease the number of possible shots. If you use a

tripod or if the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, it is recommended to set

the IS switch to <2>.

The camera’s built-in microphone will also pick up camera operation

noise. Using a commercially-available external microphone can prevent

(or reduce) these noises from being recorded.

Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the

camera’s external microphone IN terminal.

If the brightness changes during autoexposure movie shooting, that part

may look momentarily still when you play back the movie. In such cases,

shoot movies with manual exposure.



www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf the camera’s internal temperature further increases while

> will start blinking. This blinking

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> will start blinking. This blinking

icon indicates that movie shooting will soon stop automatic

www.devic

eman

uals.

euicon indicates that movie shooting will soon stop automatic

happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euhappens, you will not be able to shoot again until the camera’s internal

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu camera’s internal

temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the camera re

www.devic

eman

uals.

eutemperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the camera re

Shooting a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Shooting a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged

> icons to appear earlier. When you are not shooting,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> icons to appear earlier. When you are not shooting,

If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set th

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set th

Stabilizer (IS) switch to <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Stabilizer (IS) switch to <1

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all

times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. T

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. T

Stabilizer consumes battery power

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Stabilizer consumes battery power

shooting time or decrease the number of possible shots. If yo

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shooting time or decrease the number of possible shots. If yo

tripod or if the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, it is recommewww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

tripod or if the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, it is recomme

the IS switch to <www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

the IS switch to <

201

Movie Shooting Cautions

Recording

If you use a card with a slow writing speed, a five-level

indicator may appear on the right of the screen during movie

shooting. It indicates how much data has not yet been

written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal buffer

memory). The slower the card, the faster the indicator will

climb upward. If the indicator becomes full, movie shooting

will stop automatically.

If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will either

not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward.

First, shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough.

If there is a very bright light source in the picture, the bright area may

appear black on the LCD monitor. In movies, the bright areas will be

recorded in almost the same way you see it on the LCD monitor.

Still Photo Shooting During Movie Shooting

Regarding the image quality of still photos, see “Image Quality” on page

171.

TV Connection

If you connect the camera to a TV set (p.262, 265) and shoot a movie,

the TV will not output any sound during the shooting. However, the

sound will be properly recorded.

Indicator



If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will

not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward

www.devic

eman

uals.

eunot appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward

see if the card can write fast enough.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eusee if the card can write fast enough.


www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf there is a very bright light source in the picture, the b

appear black on the LCD monitor. In movies, the bright

www.devic

eman

uals.

euappear black on the LCD monitor. In movies, the bright

recorded in almost the same way you see it on the LCD monitor.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eurecorded in almost the same way you see it on the LCD monitor.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Regarding the image quality of still photos, see “Image Qua

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Regarding the image quality of still photos, see “Image Qua

If you connect the camera to a TV set (p.262, 265) and shoot a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If you connect the camera to a TV set (p.262, 265) and shoot a

the TV will not output any sound during the shooting. H

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the TV will not output any sound during the shooting. H


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


202

Cautions when [Movie servo AF] is set to [Enable]

Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult

A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera.

A subject moving at a close distance in front of the camera.

Also refer to “Shooting conditions that make focusing difficult” on page

165.

� Since using Movie Servo AF will consume battery power, the number of

possible shots and the possible movie shooting time will be reduced.

� During zooming or image magnification, Movie Servo AF operation will be

stopped momentarily.

� During movie shooting, if a subject approaches / moves away, or if

the camera is moved vertically or horizontally (panning), the

recorded movie image may momentarily expand or contract (change

in image magnification).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devicemanuals.euDuring movie shooting, if a subject approaches / moves

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDuring movie shooting, if a subject approaches / moves

the camera is moved vertically or horizontally (pannin

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe camera is moved vertically or horizontally (pannin

recorded movie image may momentarily expand or contr

www.devic

eman

uals.

eurecorded movie image may momentarily expand or contr

203

7Handy Features

Disabling the Beeper (p.204)

Card Reminder (p.204)

Setting the Image Review Time (p.204)

Setting the Auto Power-off Time (p.205)

Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness (p.205)

Creating and Selecting a Folder (p.206)

File Numbering Methods (p.208)

Setting Copyright Information (p.210)

Auto Rotation of Vertical Images (p.212)

Checking Camera Settings (p.213)

Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings (p.214)

Preventing the LCD Monitor from Turning Off Automatically

(p.217)

Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color (p.217)

Setting the Flash (p.218)

Automatic Sensor Cleaning (p.223)

Appending Dust Delete Data (p.224)

Manual Sensor Cleaning (p.226)


www.devicemanuals.euHandy Features

www.devic

eman

uals.

euHandy Features


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Setting Copyright Information (p.210)www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Setting Copyright Information (p.210)

204

You can prevent the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved,

during self-timer operation, and during touch screen operations.

Under the [z1] tab, select [Beep], then

press <0>. Select [Disable], then

press <0>.

To silence the beeper only during touch

screen operations, select [Touch to ].

This setting prevents shooting if there is no card in the camera.

Under the [z1] tab, select [Release

shutter without card], then press

<0>. Select [Disable], then press

<0>.

If there is no card inserted in the camera

and you press the shutter button, “Card”

will be displayed in the viewfinder, and

you cannot release the shutter.

You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor

immediately after capture. If [Off] is set, the image will not be displayed

immediately after image capture. If [Hold] is set, the image review will

be displayed up until the [Auto power off] time.

During image review, if you operate any camera controls such as

pressing the shutter button halfway, the image review will end.

Under the [z1] tab, select [Image

review], then press <0>. Select the

desired setting, then press <0>.

Handy Features

3 Disabling the Beeper

3 Card Reminder

3 Setting the Image Review Time

www.devicemanuals.euThis setting prevents shooting if there is no card in the came

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThis setting prevents shooting if there is no card in the came

z

www.devic

eman

uals.

euz1

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu1] tab, select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] tab, select [

shutter without card

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shutter without card

>. Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>. Select [

>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


and you press the shutter button, “

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

and you press the shutter button, “


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monwww.devicemanuals.eu

Setting the Image Review Time

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Setting the Image Review Time

205

Handy Features

To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after the set

time of idle operation elapses. You can set this auto power-off time.

When the camera has turned off due to auto power off, you can turn it

on again by pressing the shutter button halfway or pressing any of the

following buttons: <M>, , <x>, <A>, etc.

If [Disable] is set, either turn off the camera or press the 

button to turn off the LCD monitor to save battery power.

Even when [Disable] is set, if the camera is not used for 30 min.,

the LCD monitor will turn off automatically. To turn on the LCD

monitor again, press the button.

Under the [52] tab, select [Auto power

off], then press <0>. Select the desired

setting, then press <0>.

You can adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor to make it easier to read.

Under the [52] tab, select [LCD

brightness], then press <0>. With the

adjustment screen displayed, press the

 key to adjust the brightness, then

press <0>.

When checking the exposure of an

image, set the LCD monitor brightness to

4 and prevent the ambient light from

affecting the reviewed image.

3 Setting the Auto Power-off Time

3 Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness


Even when [Disable] is set, if the camera is not used fo

www.devic

eman

uals.

euEven when [Disable] is set, if the camera is not used fo

the LCD monitor will turn off automatically. To turn on the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe LCD monitor will turn off automatically. To turn on the

5

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu52

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu2] tab, select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] tab, select [

], then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu], then press <

setting, then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

setting, then press <

You can adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor to make i

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor to make i


Adjusting the LCD

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Adjusting the LCD


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

206

Handy Features

You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images

are to be saved.

This operation is optional since a folder will be created automatically for

saving captured images.

Creating a Folder

1 Select [Select folder].

Under the [51] tab, select [Select

folder], then press <0>.

2 Select [Create folder].

Select [Create folder], then press

<0>.

3 Create a new folder.


A new folder with the folder number

increased by one is created.

3 Creating and Selecting a Folder


], then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu], then press <0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0

Select [Create folder].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [Create folder].

Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [Create folder

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Create folder

<

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

<0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

0>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>.

3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

207

Handy Features

Selecting a Folder

With the folder selection screen

displayed, select a folder and press

<0>.

The folder where the captured

images will be saved is selected.

Subsequent captured images will be

recorded into the selected folder.

Number of images

in folder

Folder name

Lowest file number

Highest file number

About Folders

As with “100CANON” for example, the folder name starts with three digits

(folder number) followed by five alphanumeric characters. A folder can

contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001 - 9999). When a folder

becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one is

created automatically. Also, if manual reset (p.209) is executed, a new

folder will be created automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can

be created.

Creating Folders with a Personal Computer

Open the card on the screen, and create a new folder named “DCIM”. Open

the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and

organize your images. The folder name must follow the format

“100ABC_D”. The first three digits are the folder number, from 100 to 999.

The next five characters can be any combination of upper- and lower-case

letters from A to Z, numerals, and the underscore “_”. The space cannot be

used. Also note that two folder names cannot share the same three-digit

folder number (for example, “100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ”), even if the

other five characters in each name are different, since the camera cannot

recognize the folders.



” for example, the folder name starts with three dig

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

” for example, the folder name starts with three dig

(folder number) followed by five alphanumeric characters. A f

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(folder number) followed by five alphanumeric characters. A f

contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001 - 9999). When

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001 - 9999). When

becomes full, a new folder with the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

becomes full, a new folder with the

created automatically. Also, if manualwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

created automatically. Also, if manual

folder will be created automatically. Folders numbered from 1www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

folder will be created automatically. Folders numbered from 1

208

Handy Features

The image files will be numbered from 0001 to 9999 in the order the

images are taken, then saved in a folder. You can change how the file

number is assigned.

The file number will appear on your computer in this format:

IMG_0001.JPG.

Under the [51] tab, select [File

numbering], then press <0>. The

available settings are described below.

Select the option, then press <0>.

[Continuous]: The file numbering continues in sequence even

after you replace the card or create a folder.

Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the file

numbering continues in sequence up to 9999. This is convenient

when you want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001

to 9999 in multiple cards or folders into one folder in your personal

computer.

However, if the replacement card or existing folder already contains

images recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images

may continue from the file numbering of the existing images in the

card or folder. If you want to use continuous file numbering, use a

newly formatted card each time.

3 File Numbering Methods

0051

Card-1

0052

Card-2

File numbering after

replacing the card

Next sequential file number

100

0051

101

0052

Card-1


creating a folder


available settings are described below.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euavailable settings are described below.

Select the option, then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the option, then press <

[Continuous]: The file numbering continues in sequence

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[Continuous]: The file numbering continues in sequence


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the

numbering continues in sequence up

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

numbering continues in sequence up


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


to 9999 in multiple cards or folders into one folder in yo

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

to 9999 in multiple cards or folders into one folder in yo

However, if the replacement card or

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

However, if the replacement card or

images recorded previously, the file numbering of the new imag

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

images recorded previously, the file numbering of the new imag

may continue from the file numbering of the existing images iwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

may continue from the file numbering of the existing images i

card or folder. If you want to use continuous file numberiwww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

card or folder. If you want to use continuous file numberi

209

Handy Features

[Auto reset]: The file numbering restarts from 0001 each time

the card is replaced or a new folder is created.

When you replace the card or create a folder, the file numbering

restarts from 0001 for the new images saved. This is convenient if

you want to organize images according to cards or folders.

However, if the replacement card or existing folder already contains

images recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images

may continue from the file numbering of the existing images in the

card or folder. If you want to save images with the file numbering

starting from 0001, use a newly formatted card each time.

[Manual reset]: To reset the file numbering to 0001 manually or

to start from file number 0001 in a new folder.

When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created

automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder

starts from 0001.

This is convenient if you want to use different folders for the images

taken yesterday and the ones taken today, for example. After the

manual reset, the file numbering returns to continuous or auto reset.

(There will be no Manual reset confirmation screen.)

0051

Card-1

0001

Card-2

File numbering is reset

100

0051

101

0001

Card-1


replacing the card


creating a folder

If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible

even if the card still has storage capacity. The LCD monitor will display a

message telling you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.

For both JPEG and RAW images, the file name will start with “IMG_”. Movie

file names will start with “MVI_”. The extension will be “.JPG” for JPEG

images, “.CR2” for RAW images, and “. MOV” for movies.


starting from 0001, use a newly formatted card each time.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eustarting from 0001, use a newly formatted card each time.

[Manual reset]: To reset the file numbering to 0001 manu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[Manual reset]: To reset the file numbering to 0001 manu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


When you reset the file numbering

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When you reset the file numbering

automatically and the file numbering

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

automatically and the file numbering

starts from 0001.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

starts from 0001.www.devicemanuals.eu





www.devic

eman

uals.

eu










100

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu100


www.devic

eman

uals.

euFile numbering after

creating a folder

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucreating a folder

210

Handy Features

When you set the copyright information, it will be appended to the

image as Exif information.

1 Select [Copyright information].

Under the [54] tab, select [Copyright

information], then press <0>.

2 Select the option to be set.

Select [Enter author’s name] or

[Enter copyright details], then press

<0>.

The text entry screen will appear.

Select [Display copyright info.] to

check the copyright information

currently set.

Select [Delete copyright

information] to delete the copyright

information currently set.

3 Enter text.

Refer to “Text Entry Procedure” on

the next page and enter the copyright

information.

Enter up to 63 alphanumeric

characters and symbols.

4 Exit the setting.

After entering the text, press the

<M> button to exit.

On the confirmation dialog, select

[OK] and press <0>.

3 Setting Copyright InformationN

www.devicemanuals.euSelect the option to be set.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the option to be set.

Enter author’s name

www.devic

eman

uals.

euEnter author’s name

Enter copyright details

www.devic

eman

uals.

euEnter copyright details


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [Display copyright info.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Display copyright info.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


currently set.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

currently set.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

211

Handy Features

Text Entry Procedure

Changing the entry area:

Press the <Q> button to toggle

between the top and bottom entry

areas.

Moving the cursor:

Press the key to move the

cursor.

Entering text:

In the bottom area, press the <S> key or turn the <6> dial to

select a character, then press <0> to enter it.

Changing the entry mode:*

Select [ ] at the bottom right of the bottom entry area. Each

time you press <0>, the entry mode will change as follows: Lower

case → Numerals / Symbols 1 → Numerals / Symbols 2 → Upper

case.

* When [Touch control: Disable] is set, you can display all the

available characters on one screen.

Deleting a character:

Press the <L> button to delete one character.

Exiting:

Press the <M> button, check the text, select [OK], then press

<0>. The screen in step 2 will reappear.

Canceling the text entry:

Press the button, check the text, select [OK], then press

<0>. The screen in step 2 will reappear.

You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility

(provided software, p.364).

www.devicemanuals.eu> key or turn the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key or turn the <

> to enter it.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> to enter it.

Select [ ] at the bottom right of the bottom entry area. Ea

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [ ] at the bottom right of the bottom entry area. Ea

>, the entry mode will change as follows: Lower

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>, the entry mode will change as follows: Lower

Numerals / Symbols 1

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Numerals / Symbols 1 →

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

→ Numerals / Symbols 2

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Numerals / Symbols 2

Touch control: Disable

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Touch control: Disable


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Press the < www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <Lwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

L> button to delete one character.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> button to delete one character.

212

Handy Features

Vertical images are rotated automatically so they

are displayed vertically on the camera’s LCD

monitor and on the personal computer instead of

horizontally. You can change the setting for this

feature.

Under the [51] tab, select [Auto rotate],

then press <0>. The available settings

are described below. Select the option,

then press <0>.

[OnzD] : The vertical image is automatically rotated during playback

on both the camera’s LCD monitor and on the computer.

[OnD] : The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the

computer.

[Off] : The vertical image is not automatically rotated.

The vertical image is not rotated during the image review

immediately after it is captured.

Press the <x> button and the image playback will display the

rotated image.

[OnzD] is set, but the image does not rotate during playback.Auto rotate will not work with vertical images captured while [Auto

rotate] was set to [Off]. If the vertical image is taken while the camera

is pointed up or down, the image may not be rotated automatically for

playback. In such a case, see “Rotating the Image” on page 247.

On the camera’s LCD monitor, I want to rotate an image

captured when [OnD] had been set.Set [OnzD], then play back the image. It will be rotated.

The vertical image does not rotate on the computer screen.

The software used is not compatible with image rotation. Use the

software provided with the camera instead.

3 Auto Rotation of Vertical Images

FAQ


are described below. Select the option,

www.devic

eman

uals.

euare described below. Select the option,

The vertical image is automatically rotated during pl

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe vertical image is automatically rotated during pl

on both the camera’s LCD monitor and on the computer.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euon both the camera’s LCD monitor and on the computer.

: The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the

: The vertical image is not automatically rotated.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: The vertical image is not automatically rotated.

The vertical image is not rotated during the image r

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The vertical image is not rotated during the image r


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


x www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

x> button and the image playback will display the www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> button and the image playback will display the

rotated image. www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

rotated image.

213

Handy Features

While the shooting settings (p.50) are displayed, press the 

button to display the camera’s major function settings.

B Checking Camera Settings

Date/Time (p.36)

WB correction (p.139)/WB bracketing (p.140)

Color space (p.141)

Auto rotate display (p.212)

Auto power off (p.205)

Card remaining capacity

Settings display

Red-eye reduction (p.108)

Beeper (p.204)

Sensor cleaning (p.223)

Touch control (p.55)

Live View shooting (p.145)

LCD auto off (p.217)

Daylight saving time (p.37)


www.devic

eman

uals.

euWB correction (p.139)/

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWB correction (p.139)/

Color space (p.141)

www.devic

eman

uals.

euColor space (p.141)

Card remaining capacity

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCard remaining capacity



Beeper (p.204)www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Beeper (p.204)www.devicemanuals.eu

214

Handy Features

The camera’s shooting settings and menu settings can be reverted to

their defaults. This option is available in Creative Zone modes.

1 Select [Clear settings].

Under the [54] tab, select [Clear

settings], then press <0>.

2 Select [Clear all camera settings].

Select [Clear all camera settings],

then press <0>.

3 Select [OK].


Setting [Clear all camera settings]

will reset the camera to the default

settings as shown on the next page.

Clearing all camera settings:

After the procedure above, select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)]

in [54: Clear settings] to clear all the Custom Function settings

(p.296).

3 Reverting the Camera to the Default SettingsN

FAQ

www.devicemanuals.euSelect [Clear all camera settings].

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect [Clear all camera settings].

Clear all camera settings

www.devic

eman

uals.

euClear all camera settings

then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthen press <0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu>.

Select [OK].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [OK].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

215

Handy Features

Shooting Settings Camera Settings

AF operation One-Shot AF Auto power off 30 sec.

AF point selection Automatic selection Beep Enable

Drive mode u (Single shooting) Release shutter without card

EnableMetering mode q (Evaluative metering)

ISO speed AUTO (Auto) Image review 2 sec.

ISO Auto Maximum 6400 Histogram display Brightness

Exposure compensation/AEB

CanceledImage jump with 6 e (10 images)

Auto rotate OnzDBuilt-in flash settings Normal firing LCD brightness


0 (Zero)LCD auto off Enable

Time zone Unchanged

Custom Functions Unchanged Date/Time Unchanged

External flash function setting

UnchangedLanguage Unchanged

Video system Unchanged

Image-recording SettingsScreen color 1

Feature guide Enable

Image quality 73 Touch control Enable

Picture Style Auto Copyright information

UnchangedAuto Lighting Optimizer Standard


Enable/Correction data retained

Control over HDMI Disable

Eye-Fi transmission Disable

Chromatic aberration correction

Disable/Correction data retained

My Menu settings Unchanged

Display from My Menu

DisableColor space sRGB

White balance Q (Auto)

Custom White Balance Canceled


Canceled

White balance bracketing

Canceled

Long exposure noise reduction

Disable

High ISO speed noise reduction

Standard

File number Continuous

Auto cleaning Enable

Dust Delete Data Erased






Language

www.devic

eman

uals.

euLanguage


Video system

www.devic

eman

uals.

euVideo system


Screen color

www.devic

eman

uals.

euScreen color


Feature guide

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Feature guide



Touch control

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Touch control


Copyright

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Copyright



Enable/Correction

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Enable/Correction data retained

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

data retained



Disable/Correction

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Disable/Correction data retained

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

data retained


sRGB

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

sRGB



Q

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Q


Custom White Balancewww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Custom White Balancewww.devicemanuals.eu




















216

Handy Features

Live View Shooting Movie Shooting

Live View shooting Enable AF method u+Tracking

AF method u+Tracking Movie Servo AF Enable

Continuous AF EnableAF with shutter button during k

ONE SHOTTouch Shutter Disable

Grid display Off

Aspect ratio 3:2 Grid display Off

Metering timer 16 sec. Metering timer 16 sec.

Movie recording size 1920x1080

Sound recording Auto

Video snapshot Disable




217

Handy Features

You can prevent the display-off sensor from turning off the shooting

setting display on the LCD monitor when your eye approaches the

viewfinder.

Under the [52] tab, select [LCD auto

off], then press <0>. Select [Disable],

then press <0>.

You can change the background color of the shooting settings screen.

Under the [53] tab, select [Screen

color], then press <0>. Select the

desired color, then press <0>.

When you exit the menu, the selected

color will be displayed for the shooting

settings screen.

3 Preventing the LCD Monitor from Turning Off Automatically

3 Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color


You can change the background color

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can change the background color of the shooting settings screen.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

of the shooting settings screen.

Under the [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Under the [

color

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

color], then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

], then press <

desired color, then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

desired color, then press <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



Settings Screen Color

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Settings Screen Color


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

218

The built-in flash and external Speedlite settings can be set with the

camera’s menu. You can use the camera’s menu to set the external

Speedlite function settings only if an EX-series Speedlite compatible

with this function is attached.

The setting procedure is the same as when setting a camera menu

function.

Select [Flash control].

Under the [z1] tab, select [Flash


The flash control screen will appear.

Normally, set this to [Enable].

If [Disable] is set, neither the built-

in flash nor the external Speedlite

will fire. This is useful when you only

want to use the flash’s AF-assist

beam.

For normal flash exposures, set this

to [Evaluative].

[Average] is for advanced users. As

with an external Speedlite, the

metering area is averaged. Flash

exposure compensation may be

necessary.

3 Setting the FlashN

[Flash firing]

[E-TTL II meter.]

Even if [Flash firing] is set to [Disable], if focus is difficult to achieve in low

light, the flash may still fire a series of flashes (AF-assist beam, p.101).


The flash control screen will appear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe flash control screen will appear.

Normally, set this to [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Normally, set this to [


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


will fire.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

will fire.


[E-TTL II meter.]www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[E-TTL II meter.]www.devicemanuals.eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

219


You can set the flash-sync speed for

flash photography in the aperture-priority

AE (f) mode.

: Auto

The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/200

sec. to 30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. High-speed sync is

also possible.

: 1/200-1/60 sec. auto

Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low-light conditions.

It is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake.

However, while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash,

the background may come out dark.

: 1/200 sec. (fixed)

The flash-sync speed is fixed at 1/200 sec. This more effectively

prevents subject blur and camera shake than with [1/200-1/60 sec.

auto]. However, in low light, the subject’s background will come out

darker than with [1/200-1/60 sec. auto].

[Flash sync. speed in Av mode]

If [1/200-1/60 sec. auto] or [1/200 sec. (fixed)] is set, high-speed sync is

not possible in the <f> mode.


The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1

ene’s brightness. High-speed sync is

www.devic

eman

uals.

euene’s brightness. High-speed sync is

Prevents a slow shutter speed from

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low-light conditions.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

being set in low-light conditions.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


However, while the subject will

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

However, while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

be properly exposed with the flash,


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


The flash-sync speed is fixed at

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The flash-sync speed is fixed at

prevents subject blur and camera shake than with [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

prevents subject blur and camera shake than with [

]. However, in low light, the subject’s background will co

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

]. However, in low light, the subject’s background will co

darker than with [www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

darker than with [1/200-1/60 sec. autowww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

1/200-1/60 sec. auto

220


You can set the functions in the table below. The functions displayed under

[External flash func. setting] will vary depending on the Speedlite model.

Select [Built-in flash settings] or

[External flash func. setting].

The flash functions will be displayed.

With [Built-in flash settings], the

highlighted functions can be selected

and set.

[Built-in flash settings] and [External flash func. settings] Functions

* For [FEB] (Flash exposure bracketing) and [Zoom], refer to the instruction

manual of a Speedlite compatible with the functions.

[Built-in flash settings] and [External flash func. setting]

Function

[Built-in flash settings][External

flash func. setting]

PageNormal Firing

Easy Wireless(p.231)

Custom Wireless(p.234)

Flash mode k k 221

Shutter synchronization

k k 221

FEB* k

Wireless functions k k 229

Channel k k k 232

Flash group k k 235


k k k k 120

Zoom* k

[Built-in flash settings] [External flash func. setting]

Flash mode

Flash zoom (Flash coverage)


Wireless functions


FEB

Sample screen


[Built-in flash settings] and [External flash func. settings] Fun

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[Built-in flash settings] and [External flash func. settings] Fun



[

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[Built-in flash settings

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



Normal www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Normal www.devicemanuals.eu





www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

External flash func. setting

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Wireless functions

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWireless functions







221



Normally, set this to [1st curtain] so that the flash fires immediately

after the exposure starts.

If [2nd curtain] is set, the flash will fire right before the shutter

closes. When this is combined with a slow shutter speed, you can

create a trail of light such as from car headlights at night. With E-TTL

II (auto flash exposure), two flashes will be fired: once when you

press the shutter button completely, and once immediately before

the exposure ends. Also, with shutter speeds faster than 1/30 sec.,

1st curtain synchronization will automatically take effect.

If an external Speedlite is attached, you can also select [Hi-speed]

(e). For details, refer to the Speedlite’s instruction manual.

Wireless functions

When performing optical transmission wireless flash shooting using

the master function of the built-in flash, see “Wireless Flash

Photography” on page 229. When performing wireless flash

shooting with radio or optical transmission using the master function

of the external Speedlite, refer to the Speedlite’s instruction manual.


See “Flash Exposure Compensation” on page 120.

Flash mode

You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash shooting.

[E-TTL II] is the standard mode of

EX-series Speedlites for automatic

flash shooting.

[Manual flash] is for advanced users

who want to set the [Flash output]

(1/1 to 1/128) themselves.

Regarding other flash modes, refer to

the instruction manual of a Speedlite

compatible with the functions.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf an external Speedlite is attached, you can also select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf an external Speedlite is attached, you can also select [

). For details, refer to the Speedlite’s instruction manu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu). For details, refer to the Speedlite’s instruction manu

on wireless flash shooting using

www.devic

eman

uals.

euon wireless flash shooting using

-in flash, see “Wireless Flash

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

-in flash, see “Wireless Flash


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


shooting with radio or optical trans

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shooting with radio or optical transmission using the master function

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

mission using the master function

of the external Speedlite, refer to the Speedlite’s instru

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

of the external Speedlite, refer to the Speedlite’s instru


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash shoot

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash shoot


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

222


The Custom Functions displayed under [External flash C.Fn setting]

will vary depending on the Speedlite model.

1 Display the Custom Function.

With the camera ready to shoot with

an external Speedlite, select

[External flash C.Fn setting], then

press <0>.

2 Set the Custom Function.


function number, then set the

function. The procedure is the same

as setting the camera’s Custom

Functions (p.296).


Under the [z1: Flash control] tab,

select [Clear settings], then press

<0>.

2 Select the settings to be cleared.

Select [Clear built-in flash set.],

[Clear external flash set.], or [Clear

ext. flash C.Fn set.], then press

<0>.

When you select [OK], the respective

flash settings will be cleared.

Setting the External Speedlite Custom Functions

Clear the Settings

www.devicemanuals.euSet the Custom Function.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSet the Custom Function.

U

www.devic

eman

uals.

euU> key to select the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select the

function number, then set the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eufunction number, then set the

function. The procedure is the same

www.devic

eman

uals.

eufunction. The procedure is the same


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Functions (p.296).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Functions (p.296).

1

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [Clear settings].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

223

Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, the Self

Cleaning Sensor Unit operates to automatically shake off the dust on

the front of the sensor. Normally, you need not pay attention to this

operation. However, you can choose to perform sensor cleaning at any

time, or disable it.

1 Select [Sensor cleaning].

Under the [53] tab, select [Sensor

cleaning], then press <0>.

2 Select [Clean nowf].

Select [Clean nowf], then press

<0>.

Select [OK] on the dialog screen,

then press <0>.

The screen will indicate that the

sensor is being cleaned. (A small

sound may be heard.) Although there

will be a shutter sound during the

cleaning, a picture is not taken.

In step 2, select [Auto cleaningf] and set it to [Disable].

The sensor cleaning will no longer be executed when you set the

power switch to <1> or <2>.

f Automatic Sensor Cleaning

Cleaning the Sensor Now

Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning

For best results, perform the sensor cleaning with the camera placed

upright and stable on a table or other flat surface.

Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much.

Immediately after the sensor cleaning is finished, the [Clean nowf]

option will remain disabled temporarily.


], then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu], then press <

Select [Clean now

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect [Clean now

Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [Clean now

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Clean now

0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

0>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [

then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


For best results, perform the sensor cleaning with the camera plawww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For best results, perform the sensor cleaning with the camera pla

224

Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust

that may be visible on captured images. However, in case visible dust

still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for

erasing the dust spots later. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital

Photo Professional (provided software, p.364) to erase the dust spots

automatically.

Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper.

Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer.

Set the lens focus mode switch to <MF> and set the focus to infinity

(∞). If the lens has no distance scale, look at the front of the lens and

turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.

1 Select [Dust Delete Data].

Under the [z3] tab, select [Dust

Delete Data], then press <0>.

2 Select [OK].

Select [OK] and press <0>. After

the automatic self-cleaning of the

sensor is performed, a message will

appear. Although there will be a

shutter sound during the cleaning, a

picture is not taken.

3 Appending Dust Delete DataN

Preparation

Obtain the Dust Delete Data

www.devicemanuals.eu> and set the focus to infinity

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> and set the focus to infinity

look at the front of the lens and

www.devic

eman

uals.

eulook at the front of the lens and

turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euturn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.

Select [Dust Delete Data].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [Dust Delete Data].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Under the [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Under the [

Delete Data

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Delete Data

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

225

3 Appending Dust Delete DataN

3 Photograph a solid-white object.

At a distance of 20 cm - 30 cm (0.7 ft.

- 1.0 ft.), fill the viewfinder with a

patternless, solid-white object and

take a picture.

The picture will be taken in aperture-

priority AE mode at an aperture of f/22.

Since the image will not be saved, the

data can still be obtained even if there

is no card in the camera.

When the picture is taken, the camera

will start collecting the Dust Delete

Data. When the Dust Delete Data is

obtained, a message will appear. Select

[OK], and the menu will reappear.

If the data was not obtained

successfully, an error message will

appear. Follow the “Preparation”

procedure on the preceding page, then

select [OK]. Take the picture again.

After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG

and 1 images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, it is

recommended to update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again.

For details about using Digital Photo Professional (provided software,

p.364) to erase dust spots, refer to the PDF Software Instruction

Manual on the CD-ROM (p.367).

The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly

affects the image file size.

About the Dust Delete Data

Be sure to use a solid-white object such as a new sheet of white paper. If the

paper has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and

affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the software.


is no card in the camera.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euis no card in the camera.

When the picture is taken, the camera

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWhen the picture is taken, the camera

will start collecting the Dust Delete

www.devic

eman

uals.

euwill start collecting the Dust Delete

Data. When the Dust Delete Data is

www.devic

eman

uals.

euData. When the Dust Delete Data is


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


[

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[OK

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

OK], and the menu will reappear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

], and the menu will reappear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



About the Dust Delete Datawww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

About the Dust Delete Data

226

Dust that could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can

be removed manually with a blower, etc. Before cleaning the sensor,

detach the lens from the camera.

The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. If the

sensor needs to be cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon

Service Center is recommended.

1 Select [Sensor cleaning].

Under the [53] tab, select [Sensor

cleaning], then press <0>.

2 Select [Clean manually].

Select [Clean manually], then press

<0>.

3 Select [OK].


In a moment, the reflex mirror will

lockup and the shutter will open.

4 Clean the sensor.

5 End the cleaning.

Set the power switch to <2>.

3 Manual Sensor CleaningN

If you use a battery, make sure it is fully charged. If the battery grip with size-

AA/LR6 batteries is attached, manual sensor cleaning will not be possible.

For the power source, using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8 (sold separately) is

recommended.


Select [Clean manually].

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect [Clean manually].

Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [Clean manually

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Clean manually

0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

0>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>.

Select [OK].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [OK].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

227

3 Manual Sensor CleaningN

While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If the

power is cut off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains and

image sensor may get damaged.

� Setting the power switch to <2>.

� Opening the battery compartment cover.

� Opening the card slot cover.The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor

with care.

Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the

sensor.

Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If

the power is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or

reflex mirror may get damaged.

Never use canned air or gas to clean the sensor. The blowing force can

damage the sensor or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor.

If the battery level becomes low while you clean the sensor, the beeper

will sound as a warning. Stop cleaning the sensor.

If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the

sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.



Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the l

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDo not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the l

the power is turned off, the shutter will close and the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe power is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or

www.devic

eman

uals.

eushutter curtains or

n the sensor. The blowing force can

www.devic

eman

uals.

eun the sensor. The blowing force can

damage the sensor or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eudamage the sensor or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor.

If the battery level becomes low while you clean the sensor,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the battery level becomes low while you clean the sensor,


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, ha

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, ha


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

229

8Wireless Flash

Photography

You can use the built-in flash for wireless flash shooting.

The camera’s built-in flash can work as a master unit with Canon Speedlites with a wireless slave feature and wirelessly trigger the Speedlite(s) to fire.

Canceling the slave unit’s auto power off

To cancel the slave unit’s auto power off, press the camera’s <A> button. If you are using manual flash firing, press the slave unit’s test firing (PILOT) button to cancel the auto power off.

Be sure to also read the information about wireless flash

photography in the Speedlite’s instruction manual.



Wireless Flash

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWireless Flash

Photography

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPhotography

You can use the built-in flash

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can use the built-in flash for wireless flash shooting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

for wireless flash shooting.

The camera’s built-in flash can work as a master unit

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The camera’s built-in flash can work as a master unit with Canon Speedlites with a www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

with Canon Speedlites with a wirelessly trigger the Speedlite(s) to fire.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

wirelessly trigger the Speedlite(s) to fire.www.devicemanuals.eu

230

Regarding your Speedlite (slave unit), refer to its instruction manual and

set it as follows. The settings other than the ones below for the slave

unit’s control are all set with the camera. Different types of Canon

Speedlite slave units can be used and controlled together.

(1) Set the Speedlite as a slave unit.

(2) Set the Speedlite’s transmission channel to the same channel

as set on the camera.*1

(3) If you want to set the flash ratio (p.236), set the slave unit ID.

(4) Position the camera and slave unit(s) within the range shown below.

(5) Face the slave unit’s wireless sensor toward the camera.*2

*1: If the Speedlite does not have a transmission channel setting function, the camera

can work with any channel.

*2: In small rooms, the slave unit may work even if its wireless sensor does not face the

camera. The camera’s wireless signals can bounce off the walls and be received by

the slave unit. When using an EX-series Speedlite with fixed flash head and wireless

sensor, take pictures to make sure it can fire.

Using Wireless FlashN

Slave Unit Settings and Position

Approx.

10 m

(32.8 ft.)

Approx.

7 m

(23.0 ft.)

Approx. 5 m

(16.4 ft.)

Approx. 7 m

(23.0 ft.)

Approx.

80°

Example of Wireless Flash Set-up

Indoors

Outdoors

The camera’s master unit function cannot be used for wireless flash

shooting with radio transmission.


, set the slave unit ID.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu, set the slave unit ID.

Position the camera and slave unit(s) within the range show

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPosition the camera and slave unit(s) within the range show

(5) Face the slave unit’s wireless sensor toward the ca

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(5) Face the slave unit’s wireless sensor toward the ca





















































Example of Wireless Flash Set-up

www.devic

eman

uals.

euExample of Wireless Flash Set-up

231

The basics of easy, fully automatic wireless flash shooting are explained

below.

Steps 1 to 4 and 6 apply to all

wireless flash shooting. Therefore,

these steps are omitted in the other

wireless flash setups explained on

the pages hereafter.

1 Press the button to raise the

built-in flash.

For wireless flash shooting, be sure

to raise the built-in flash.

2 Select [Flash control].

Under the [z1] tab, select [Flash


3 Select [Evaluative].

For [E-TTL II meter.], select

[Evaluative], then press <0>.

Easy Wireless Flash Shooting

Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite


1

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

1 Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <











































www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

232


4 Select [Built-in flash settings].

Select [Built-in flash settings], then

press <0>.

5 Select [EasyWireless].

Under [Built-in flash], select

[EasyWireless], then press <0>.

6 Set [Channel].

Set the transmission channel (1-4) to

the same one as the slave unit.

7 Take the picture.

Set the camera and take picture in

the same way as with normal

shooting.

8 Exit the wireless flash shooting.

For [Built-in flash], select

[NormalFiring].

Setting [E-TTL II meter.] to [Evaluative] is recommended.

Even though the firing of the built-in flash is disabled when

[EasyWireless] is set, it will still fire a small flash to control the slave unit.

Depending on shooting conditions, the flash fired to control the slave unit

may appear in the picture.

Firing a test flash is not possible with the slave unit.

www.devicemanuals.euSet the transmission channel (1-4) to

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSet the transmission channel (1-4) to

the same one as the slave unit.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe same one as the slave unit.

Take the picture.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Take the picture.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


shooting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shooting.

8

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

8

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

233


You can have multiple slave units fire as if they were a single Speedlite.

This is convenient when you need a large flash output.

Basic settings:

Flash mode : E-TTL II

E-TTL II meter. : Evaluative

Built-in flash : EasyWireless

Channel : (Same as slave units)

All the slave units will fire at the same

output and be controlled to obtain a

standard exposure.

No matter what the slave ID is (A, B, or

C), all the slave units will fire as one

group.

If the flash exposure looks too dark or too bright, you can set flash

exposure compensation to adjust the slave units’ flash output.

Select [1exp. comp.], then press

<0>.

If the flash exposure is too dark, press the

<Z> key to increase the flash exposure

and make it brighter. If the flash exposure is

too bright, press the <Y> key to decrease

the flash exposure and make it darker.

Fully Automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites

Flash Exposure Compensation

www.devicemanuals.euAll the slave units will fire at the same

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAll the slave units will fire at the same

output and be controlled to obtain a

www.devic

eman

uals.

euoutput and be controlled to obtain a

standard exposure.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eustandard exposure.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


group.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

group.

234

This section describes fully automatic

wireless flash shooting with one external

Speedlite and the built-in flash.

You can change the flash ratio between

the external Speedlite and built-in flash

to adjust how the shadows look on the

subject.

On the menu screens, the <0> and

<1> icons refer to the external

Speedlite, and the <3> and <2>

icons refer to the built-in flash.

1 Select [CustWireless].


[CustWireless], then press <0>.

2 Select [Wireless func.].

Under [Wireless func.], select

[0:3], then press <0>.

3 Set the desired flash ratio and

take the picture.

Select [0:3] and set the flash ratio

within 8:1 to 1:1. Setting a flash ratio

to the right of 1:1 is not possible.

If the built-in flash output is not enough,

set a higher ISO speed (p.92).

Custom Wireless Flash Shooting

Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite

and Built-in Flash

The 8:1 to 1:1 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 stops (1/2-stop increments).

www.devicemanuals.euOn the menu screens, the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euOn the menu screens, the <

> icons refer to the external

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> icons refer to the external

Speedlite, and the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSpeedlite, and the <3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu3

icons refer to the built-in flash.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euicons refer to the built-in flash.

Select [CustWireless].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [CustWireless].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


2www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

2www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

235


Multiple Speedlite slave units can be treated as one flash unit or

separated into slave groups whose flash ratio can be set.

The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [Firing group]

setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups with multiple

Speedlites.

Basic settings:



Wireless func. :0


[1All] Using multiple slave Speedlites as one flash unit

This is convenient when you need a

large flash output. All the slave units will

fire at the same output and be controlled

to obtain a standard exposure.



group.

Set [Firing group] to [1All], then

take the picture.

Fully Automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites



www.devic

eman

uals.

euE-TTL II meter. : Evaluative

Wireless func. :

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWireless func. :0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0

: (Same as slave units)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu: (Same as slave units)

All] Using multiple slave Speedlites as one flash uni

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

All] Using multiple slave Speedlites as one flash uni


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu














236


[1 (A:B)] Multiple slave units in multiple groups

Divide the slave units into groups A and

B and change the flash ratio to obtain

the desired lighting effect.

Refer to your Speedlite’s instruction

manual to set one slave unit’s slave ID

to A (Group A) and the other slave unit’s

ID to B (Group B), and position them as

shown in the illustration.

1 Select [Wireless func.].


[0], then press <0>.

2 Set [Firing group] to [1 (A:B)].

3 Set the desired flash ratio and

take the picture.

Select [A:B fire ratio] and set the

flash ratio.

A B

If [Firing group] is set to [1 (A:B)], group C will not fire.

The 8:1 to 1:1 to 1:8 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 to 1:3 stops (1/2-

stop increments).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [Wireless func.].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [Wireless func.].


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


[

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

0], then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

], then press <

2

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

2 Set [Firing group] to [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set [Firing group] to [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

237


The built-in flash can also be added to wireless flash shooting explained

on pages 235-236.

The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [Firing group]

setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups of multiple

Speedlites complemented with the built-in flash.

1 Basic settings:



Wireless func. : [0+3]


2 Select [Firing group].

Select the firing group, then set the

flash ratio, flash exposure

compensation, and other necessary

settings before shooting.

Fully Automatic Shooting with the Built-in Flash and

Multiple External Speedlites

A B

[1 (A:B) 2][1All and 2]



www.devic

eman

uals.

euFlash mode : E-TTL II


www.devic

eman

uals.

euE-TTL II meter. : Evaluative

Wireless func. : [

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWireless func. : [0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0

: (Same as slave units)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu: (Same as slave units)

Select [Firing group].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [Firing group].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu





























238

When [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II], flash exposure compensation

can be set. The flash exposure compensation settings (see below)

which can be set will differ depending on the [Wireless func.] and

[Firing group] settings.

[Flash exp. comp.]

The flash exposure compensation is

applied to the built-in flash and all

external Speedlites.

[2 exp. comp.]


applied to the built-in flash.

[1 exp. comp.]


applied to all external Speedlites.

If [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II], you can press the <A> button to

perform FE lock.

Other Settings

Flash Exposure Compensation

FE Lock


external Speedlites.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euexternal Speedlites.

exp. comp.]

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu exp. comp.]


www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe flash exposure compensation is

applied to the built-in flash.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euapplied to the built-in flash.

exp. comp.]

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

exp. comp.]


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


] is set to [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] is set to [E-TTL II

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

E-TTL II

239

Other Settings

When [Flash mode] is set to [Manual flash], flash exposure can be set

manually. The flash output settings ([1 flash output], [Group A

output], etc.) that can be set will differ depending on the [Wireless

func.] setting (see below).

[Wireless func.0]

[Firing group: 1All]: The manual

flash output setting will be applied to

all the external Speedlites.

[Firing group: 1 (A:B)]: You can set

the flash output separately for slave

groups A and B.

[Wireless func.0+3]

[Firing group: 1All and 2]: The

flash output can be set separately for

the external Speedlite(s) and built-in

flash.

[Firing group: 1 (A:B)2]: You can

set the flash output separately for

slave groups A and B. You can also

set the flash output for the built-in

flash.

Setting the Flash Output Manually for

Wireless Flash Shooting


flash output setting will be applied to

www.devic

eman

uals.

euflash output setting will be applied to

all the external Speedlites.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euall the external Speedlites.

Firing group:

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFiring group: 1

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu1 (A:B)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu (A:B)

the flash output separately for slave

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe flash output separately for slave

groups A and B.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eugroups A and B.

[Wireless func.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[Wireless func.

[

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[Firing group:

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Firing group:


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


240

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

241

9Image Playback

This chapter explains functions related to viewing photos and movies, with more detail than in Chapter 2 “Basic Shooting and Image Playback”. Here you will find explanations of how to play back and erase photos and movies with the camera and view them on a TV set.

About images shot and saved with another device

The camera may not be able to properly display images captured

with a different camera, edited with a computer, or had their file

names changed.


www.devicemanuals.euImage Playback

www.devic

eman

uals.

euImage Playback

This chapter explains functions related to viewing

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

This chapter explains functions related to viewing photos and movies, with more detail than in Chapter 2

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

photos and movies, with more detail than in Chapter 2 “Basic Shooting and Image Playback”. Here you will

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

“Basic Shooting and Image Playback”. Here you will find explanations of how to play back and erase photos

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

find explanations of how to play back and erase photos and movies with the camera and view them on a TV set.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

and movies with the camera and view them on a TV set.

242

Search for images quickly with the index display showing four or nine

images on one screen.


When you press the <x> button, the

last image captured will be displayed.

2 Switch to the index display.

Press the <Hy> button.

The 4-image index display will

appear. The currently-selected image

will be highlighted in a blue frame.

Press the <Hy> button again to

switch to the 9-image index display.

Pressing the button will switch

the display from 9 images to 4 images

and then to 1 image.

3 Select an image.

Press the <S> key to move the blue

frame to select an image.

Turning the <6> dial will display the

next screen or previous image.

Press <0> and the selected image

will be displayed as a single image.

x Searching for Images Quickly

H Display Multiple Images on One Screen (Index Display)

B Bwww.devicemanuals.euSwitch to the index display.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSwitch to the index display.

Hy

www.devic

eman

uals.

euHy> button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button.

The 4-image index display will

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe 4-image index display will


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Pressing the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Pressing the <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

243

x Searching for Images Quickly

With the single-image display, you can turn the <6> dial to jump through

the images forward or backward according to the jump method set.

1 Select [Image jump w/6].

Under the [x2] tab, select [Image

jump w/6], then press <0>.

2 Select the jump method.


jump method, then press <0>.

d: Display images one by one

e: Jump 10 images

f: Jump 100 images

g: Display by date

h: Display by folder

i: Display movies only

j: Display stills only

k: Display by image rating (p.248)

Turn the <6> dial to select.

3 Browse by jumping.

Press the <x> button to play back

images.

On the single-image display, turn the

<6> dial.

I Jump through Images (Jump Display)

Playback position

Jump method

To search images according to the shooting date, select [Date].

To search images according to folder, select [Folder].

If the card contains both movies and still photos, select [Movies] or

[Stills] to display only either ones.

If no images match the selected [Rating], you cannot browse through the

images with the <6> dial.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the jump method.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the jump method.

> key to select the

www.devic

eman

uals.


jump method, then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eujump method, then press <

Display images one by one

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDisplay images one by one

Jump 10 images

www.devic

eman

uals.

euJump 10 images

:

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Jump 100 images

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Jump 100 images

g

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

g:

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Display by date

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Display by date

h

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

h:

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

:

i

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

i


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

244

You can magnify a captured image by approx. 1.5x to 10x on the LCD

monitor.


Press the button during image

playback.

The image will be magnified.

If you hold down the button, the

image will be magnified until it

reaches the maximum magnification.

Press the <Hy> button to reduce

the magnification. If you hold down

the button, the magnification will be

reduced to the single-image display.

2 Scroll around the image.

Use the <S> key to scroll around the

magnified image.

To exit the magnified display, press

the <x> button and the single-

image display will return.

u/y Magnified View

Magnified area position

In magnified view, you can turn the <6> dial to view another image at

the same magnification.

The image cannot be magnified during the image review immediately

after shooting.

A movie cannot be magnified.


> button to reduce

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button to reduce

the magnification. If you hold down

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe magnification. If you hold down

the button, the magnification will be

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe button, the magnification will be

reduced to the single-image display.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eureduced to the single-image display.

Scroll around the image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Scroll around the image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Use the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Use the <











www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

245

The LCD monitor is a touch-sensitive panel that you can touch with your

fingers for playback operations. Press the <x> button to play back

images.

Swipe with one finger.

With the single-image display, use

one finger to swipe the image to the

left or right to see another image.

Swipe to the left to see the next

(newer) image or swipe to the right to

see the previous (older) image.

With the index display, use one

finger to scroll up or down the screen

to display another screen of index

images. Swipe your finger up to see

newer images or swipe your finger

down to see the older images. When

you select an image and tap it, it will

be displayed as a single image.

Swipe with two fingers.

When you use two fingers to swipe left

or right on the screen, you can jump

through images with the method set in

[Image jump w/6] under the [x2]

tab.

d Playing Back with the Touch Screen

Browsing Images

Jump through Images (Jump Display)

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSwipe to the left to see the next

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSwipe to the left to see the next

(newer) image or swipe to the right to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(newer) image or swipe to the right to

see the previous (older) image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eusee the previous (older) image.

With the index display, use

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWith the index display, use

finger

www.devic

eman

uals.

eufinger to scroll up or down the screen

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu to scroll up or down the screen finger to scroll up or down the screen finger

www.devic

eman

uals.

eufinger to scroll up or down the screen finger


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

246

d Playing Back with the Touch Screen

Pinch two fingers.

Touch the screen with two fingers spread

apart, and pinch your fingers together on

the screen.

Each time you pinch your fingers, the

screen changes from a single-image

display to a 4-image index display

and 9-image index display. Spreading

two fingers on the screen will reverse

this operation.

The selected image is highlighted in a

blue frame. When you tap the

selected image, it will be displayed as

a single image.

Spread two fingers apart.

Touch the screen with two fingers

together, then spread your fingers apart

on the screen.

As you spread your fingers, the

image will be magnified.

The image can be magnified up to 10x.

You can scroll around the image by

swiping your finger.

To reduce the image, pinch your

fingers together on the screen.

Tapping the [2] icon will return to the

single-image display.

Reduce Image (Index Display)

Magnify Image

Touch screen operations explained on pages 245 - 246 are also possible

while viewing images on a TV set connected to your camera (p.262, 265).


and 9-image index display. Spreading

www.devic

eman

uals.

euand 9-image index display. Spreading

two fingers on the screen will reverse

www.devic

eman

uals.

eutwo fingers on the screen will reverse

The selected image is highlighted in a

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe selected image is highlighted in a

blue frame. When you tap the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eublue frame. When you tap the


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


a single image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

a single image.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




247

You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.

1 Select [Rotate image].

Under the [x1] tab, select [Rotate

image], then press <0>.

2 Select an image.


image to be rotated.

You can also select an image on the

index display (p.242).

3 Rotate the image.

Each time you press <0>, the

image will rotate clockwise as follows:

90° → 270° → 0°.

To rotate another image, repeat steps

2 and 3.

To exit and return to the menu, press

the <M> button.

b Rotating the Image

If you have set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.212) before taking

vertical shots, you need not rotate the image as described above.

If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during

image playback, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD].

A movie cannot be rotated.

www.devic

eman

uals.


www.devic

eman

uals.


image to be rotated.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euimage to be rotated.

You can also select an image on the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euYou can also select an image on the

index display (p.242).

www.devic

eman

uals.

euindex display (p.242).

Rotate the image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Rotate the image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Each time you press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Each time you press <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

248

You can rate images and movies with one of five rating marks: l/m/

n/o/p. This function is called rating.

1 Select [Rating].

Under the [x2] tab, select [Rating],

then press <0>.

2 Select an image or movie.

Press the key to select an

image or movie to be rated.

You can display three images by

pressing the <Hy> button. To

return to the single-image display,

press the button.

3 Rate the image or movie.


rating.

The total number of images and

movies rated will be counted for each

rating.

To rate another image or movie,

repeat steps 2 and 3.


the menu.

3 Setting Ratings


Select an image or movie.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect an image or movie.

> key to select an

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select an

image or movie to be rated.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euimage or movie to be rated.

You can display three images by

www.devic

eman

uals.

euYou can display three images by

pressing the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eupressing the <Hy

www.devic

eman

uals.

euHy


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

press the <

Rate the image or movie.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Rate the image or movie.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

rating.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

rating.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

249

3 Setting Ratings

The total number of images with a given rating that can be displayed is 999.

If there are more than 999 images with a given rating, [###] will be displayed

for that rating.

Taking Advantage of Ratings

With [x2: Image jump w/6], you can display only images and

movies with a specific rating.

With [x2: Slide show], you can play back only images and movies with

a specific rating.

With Digital Photo Professional (provided software, p.364), you can

select only images and movies with a specific rating (still photos only).

With Windows 7 or Windows Vista, etc., you can see each file’s rating as

part of the file information display or in the provided image viewer (still

photos only).



select only images and movies with a specific rating (still pho

www.devic

eman

uals.

euselect only images and movies with a specific rating (still pho

With Windows 7 or Windows Vista, etc., you can see each file

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWith Windows 7 or Windows Vista, etc., you can see each file

part of the file information display or in the provided

www.devic

eman

uals.

eupart of the file information display or in the provided image viewer (still

www.devic

eman

uals.

euimage viewer (still

250

During playback, you can press the <Q> button to set any of the

following: [ : Protect images], [b: Rotate image], [9: Rating], [U:

Creative filters], [S: Resize] (JPEG images only), and [e: Image

jump w/6].

For movies, only the functions in bold above can be set.


During image playback, press the

<Q> button.




function.

The name and current setting of the

selected function are displayed at the

bottom of the screen.

Set it by pressing the key.

For Creative filters and Resize, press

<0> and set the function. For

details, see page 274 for Creative

filters and page 277 for Resize. To

cancel, press the <M> button.

3 Exit the setting.

Press the <Q> button to exit the

Quick Control screen.

Q Quick Control During Playback

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect a function and set it.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect a function and set it.

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPress the <V

www.devic

eman

uals.

euV> key to select a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select a

function.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

function.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set it by pressing the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set it by pressing the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

251

Q Quick Control During Playback

To rotate an image, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD]. If [51: Auto rotate]

is set to [OnD] or [Off], the [b Rotate image] setting will be recorded to

the image, but the camera will not rotate the image for display.

Pressing the <Q> button during the index display will switch to the

single-image display and the Quick Control screen will appear. Pressing

the <Q> button again will return to the index display.

For images taken with another camera, the functions you can select may

be limited.

252

You can play back movies in the following three ways:

Use the stereo AV cable AVC-DC400ST

(sold separately) or HDMI cable HTC-

100 (sold separately) to connect the

camera to a TV set. Then you can play

back captured movies and still photos on

the TV.

If you have a High-Definition TV set and

connect your camera with an HDMI

cable, you can watch Full High-Definition

(Full HD: 1920x1080) and High-

Definition (HD: 1280x720) movies with

higher image quality.

You can play back movies on the

camera’s LCD monitor. You can also edit

out the movie’s first and last scenes, and

play back the still photos and movies on

the card in an automatic slide show.

k Enjoying Movies

Playback on a TV set (p.262, 265)

Playback on the Camera’s LCD Monitor (p.254-261)

Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN terminal, the camera

cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cable.

Even if you connect the camera to a hard disk recorder with a cable, you

cannot play or save movies and images.

If the playback device is not compatible with MOV files, the movie cannot

be played.

A movie edited with a personal computer cannot be rewritten to the card and

played back with the camera. However, video snapshot albums edited with

EOS Video Snapshot Task (p.195) can be played on the camera.


If you have a High-Definition TV set and

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf you have a High-Definition TV set and

connect your camera with an HDMI

www.devic

eman

uals.

euconnect your camera with an HDMI

cable, you can watch

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucable, you can watch Full High-Definition

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFull High-Definition

(Full HD: 1920x1080) and High-

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(Full HD: 1920x1080) and High-

Definition (HD: 1280x720) movies with

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDefinition (HD: 1280x720) movies with


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



Playback on the Camera’s LCD Monitorwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Playback on the Camera’s LCD Monitorwww.devicemanuals.eu

Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN terminal, the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN terminal, the

cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cabl

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cabl

Even if you connect the camera to a hard disk recorder with a cab

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Even if you connect the camera to a hard disk recorder with a cab


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


If the playback device is not compatible with MOV files, the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the playback device is not compatible with MOV files, the

253

k Enjoying Movies

The movie files recorded on the card can

be transferred to a personal computer

and played with ImageBrowser EX

(provided software).

Playback and Editing with a Personal Computer (p.364)

To have the movie play back smoothly on a personal computer, use a

high-performance personal computer. Regarding the computer hardware

requirements for ImageBrowser EX, refer to the PDF file ImageBrowser

EX User Guide.

If you want to use commercially-available software to play back or edit

the movies, make sure it is compatible with MOV files. For details on

commercially-available software, contact the software manufacturer.


www.devicemanuals.euTo have the movie play back smoothly on a personal computer, use

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTo have the movie play back smoothly on a personal computer, use

high-performance personal computer. Regarding the computer hardw

www.devic

eman

uals.

euhigh-performance personal computer. Regarding the computer hardw

requirements for ImageBrowser EX, refer to the PDF file ImageB

www.devic

eman

uals.

eurequirements for ImageBrowser EX, refer to the PDF file ImageB

If you want to use commercially-availa

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If you want to use commercially-available software to play back or edit

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ble software to play back or edit

the movies, make sure it is compat

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the movies, make sure it is compatible with MOV files. For details on

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ible with MOV files. For details on

commercially-available software, contact the software manufacture

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

commercially-available software, contact the software manufacture

254


Press the <x> button to display

images.

2 Select a movie.

Press the key to select a movie.

On the single-image display, the

<s1> icon displayed on the

upper left indicates a movie. If the

movie is a video snapshot, < >

will be displayed.

You can press the button to

switch to the shooting information

display (p.271).

In the index display, perforations at the

left edge of a thumbnail indicate a

movie. As movies cannot be played

on the index display, press <0> to

switch to the single-image display.

3 In the single-image display, press

<0>.

The movie playback panel will appear

at the bottom of the screen.


Select [7] (Play), then press <0>.

The movie will start playing.

You can pause the movie playback by

pressing <0>.

During movie playback, you can turn

the <6> dial to adjust the built-in

speaker’s sound volume.

For more details on the playback procedure, see the next page.

k Playing Movies

Speaker

The camera might not be able to play movies shot by another camera.

www.devicemanuals.euYou can press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euYou can press the <B

www.devic

eman

uals.

euBswitch to the shooting information

www.devic

eman

uals.

euswitch to the shooting information

display (p.271).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eudisplay (p.271).


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


movie.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

movie. As movies cannot be played

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

As movies cannot be played

on the index display, press

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

on the index display, press


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3 In the single-image display, press

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

In the single-image display, press

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

255

k Playing Movies

Movie Playback Panel

* When background music is set, the movie’s sound will not be played.

Tap [7] at the center of the screen.

The movie will start playing.

To display the movie playback panel,

tap <s1> on the upper left of the

screen.

To pause the movie while it is playing,

tap the screen. The movie playback

panel will also appear.

Operation Playback Description

7 Play Pressing <0> toggles between play and stop.

8 Slow motionAdjust the slow motion speed by pressing the key. The slow-motion speed is indicated at the upper right of the screen.

5 First frame Displays the movie’s first frame.

3 Previous frame

Each time you press <0>, the previous frame is displayed. If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the movie.

6 Next frameEach time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-by-frame. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the movie.

4 Last frame Displays the movie’s last frame.

Background music*

Play back a movie with the selected background music (p.261).

X Edit Displays the editing screen (p.256).

Play back position

mm’ ss” Playback time (minutes:seconds)

9 VolumeYou can adjust the built-in speaker’s (p.254) volume by turning the <6> dial.

32 Pressing the <M> button returns to the single-image display.

Playback with the Touch Screen

With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8, the continuous playback time

at 23°C/73°F will be as follows: approx. 2 hr. 30 min.

If you took a still photo while you shot the movie, the still photo will be

displayed for approx. 1 sec. during the movie playback.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

* When background music is set, the movie’s sound will not be pl

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

* When background music is set, the movie’s sound will not be pl



www.devicemanuals.euPlay back a movie with the selected background music

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPlay back a movie with the selected background music


Displays the editing screen (p.256).

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDisplays the editing screen (p.256).




www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



You can adjust the built-in speaker’s (p.254) volume by

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can adjust the built-in speaker’s (p.254) volume by turning the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

turning the <6

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

6> dial.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> dial.


Pressing the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Pressing the <M

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

M



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu











www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

256

You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie (except video

snapshots) in 1-sec. increments.

1 On the movie playback screen,

select [X].

The editing screen will be displayed.

2 Specify the part to be edited out.

Select either [U] (Cut beginning) or

[V] (Cut end), then press <0>.

Press the key to see the

previous or next frames. Holding it

down will fast forward the frames.

After deciding which part to edit out,

press <0>. The portion highlighted

in blue on the top of the screen is

what will remain.

3 Check the edited movie.

Select [7] and press <0> to play

back the portion highlighted in blue.

To change the editing, go back to step

2.

To cancel the editing, press the

<M> button, select [OK] on the

confirmation screen, then press

<0>.

X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes


Specify the part to be edited out.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSpecify the part to be edited out.

] (Cut beginning) or

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] (Cut beginning) or

] (Cut end), then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] (Cut end), then press key to see the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to see the

previous or next frames. Holding it

www.devic

eman

uals.

euprevious or next frames. Holding it


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

press <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


what will remain.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

what will remain.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

257

X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes

4 Save the edited movie.

Select [W], then press <0>.

The save screen will appear.

To save it as a new movie, select

[New file]. To save it and overwrite


[Overwrite]. Then press <0>.

On the confirmation screen, select

[OK], then press <0> to save the

edited movie and return to the movie

playback screen.

Since the editing is performed in approx. 1-sec. increments (position

indicated by [ ]), the exact position where the movie is edited may differ

slightly from the position you specified.

If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be

available.

When the battery level is low, editing the movie is not possible. Use a

fully-charged battery.


edited movie and return to the movie

www.devic

eman

uals.

euedited movie and return to the movie

playback screen.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euplayback screen.

258

You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show.

1 Select [Slide show].

Under the [x2] tab, select [Slide

show], then press <0>.

2 Select the images to be played.


desired option, then press <0>.

All images/Movies/Stills

Press the <V> key to select one of

the following: [jAll images],

[kMovies] or [zStills]. Then press

<0>.

Date/Folder/Rating

Press the <V> key to select one of

the following: [iDate], [nFolder] or

[9Rating].

When <zH> is highlighted,

press the button.


desired option, then press <0>.

3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)

Number of images to be played

[Date] [Folder] [Rating]

www.devicemanuals.euAll images/Movies/Stills

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAll images/Movies/Stills

V

www.devic

eman

uals.

euV> key to select one of

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select one of

the following: [

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe following: [j

www.devic

eman

uals.

eujAll images

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAll images

Movies

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMovies] or [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] or [

>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>.

Date/Folder/Rating

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Date/Folder/Rating

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

the following: [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the following: [

259


3 Set [Set up] as desired.

Press the <V> key to select [Set

up], then press <0>.

Set the [Display time], [Repeat],

[Transition effect], and

[Background music] for the still

photos.

The background music selection

procedure is explained on page 261.

After selecting the settings, press the

<M> button.

Item Playback Description

jAll images All the still photos and movies on the card will be played back.

iDateStill photos and movies taken on the selected shooting date will

be played back.

nFolderStill photos and movies in the selected folder will be played

back.

kMovies Only the movies on the card will be played back.

zStills Only the still photos on the card will be played back.

9RatingOnly the still photos and movies with the selected rating will be

played back.

[Display time] [Repeat]www.devicemanuals.euSet [Set up] as desired.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSet [Set up] as desired.

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPress the <V

www.devic

eman

uals.

euV

], then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu], then press <

Set the [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the [Display time

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Display time

[

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[Transition effect

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Transition effect

[

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[Background music

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Background music

photos.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

photos.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

260


4 Start the slide show.

Press the <V> key to select [Start],

then press <0>.

After [Loading image...] is displayed,

the slide show will start.

5 Quit the slide show.

To quit the slide show and return to

the setting screen, press the <M>

button.

[Transition effect] [Background music]

To pause the slide show, press <0>. During pause, [G] will be

displayed on the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume

the slide show. You can also pause the slide show by tapping the screen.

During auto playback, you can press the button to change the

still photo display format (p.84).

During movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by turning the

<6> dial.

During auto playback or pause, you can press the key to view

another image.

During auto playback, auto power off will not work.

The display time may vary depending on the image.

To view the slide show on a TV set, see page 262.


> key to select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select [

>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu>.

Loading image...

www.devic

eman

uals.

euLoading image...

the slide show will start.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe slide show will start.

Quit the slide show.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Quit the slide show.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


the setting screen, press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the setting screen, press the <

button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

button.

261


1 Select [Background music].

Set [Background music] to [On],

then press <0>.

2 Select the background music.


desired background music, then

press <0>. You can also select

multiple background music tracks.

3 Play the background music.

To listen to a sample of the

background music, press the 

button.

Press the <V> key to play another

background music track. To stop

listening to the background music,

press the button again.

Adjust the sound volume by turning

the <6> dial.

To delete a background music track,

press the <V> key and select the

track, then press the <L> button.

Selecting the Background Music

At the time of purchase, you cannot select background music with the

camera. You must first use EOS Utility (provided software) to copy the

background music to the card. For details, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction

Manual PDF on the CD-ROM.


> key to select the

www.devic

eman

uals.


desired background music, then

www.devic

eman

uals.

eudesired background music, then

0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0>. You can also select

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu>. You can also select

multiple background music tracks.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eumultiple background music tracks.

Play the background music.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Play the background music.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


background music, press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

background music, press the <

button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

262

You can view the still photos and movies on a TV set.

HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is required.

1 Connect the HDMI cable to the

camera.

With the plug’s <dHDMI MINI> logo

facing the front of the camera, insert it

into the <D> terminal.

2 Connect the HDMI cable to the TV

set.

Connect the HDMI cable to the TV’s

HDMI IN port.

3 Turn on the TV and switch the

TV’s video input to select the

connected port.

4 Set the camera’s power switch to

<1>.

Viewing the Images on TV

Viewing on High-Definition (HD) TV Sets (Connected with HDMI)

Adjust the movie’s sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume

cannot be adjusted with the camera.

Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and

television, turn off the camera and TV set.

Depending on the TV set, part of the image displayed may be cut off.


D

www.devic

eman

uals.

euD

Connect the HDMI cable to the TV

www.devic

eman

uals.

euConnect the HDMI cable to the TV


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


HDMI IN port.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

HDMI IN port.

3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Turn on the TV and switch the


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

263


5 Press the <x> button.

The image will appear on the TV

screen. (Nothing will be displayed on

the camera’s LCD monitor.)

The images will automatically be

displayed at the TV’s optimum

resolution.

By pressing the button, you

can change the display format.

To play back movies, see page 254.

If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible

with HDMI CEC*, you can use the TV set’s remote control for playback

operations.* An HDMI-standard function enabling HDMI devices to control each other so that

you can control them with one remote control unit.

1 Set [Ctrl over HDMI] to [Enable].

Under the [x2] tab, select [Ctrl over

HDMI], then press <0>.


Using HDMI CEC TV Sets

The images cannot be output at the same time from both the <D>

and <q > terminals.

Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <D>

terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

Certain TVs may not be able to play back the captured images. In such a

case, use the stereo AV cable AVC-DC400ST (sold separately) to

connect to the TV.



www.devic

eman

uals.

euTo play back movies, see page 254.

If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable i

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable i

with HDMI CEC*, you can use the TV set’s remote control for playbwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

with HDMI CEC*, you can use the TV set’s remote control for playbwww.devicemanuals.eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devicemanuals.euThe images cannot be output at the same time from both the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe images cannot be output at the same time from both the


Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Certain TVs may not be able to play back the captured images.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Certain TVs may not be able to play back the captured images.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

264


2 Connect the camera to a TV set.

Use an HDMI cable to connect the

camera to the TV.

The TV’s input will switch

automatically to the HDMI port

connected to the camera.

3 Press the camera’s <x> button.

An image will appear on the TV

screen and you can use the TV’s

remote control to play back images.

4 Select an image.

Point the remote control toward the

TV set and press the / button to

select an image.

5 Press the remote control’s Enter button.

The menu appears and you can

perform the playback operations

shown on the left.

Press the / button to select the

desired option, then press the Enter

button. For a slide show, press the

remote control’s / button to select

an option, then press the Enter button.

If you select [Return] and press the

Enter button, the menu will disappear

and you can use the / button to

select an image.

Still photo playback menu

Movie playback menu

Some TV sets require you to first enable the HDMI CEC connection. For

details, refer to the TV set’s instruction manual.

Certain TV sets, even those compatible with HDMI CEC, may not

operate properly. In such a case, disconnect the HDMI cable, set [x2:

Ctrl over HDMI] to [Disable], and use the camera to control the

playback operation.

: Return

: 9-image index

: Play movie

: Slide show

: Disp. shooting info

: Rotate


screen and you can use the TV’s

www.devic

eman

uals.

euscreen and you can use the TV’s

remote control to play back images.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euremote control to play back images.

Select an image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect an image.

Point the remote control toward the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPoint the remote control toward the

TV set and press the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTV set and press the

select an image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

select an image.

Press the remote control’s Enter button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the remote control’s Enter button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: 9-image index

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: 9-image index

: Play movie www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Play movie

265


Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST (sold separately) is required.

1 Connect the AV cable to the

camera.

With the plug’s <Canon> logo facing

the back of the camera, insert it into

the <q > terminal.

2 Connect the AV cable to the TV

set.

Connect the AV cable to the TV’s

video IN terminal and audio IN

terminal.



connected port.


<1>.

5 Press the <x> button.

The image will appear on the TV

screen. (Nothing will be displayed on

the camera’s LCD monitor.)


Viewing on Non-HD TV Sets (Connected with AV Cable)

AUDIO

VIDEO

(Red)

(White)

(Yellow)

Do not use any AV cable other than the Stereo AV cable AVC-DC400ST

(sold separately). Images may not be displayed if you use a different

cable.

If the video system format does not match the TV’s, the images will not

be displayed properly. If this happens, switch to the proper video system

format with [52: Video system].


Connect the AV cable to the TV

www.devic

eman

uals.

euConnect the AV cable to the TV

Connect the AV cable to the TV’s

www.devic

eman

uals.

euConnect the AV cable to the TV’s

video IN terminal and audio IN

www.devic

eman

uals.

euvideo IN terminal and audio IN

terminal.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euterminal.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


connected port.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

connected port.

4

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

4

266

Protecting an image prevents it from being erased accidentally.

1 Select [Protect images].

Under the [x1] tab, select [Protect

images], then press <0>.

The protect setting screen will

appear.

2 Select [Select images].

Select [Select images], then press

<0>.

The images will be displayed.

3 Protect the image.


image to be protected, then press

<0>.

When an image is protected, the

<K> icon will appear on the top of

the screen.

To cancel the image protection, press

<0> again. The <K> icon will

disappear.

To protect another image, repeat step

3.


the menu.

K Protecting Images

3 Protecting a Single Image

Image protect icon

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect [Select images].

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect [Select images].

Select images

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect images


www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe images will be displayed.

Protect the image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Protect the image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

267

K Protecting Images

You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at one time.

When you select [All images in folder]

or [All images on card] in [x1: Protect

images], all the images in the folder or

on the card will be protected.

To cancel the image protection, select

[Unprotect all images in folder] or

[Unprotect all images on card].

3 Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card

If you format the card (p.48), the protected images will also be erased.

Movies can also be protected.

Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase

function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the

protection.

If you erase all the images (p.269), only the protected images will

remain. This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images

all at once.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

268

You can either select and erase images one by one or erase them in

one batch. Protected images (p.266) will not be erased.

Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure

you no longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent

important images from being erased accidentally, protect

them. Erasing a 1+73 image will erase both the RAW and

JPEG images.

1 Play back the image to be erased.

2 Press the <L> button.

The Erase menu will appear at the


3 Erase the image.

Select [Erase], then press <0>. The

image displayed will be erased.

By appending checkmarks <X> to the images to be erased, you can

erase multiple images at one time.

1 Select [Erase images].

Under the [x1] tab, select [Erase

images], then press <0>.

L Erasing Images

Erasing a Single Image

3 Checkmarking <X> Images to be Erased in a Batchwww.devicemanuals.eu

Play back the image to be erased.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPlay back the image to be erased.

L

www.devic

eman

uals.

euL> button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button.

The Erase menu will appear at the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe Erase menu will appear at the


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Erase the image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Erase the image.

Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




Checkmarking <www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Checkmarking <

269

L Erasing Images

2 Select [Select and erase images].

Select [Select and erase images],

then press <0>.


To display the three-image display,

press the <Hy> button. To return to

the single-image display, press the

 button.

3 Select the images to be erased.


image to be erased, then press

<0>.

A checkmark <X> will be displayed

on the upper left of the screen.

To select other images to be erased,

repeat step 3.

4 Erase the image.

Press the <L> button.


The selected images will be erased.

You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at one time. When

[x1: Erase images] is set to [All images in folder] or [All images on

card], all the images in the folder or on the card will be erased.

3 Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card

To also erase protected images, format the card (p.48).


U

www.devic

eman

uals.

euU> key to select the

www.devic

eman

uals.


image to be erased, then press

www.devic

eman

uals.

euimage to be erased, then press

A checkmark <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euA checkmark <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


repeat step 3.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

repeat step 3.

4

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

4 Erase the image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Erase the image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

270

* With 1+73 images, the 1 file size is displayed.

* For still photos taken during movie shooting, <G> will be displayed.

* If a Creative filter or Resize has been applied to the image, the icon will be

displayed.

* Photos taken with flash without any flash exposure compensation are marked

with the < > icon. Photos taken with flash exposure compensation are marked

with the <y> icon.

B: Shooting Information Display

Sample Image Taken in a Creative Zone Mode

Flash exposure compensationamount

Metering mode

Shooting mode


Shooting date and time


Histogram

(Brightness/RGB)

Color spaceWhite balance

Picture Style/Settings

File size


Playbacknumber/

Total imagesrecorded

Folder number - File number

Rating

Aperture

Shutter speed

Protect imagesExposure compensation amount

ISO speed

Eye-Fi transfer


images, the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

images, the

* For still photos taken during movie shooting, <www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

* For still photos taken during movie shooting, <

* If a Creative filter or Resize has been applied to the www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

* If a Creative filter or Resize has been applied to the www.devicemanuals.eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

euHighlight tone priority

www.devic

eman

uals.

euHighlight tone priority


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




File size

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

File size




www.devicemanuals.euISO speed

www.devic

eman

uals.

euISO speed

Eye-Fi transfer

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Eye-Fi transfer

271


* With images taken in a Basic Zone mode, the information displayed will differ

depending on the shooting mode.

* Photos taken in the <C> mode will show [Background blur].

* If manual exposure was used, the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed

(when set manually) will be displayed.

* The < > icon will be displayed for video snapshots.

Sample Image Taken in a Basic Zone Mode

Sample Movie

Ambience effect

Lighting or scene

Shooting modeAmbience

Shooting mode

Movie file size

Shutter speed

Frame rate

Movie recordingsize

Shooting time

Playback

Aperture

www.devicemanuals.eu* With images taken in a Basic Zone mode, the information

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu* With images taken in a Basic Zone mode, the information displayed will differ

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu displayed will differ

Background blur

www.devic

eman

uals.

euBackground blur


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Movie recording www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Movie recording www.devicemanuals.eu

272


About the Highlight Alert

When the shooting information is displayed, any overexposed areas of the

image will blink. To obtain more image detail in the overexposed areas, set

the exposure compensation to a negative amount and shoot again.

About the Histogram

The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and overall

brightness. The RGB histogram is for checking the color saturation and

gradation. The display can be switched with [x2: Histogram disp].

[Brightness] Display

This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of

the image’s brightness level. The horizontal axis

indicates the brightness level (darker on the left and

brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates

how many pixels exist for each brightness level. The

more pixels there are toward the left, the darker the

image. The more pixels there are toward the right, the

brighter the image. If there are too many pixels on the

left, the shadow detail will be lost. If there are too many

pixels on the right, the highlight detail will be lost. The

gradation in-between will be reproduced. By checking

the image and its brightness histogram, you can see

the exposure level inclination and the overall gradation.

[RGB] Display

This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary

color’s brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue).

The horizontal axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on

the left and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how

many pixels exist for each color brightness level. The more pixels

there are toward the left, the darker and less prominent the color. The

more pixels there are toward the right, the brighter and denser the

color. If there are too many pixels on the left, the respective color

information will be lacking. If there are too many pixels on the right,

the color will be too saturated with no gradation. By checking the

image’s RGB histogram, you can see the color’s saturation and

gradation condition, as well as white balance inclination.

Sample Histograms

Dark image

Normal brightness

Bright image


brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indica

www.devic

eman

uals.

eubrighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates

www.devic

eman

uals.

eutes

how many pixels exist for each brightness level. The

www.devic

eman

uals.

euhow many pixels exist for each brightness level. The


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


brighter the image. If there are too many pixels on th

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

brighter the image. If there are too many pixels on th

left, the shadow detail will be lost. If there are t

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

left, the shadow detail will be lost. If there are t

pixels on the right, the highlight detail will be l

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

pixels on the right, the highlight detail will be l

gradation in-between will be reproduced. By checkin

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

gradation in-between will be reproduced. By checkin


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


the exposure level inclination and the overall grada

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the exposure level inclination and the overall grada

This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of eachwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of eachwww.devicemanuals.eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

273

10Post-Processing

Images

After shooting, you can apply Creative filters or resize the images (downsize the pixel count).

The camera may not be able to process images taken with

another camera.

Post-processing images as described in this chapter cannot be

performed while the camera is connected to a personal

computer via the <C> terminal.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Post-Processing

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPost-Processing

Images

www.devic

eman

uals.

euImages

Creative filters or resize

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Creative filters or resize the images (downsize the pixel count).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the images (downsize the pixel count).

274

You can apply the following Creative filters to an image and save it as a

new image: Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,

Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, and Miniature effect.

1 Select [Creative filters].

Under the [x1] tab, select [Creative

filters], then press <0>.


2 Select an image.

Select the image you want to apply a

filter to.

By pressing the <Hy> button, you

can switch to the index display and

select an image.

3 Select a filter.

When you press <0>, the types of

Creative filters will be displayed.

For details on Creative filter

characteristics, see pages 275, 276.

Press the key to select a filter,

then press <0>.

The image will be displayed with the

corresponding filter applied.

4 Adjust the filter effect.


filter effect, then press <0>.

For the Miniature effect, press the

<V> key and select the image area

(within the white frame) where you

want the image to look sharp. Then

press <0>.

U Applying Creative Filters to the Image

www.devicemanuals.euSelect the image you want to apply a

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the image you want to apply a

By pressing the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euBy pressing the <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


select an image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

select an image.

Select a filter.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select a filter.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When you press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When you press <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

275


5 Save the image.

Select [OK] to save the image.

Check the destination folder and

image file number, then select [OK].

To apply a filter to another image,

repeat steps 2 to 5.


the menu.

Grainy B/W



Soft focus

Gives the image a soft look. By adjusting the blur, you can change



When shooting 1+73 or 1 images, the Creative filter will be applied to

the 1 image and the image will be saved as a JPEG image. If an aspect

ratio is set for Live View shooting and a Creative filter is applied to the 1

image, the image will be saved in the aspect ratio that was set.



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Gives the image a soft look. By adjusting the blur, you can ch

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Gives the image a soft look. By adjusting the blur, you can ch


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



images, the Creative filter will be applied to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu images, the Creative filter will be applied to

image and the image will be saved as a JPEG image. If an a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu image and the image will be saved as a JPEG image. If an a

ratio is set for Live View shooting and a Creative filter

www.devic

eman

uals.

euratio is set for Live View shooting and a Creative filter is applied to the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euis applied to the

image, the image will be saved in the aspect ratio that

www.devic

eman

uals.

euimage, the image will be saved in the aspect ratio that

276


Fish-eye effect

Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type

distortion.

Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along

the periphery of the image changes. Also, since this filter effect will

magnify the image center, the apparent resolution at the center may

degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels. Set the filter

effect in step 4 while checking the resulting image.

Art bold effect

Makes the photo look like an oil painting and the subject look three-

dimensional. You can adjust the contrast and saturation. Note that

the sky, white walls, and similar subjects may not be rendered with a

smooth gradation and may look irregular or have significant noise.


Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors. You

can adjust the color density. Note that night scenes or dark scenes

may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and may look irregular

or have significant noise.

Toy camera effect


four corners. By adjusting the color tone, you can change the color

cast.

Miniature effect

Creates a diorama effect. You can change where the image looks

sharp. In step 4, you can press the button (or tap [ ] on the

screen) to change the white frame’s orientation (horizontal/vertical)

where you want the image to look sharp.


inting and the subject look three-

www.devic

eman

uals.

euinting and the subject look three-

ontrast and saturation. Note that

www.devic

eman

uals.

euontrast and saturation. Note that


www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe sky, white walls, and similar subjects may not be rendere

ar or have significant noise.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euar or have significant noise.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


can adjust the color density. Note that night scenes or da

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

can adjust the color density. Note that night scenes or da

may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and may look irre

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and may look irre


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


four corners. By adjusting the color tone, you can change the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

four corners. By adjusting the color tone, you can change the

Miniature effectwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Miniature effect

Creates a diorama effect. You can change where the image lwww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Creates a diorama effect. You can change where the image l

277

You can resize an image to make the pixel count lower and save it as a

new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG 3/4/a/b

images. JPEG c and 1 images cannot be resized.

1 Select [Resize].

Under the [x1] tab, select [Resize],

then press <0>.


2 Select an image.

Select the image you want to resize.

By pressing the <Hy> button, you


select an image.

3 Select the desired image size.

Press <0> to display the image

sizes.


desired image size, then press <0>.

4 Save the image.

Select [OK] to save the resized

image.

Check the destination folder and

image file number, then select [OK].

To resize another image, repeat steps

2 to 4.


the menu.

S Resizing a JPEG Image

Target sizeswww.devicemanuals.euSelect an image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect an image.

Select the image you want to resize.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect the image you want to resize.

By pressing the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

euBy pressing the <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eucan switch to the index display and

select an image.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

select an image.

3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3 Select the desired image size.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select the desired image size.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



Target sizeswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Target sizes

278

S Resizing a JPEG Image

Resize Options According to Original Image Size

The image size displayed in step 3 on the preceding page, such as

[***M ****x****], has a 3:2 aspect ratio. The image size according to

aspect ratios is shown in the table below.

The asterisked image-recording quality figures do not exactly match the

aspect ratio. The image will be cropped slightly.

Original Image Size

Available Resize Settings

4 a b c

3 k k k k

4 k k k

a k k

b k

c

About Image Sizes

Image Quality

Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (Approx.)

3:2 4:3 16:9 1:1

43456x2304




(5.3 megapixels)

a2592x1728




(3.0 megapixels)

b1920x1280




(1.6 megapixels)

c720x480

(350,000 pixels)640x480

(310,000 pixels)720x400*

(290,000 pixels)480x480

(230,000 pixels)

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe image size displayed in step 3 on the preceding page,

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe image size displayed in step 3 on the preceding page,

], has a 3:2 aspect ratio. The image size according to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu], has a 3:2 aspect ratio. The image size according to

y figures do not exactly match the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

y figures do not exactly match the

will be cropped slightly.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

will be cropped slightly.



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



4:3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

4:3



3072x2304

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3072x2304 (7.0 megapixels)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(7.0 megapixels)

(4.5 megapixels)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

2304x1728 (4.0 megapixels)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(4.0 megapixels)


1920x1280 www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

1920x1280 (2.5 megapixels)www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

(2.5 megapixels)www.devicemanuals.eu






279

11Printing Images

Printing (p.280)

You can connect the camera directly to a printer and print

out the images on the card. The camera is compatible with

“wPictBridge” which is the standard for direct printing.

Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) (p.289)

DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print

images recorded on the card according to your printing

instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print,

etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or give the

print order to a photofinisher.

Specifying Images for a Photobook (p.293)

You can specify images in the card for printing in a

photobook.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devicemanuals.euPrinting Images

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPrinting Images


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


PictBridge” which is the standard for direct printing.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

PictBridge” which is the standard for direct printing.

Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print, www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print,

etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or give the www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or give the

280

The direct printing procedure can be performed entirely with the

camera while you look at the LCD monitor.


<2>.

2 Set up the printer.

For details, see the printer’s

instruction manual.

3 Connect the camera to the

printer.

Use the interface cable provided with

the camera.

Connect the cable to the camera’s

<C> terminal with the cable

plug’s <D> icon facing the front of

the camera.

To connect to the printer, refer to the

printer’s instruction manual.

4 Turn on the printer.


<1>.

Some printers may make a beeping

sound.

Preparing to Print

Connecting the Camera to a Printer

www.devicemanuals.euSet up the printer.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSet up the printer.

For details, see the printer’s

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFor details, see the printer’s

instruction manual.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euinstruction manual.

Connect the camera to the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Connect the camera to the

printer.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

printer.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


the camera.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the camera.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

281

Preparing to Print


Press the <x> button.

The image will appear, and the <w>

icon will appear on the upper left to

indicate that the camera is connected

to a printer.

wPictBridge

Before using the printer, make sure it has a PictBridge connection port.

Movies cannot be printed.

The camera cannot be used with printers compatible only with CP Direct

or Bubble Jet Direct.

Do not use any interface cable other than the one provided.

If there is a long beeping sound in step 5, it indicates a problem with the

printer. Resolve the problem displayed in the error message (p.288).

Printing is not possible if the <F> or <G> shooting mode or Multi Shot

Noise Reduction has been set.

You can also print 1 images taken with this camera.

If you use a battery pack to power the camera, make sure it is fully

charged. With a fully-charged battery, printing up to approx. 3 hr. 30 min

is possible.

Before disconnecting the cable, first turn off the camera and printer. Hold

the plug (not the cord) to pull out the cable.

For direct printing, using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8 (sold separately) to

power the camera is recommended.



Before using the printer, make sure it has a PictBridge connect

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Before using the printer, make sure it has a PictBridge connect


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


The camera cannot be used with printers compatible only with

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The camera cannot be used with printers compatible only with


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Do not use any interface cable other than the one provided.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Do not use any interface cable other than the one provided.

If there is a long beeping sound in step 5, it indicates www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

If there is a long beeping sound in step 5, it indicates

282

The screen display and setting options will differ depending on the

printer. Some settings may not be available. For details, refer to the

printer’s instruction manual.

1 Select the image to be printed.

Check that the <w> icon is

displayed on the upper left of the LCD

monitor.


image to be printed.

2 Press <0>.

The print setting screen will appear.

3 Select [Paper settings].

Select [Paper settings], then press

<0>.

The paper settings screen will

appear.

wPrinting

Printer-connected icon

Print setting screen

* Depending on the printer, certain settings such as the date and file

number imprinting and cropping may not be selectable.

Sets the printing effects (p.284).

Sets the date or file number imprinting to on

or off.

Sets the quantity to be printed.

Sets the cropping (trimming) (p.287).

Sets the paper size, type, and layout.

Returns to the screen in step 1.

Starts the printing.

The paper size, type, and layout you have set are displayed.www.devicemanuals.euThe print setting screen will appear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe print setting screen will appear.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


* Depending on the printer, certain settings such as thwww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

* Depending on the printer, certain settings such as th


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


or off.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

or off.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


The paper size, type, and layout you have set are displayed.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The paper size, type, and layout you have set are displayed.

283

wPrinting

Select the size of the paper loaded in

the printer, then press <0>.

The paper type screen will appear.

Select the type of the paper loaded in

the printer, then press <0>.

The page layout screen will appear.

Select the page layout, then press

<0>.

The print settings screen will

reappear.

*1: From the Exif data, the camera name, lens name, shooting mode, shutter speed, aperture,

exposure compensation amount, ISO speed, white balance, etc., will be imprinted.

*2: After ordering the prints with “Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)” (p.289), it is

recommended that you print by following “Direct Printing with DPOF” (p.292).

Q Setting the Paper Size

Y Setting the Paper Type

U Setting the Page Layout

Bordered The print will have white borders along the edges.

BorderlessThe print will have no borders. If your printer cannot print

borderless prints, the print will have borders.

BorderedcThe shooting information*1 will be imprinted on the border on

9x13 cm and larger prints.

xx-up Option to print 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, or 20 images on one sheet.

20-upc35-upp

20 or 35 images will be printed as thumbnails on A4 or Letter size

paper*2.

� [20-upc] will have the shooting information*1 imprinted.

Default The page layout will vary depending on the printer model or its settings.

If the image’s aspect ratio is different from the printing paper’s aspect ratio, the

image may be cropped significantly if you print it as a borderless print. If the image is

cropped, it may look more grainy on the paper due to the fewer number of pixels.


The page layout screen will appear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe page layout screen will appear.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

0>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


reappear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

reappear.

The print will have white

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The print will have white


The print will have no borders. If your printer cannot pri

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The print will have no borders. If your printer cannot pri


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



The shooting information*

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The shooting information*

9x13 cm and larger prints.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

9x13 cm and larger prints.www.devicemanuals.eu

Option to print 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, or 20 images on one sheewww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Option to print 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, or 20 images on one sheewww.devicemanuals.eu

wPrinting

284

4 Set the printing effects (image

optimization).

Set them if necessary. If you do not

need to set any printing effects, go to

step 5.

What is displayed on the screen

differs depending on the printer.

Select the option, then press <0>.

Select the desired printing effect, then

press <0>.

If the <e> icon is displayed brightly

next to <z>, you can also adjust

the printing effect (p.286).

* When you change the printing effects, changes are reflected in the image

displayed on the upper left. Note that the printed image may look slightly

different from the displayed image, which is only an approximation. This also

applies to [Brightness] and [Adjust levels] on page 286.

Printing Effect Description

EOnThe image will be printed using the printer’s standard colors. The image’s Exif data is used to make automatic corrections.

EOff No automatic correction will be applied.

EVividThe image will be printed with higher saturation to produce more vivid blues and greens.

ENR Image noise is reduced before printing.

0 B/W Prints in black-and-white with true blacks.

0 Cool tone Prints in black-and-white with cool, bluish blacks.

0 Warm tone Prints in black-and-white with warm, yellowish blacks.

zNaturalPrints the image in the actual colors and contrast. No automatic color adjustments are applied.

zNatural MThe printing characteristics are the same as the “Natural” setting. However, this setting enables finer printing adjustments than with “Natural.”

EDefaultThe printing will differ depending on the printer. For details, refer to the printer’s instruction manual.

www.devicemanuals.eu> icon is displayed brightly

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> icon is displayed brightly

z

www.devic

eman

uals.

euz>, you can also adjust

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu>, you can also adjust

the printing effect (p.286).

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe printing effect (p.286).


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



The image will be printed using the printer’s standard co

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The image will be printed using the printer’s standard coThe image’s Exif data is used to make automatic corrections.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The image’s Exif data is used to make automatic corrections.


No automatic correction will be applied.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

No automatic correction will be applied.


The image will be printed with higher saturation to pro

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The image will be printed with higher saturation to promore vivid blues and greens.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

more vivid blues and greens.


Image noise is reduced before printing.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Image noise is reduced before printing.


Prints in black-and-white with true blacks.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Prints in black-and-white with true blacks.



Prints in black-and-white with cool, bluish blacks.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Prints in black-and-white with cool, bluish blacks.www.devicemanuals.eu

Prints in black-and-white with warm, yellowish blacks.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Prints in black-and-white with warm, yellowish blacks.www.devicemanuals.eu

285

wPrinting

5 Set the date and file number

imprinting.

Set them if necessary.

Select , then press <0>.

Set as desired, then press <0>.

6 Set the number of copies.

Set it if necessary.

Select <R>, then press <0>.

Set the number of copies, then press

<0>.

7 Start printing.

Select [Print], then press <0>.

With Easy printing, you can print another image using the same settings.

Just select the image and press the <l> button. With Easy printing, the

number of copies will always be 1. (You cannot set the number of

copies.) Also, any cropping (p.287) will not be applied.

The [Default] setting for printing effects and other options are the

printer’s own default settings as set by the printer’s manufacturer. Refer

to the printer’s instruction manual to find out what the [Default] settings

are.

Depending on the image’s file size and image-recording quality, it may

take some time for the printing to start after you select [Print].

If image tilt correction (p.287) is applied, it may take longer to print the

image.

To stop the printing, press <0> while [Stop] is displayed, then select

[OK].

If you execute [Clear all camera settings] (p.214), all the settings will

revert to their defaults.


>, then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu>, then press <

Set the number of copies, then press

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSet the number of copies, then press

Start printing.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Start printing.

Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu





With Easy printing, you can print another image using the sa

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

With Easy printing, you can print another image using the sa

Just select the image and press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Just select the image and press the <

number of copies will always be 1. (You cannot set the number www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

number of copies will always be 1. (You cannot set the number

copies.) Also, any cropping (p.287) will not be applied.www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

copies.) Also, any cropping (p.287) will not be applied.

wPrinting

286

In step 4 on page 284, select the printing

effect. When the <e> icon is displayed

brightly next to <z>, you can press

the button. You can then adjust

the printing effect. What can be adjusted

or what is displayed will depend on the

selection made in step 4.

Brightness

The image brightness can be adjusted.

Adjust levels

When you select [Manual], you can change

the histogram’s distribution and adjust the

image’s brightness and contrast.

With the Adjust levels screen displayed, press

the button to change the position of

the <h>. Press the key to freely adjust

the shadow level (0-127) or highlight level (128-255).

kBrightener

Effective in backlit conditions that can make the subject’s face look

dark. When [On] is set, the face will be brightened for printing.

Red-eye corr.

Effective in flash images where the subject has red eye. When [On]

is set, the red eye will be corrected for printing.

e Adjustment of Printing Effects

The [kBrightener] and [Red-eye corr.] effects will not be reflected on

the screen.

When you select [Detail set.], you can adjust the [Contrast], [Saturation],

[Color tone], and [Color balance]. To adjust the [Color balance], use the

<S> keys. B is for blue, A for amber, M for magenta, and G for green.

The image’s color balance will be corrected towards the selected color.

If you select [Clear all], all the printing effect settings will be reverted to

their defaults.



], you can change

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu], you can change


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


> button to change the position of

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> button to change the position of

> key to freely adjust

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> key to freely adjust


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Effective in backlit conditions that can make the subject’s face

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Effective in backlit conditions that can make the subject’s face

Onwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

On] is set, the face will be brightened for printing.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] is set, the face will be brightened for printing.

287

wPrinting

You can crop the image and print only

the cropped portion as if the image was

recomposed.

Set the cropping right before printing.

If you set the cropping and then set the

print settings, you may have to set the

cropping again before printing.

1 On the print settings screen, select [Cropping].

2 Set the cropping frame size, position, and aspect ratio.

The image area within the cropping frame will be printed. The

cropping frame’s aspect ratio can be changed with [Paper settings].

Changing the cropping frame size

When you press the or <Hy> button, the size of the

cropping frame will change. The smaller the cropping frame, the

larger the image magnification will be for printing.

Moving the cropping frame

Press the <S> key to move the frame over the image vertically or

horizontally. Move the cropping frame until it covers the desired image area.

Rotating the frame

Pressing the button will toggle the cropping frame

between the vertical and horizontal orientations. This enables you

to create a vertically oriented print from a horizontal image.

Image tilt correction

By turning the <6> dial, you can adjust the image tilt angle up to

±10 degrees in 0.5-degree increments. When you adjust the

image tilt, the <O> icon on the screen will turn blue.

3 Press <0> to exit the cropping.

The print settings screen will reappear.

You can check the cropped image area on the upper left of the

print settings screen.

Cropping the Image

Tilt correction

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devicemanuals.euOn the print settings screen, select [Cropping].

www.devic

eman

uals.

euOn the print settings screen, select [Cropping].

Set the cropping frame size, position, and aspect ratio.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Set the cropping frame size, position, and aspect ratio.

The image area within the cropping frame will be print

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe image area within the cropping frame will be print

cropping frame’s aspect ratio can be changed with

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

cropping frame’s aspect ratio can be changed with


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


u

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

u> or <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> or <

cropping frame will change. The smaller the cropping frame, t

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

cropping frame will change. The smaller the cropping frame, t


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


S

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

S> key to move the frame over the image vertically or

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> key to move the frame over the image vertically or

horizontally. Move the cropping frame until it covers the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

horizontally. Move the cropping frame until it covers the

Rotating the framewww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Rotating the frame

Pressing the <www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Pressing the <

wPrinting

288

Depending on the printer, the cropped image area may not be printed as

you specified.

The smaller you make the cropping frame, the grainier the picture will

look in the print.

While cropping the image, look at the camera’s LCD monitor. If you look

at the image on a TV screen, the cropping frame may not be displayed

accurately.

Handling Printer Errors

If you resolve a printer error (no ink, no paper, etc.) and select [Continue] to

resume printing but it does not resume, operate the buttons on the printer to

resume printing. For details on resuming the printing, refer to the printer’s

instruction manual.

Error Messages

If a problem occurs during printing, an error message will appear on the

camera’s LCD monitor. Press <0> to stop printing. After fixing the

problem, resume printing. For details on how to fix a printing problem, refer

to the printer’s instruction manual.

Paper Error

Check whether the paper is properly loaded in the printer.

Ink Error

Check the printer’s ink level, and check the waste ink tank.

Hardware Error

Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems.

File Error

The selected image cannot be printed via PictBridge. Images taken with a

different camera or images edited with a computer may not be printable.


resume printing but it does not resume, operate the buttons

www.devic

eman

uals.

euresume printing but it does not resume, operate the buttons on the printer to

www.devic

eman

uals.

euon the printer to

resume printing. For details on resuming the printing, refer

www.devic

eman

uals.

euresume printing. For details on resuming the printing, refer to the printer’s

www.devic

eman

uals.

euto the printer’s

If a problem occurs during printing, an error message will ap

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If a problem occurs during printing, an error message will ap

> to stop printing. After fixing the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> to stop printing. After fixing the

problem, resume printing. For details on how to fix a printi

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

problem, resume printing. For details on how to fix a printi


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink probl

289

You can set the print type, date imprinting, and file number imprinting.

The print settings will be applied to all print-ordered images. (They

cannot be set individually for each image.)

1 Select [Print order].

Under the [x1] tab, select [Print

order], then press <0>.

2 Select [Set up].

Select [Set up], then press <0>.

3 Set the options as desired.

Set the [Print type], [Date], and [File

No.].

Select the option to be set, then press

<0>. Select the desired setting,

then press <0>.

W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

Setting the Printing Options

[Print type] [Date] [File No.]


Select [Set up].

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect [Set up].

Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect [Set up

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSet up

3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3 Set the options as desired.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the options as desired.

290

4 Exit the setting.

Press the <7> button.

The print order screen will reappear.

Next, select [Sel.Image], [Byn], or

[All image] to order the images to be

printed.

Print type

K Standard Prints one image on one sheet.

L Index Multiple thumbnail images are printed on one sheet.

KL

Both Prints both the standard and index prints.

DateOn

[On] imprints the recorded date on the print.Off

File numberOn

[On] imprints the file number on the print.Off

Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file number may

not be imprinted depending on the print type setting and printer model.

With [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On]

at the same time.

When printing with DPOF, you must use the card whose print order

specifications have been set. It will not work if you just extract images

from the card and try to print them.

Certain DPOF-compatible printers and photofinishers may not be able to

print the images as you specified. Refer to the printer’s instruction

manual before printing. Or check with your photofinisher about

compatibility when ordering prints.

Do not insert into the camera a card whose print order was set by a

different camera and then try to specify a print order. The print order may

be overwritten. Also, depending on the image type, the print order may

not be possible.

1 images and movies cannot be print ordered. You can print 1 images

through direct printing (p.292).


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu7> button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button.

The print order screen will reappear.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe print order screen will reappear.

Next, select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

euNext, select [Sel.Image

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSel.Image

All image

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

All image] to order the images to be

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] to order the images to be

printed.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

printed.


File No.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

File No.] are set to [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] are set to [

not be imprinted depending on the print type setting

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

not be imprinted depending on the print type setting

] prints, the [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] prints, the [Date

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Date

at the same time.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

at the same time.

When printing with DPOF, you must use the card whose print www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When printing with DPOF, you must use the card whose print

specifications have been set. It will not www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

specifications have been set. It will not

291


Sel.Image

Select and order images one by one.

To display the three-image display, press

the <Hy> button. To return to the

single-image display, press the 

button.

Press the <M> button to save the

print order to the card.

[Standard] [Both]

Press the <V> key to set the number of

copies to be printed for the displayed

image.

[Index]

Press <0> to add a checkmark to the

box <X>. The image will be included in

the index print.

BynSelect [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for one

copy of all the images in the folder will be placed. If you select [Clear

all in folder] and select the folder, the print order for that folder will

all be canceled.

All image

If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images on the

card will be set for printing. If you select [Clear all on card], the print

order will be cleared for all the images on the card.

Print Ordering

Quantity

Total images selected

Index icon

Checkmark

Note that 1 images and movies will not be included in the print order

even if you set “Byn” or “All image”.

When using a PictBridge printer, print no more than 400 images for one

print order. If you specify more than this, all the images may not be

printed.


print order to the card.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euprint order to the card.

[Standard] [Both]

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu[Standard] [Both]

> key to set the number of

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to set the number of

copies to be printed for the displayed

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucopies to be printed for the displayed

[Index]

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[Index]

Press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press <

box <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

box <

the index print.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the index print.

Mark all in folder

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Mark all in folder

copy of all the images in the folwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

copy of all the images in the fol

all in folder www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

all in folder] and select the folder, the prinwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] and select the folder, the prin

Index icon

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Index icon

292

With a PictBridge printer, you can easily

print images with DPOF.

1 Prepare to print.

See page 280. Follow the “Connecting the Camera to a Printer”

procedure up to step 5.

2 Under the [x1] tab, select [Print order].

3 Select [Print].

[Print] will be displayed only if the camera is connected to a

printer and printing is possible.

4 Set the [Paper settings] (p.282).

Set the printing effects (p.284) if necessary.

5 Select [OK].

W Direct Printing with DPOF

Before printing, be sure to set the paper size.

Certain printers cannot imprint the file number.

If [Bordered] is set, certain printers may imprint the date on the border.

Depending on the printer, the date may appear faint if it is imprinted on a

bright background or on the border.

Under [Adjust levels], [Manual] cannot be selected.

If you stopped the printing and want to resume printing the remaining

images, select [Resume]. Note that printing will not resume if you stop

the printing and any of the following occurs:

� Before resuming the printing, you changed the print order or deleted

print-ordered images.

� When you set the index, you changed the paper setting before

resuming the printing.

� When you paused the printing, the card’s remaining capacity was low.

If a problem occurs during printing, see page 288.

www.devicemanuals.eu1] tab, select [Print order].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu1] tab, select [Print order].

e camera is connected to a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eue camera is connected to a

(p.282)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(p.282).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Bordered www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Bordered] is set, certain printers may imprint the date on the borderwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] is set, certain printers may imprint the date on the border

Depending on the printer, the date may appear faint ifwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Depending on the printer, the date may appear faint if

293

When you select images (up to 998 images) to be used for a photobook

and transfer them from the camera to a computer using EOS Utility

(provided software), the images will be copied to a dedicated folder.

This function is convenient when you order a photobook from the

Internet.

1 Select [Photobook Set-up].

Under the [x1] tab, select

[Photobook Set-up], then press

<0>.

2 Select [Select images].

Select [Select images], then press

<0>.


To display the three-image display,

press the <Hy> button. To return to

the single-image display, press the

 button.

3 Select the image to be specified.


image to be specified, then press

<0>.

Repeat this step to select another

image. The number of images which

have been specified will be displayed

on the screen’s upper left.

To cancel the specified image, press

<0> again.

To return to the menu, press the

<M> button.

p Specifying Images for a Photobook

Specify One Image at a Time


Photobook Set-up

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPhotobook Set-up

Select [Select images].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [Select images].

Select [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [

<

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

<0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

p Specifying Images for a Photobook

294

You can specify all the images in a folder or card at one time.

When [x1: Photobook Set-up] is set

to [All images in folder] or [All images

on card], all the images in the folder or

on the card will be specified.

To cancel the image specification, select

[Clear all in folder] or [Clear all on

card].

Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card

1 images and movies cannot be specified.

Do not specify images already specified for a photobook in another camera

for another photobook with this camera. The photobook settings may be

overwritten.


295

12Customizing the

Camera

You can customize various camera functions to suit your picture-taking preferences with Custom Functions. Custom Functions can be set and used only in Creative Zone modes.

Cre

ative

Zone



Customizing the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCustomizing the

Camera

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCamera

You can customize various camera functions to suit

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can customize various camera functions to suit your picture-taking preferences with Custom Functions.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

your picture-taking preferences with Custom Functions. Custom Functions can be set and used only in Creative

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Custom Functions can be set and used only in Creative

296

1 Select [Custom Functions (C.Fn)].

Under the [54] tab, select [Custom

Functions (C.Fn)], then press <0>.

2 Select the Custom Function

number.


Custom Function number, then press

<0>.

3 Change the setting as desired.


setting (number), then press <0>.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 if you want to

set another Custom Functions.

At the bottom of the screen, the

current Custom Function settings are

indicated below the respective

function numbers.

4 Exit the setting.


The screen for step 1 will reappear.

Under [54: Clear settings], select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] to

clear all the Custom Function settings currently set (p.214).

3 Setting Custom FunctionsN

Custom Function number

Clearing All Custom Functions


Custom Function number, then press

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCustom Function number, then press

Change the setting as desired.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Change the setting as desired.

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

setting (number), then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

setting (number), then press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

297

3 Setting Custom FunctionsN

* [5: ISO speed] is settable only for manual exposure shooting.

Custom Functions

C.Fn I: ExposureA LV

ShootingkMovie Shooting

1 Exposure level incrementsp.298

k k

2 ISO expansion k In a

C.Fn II: Image

3 Highlight tone priority p.299 k k

C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive

4 AF-assist beam firingp.300

k (With

f*)

5 Mirror lockup

* If you use an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light,

the LED light will turn on for AF-assist even in the c, o, and d modes.

C.Fn IV: Operation/Others

6 Shutter/AE lock button p.301 k k

7 Assign SET button p.302k

(Except 3)

k

(Except

2, 3)*

8 LCD display when power ON p.302

The shaded Custom Functions do not function during Live View (LV

shooting) or movie shooting. (Settings are disabled.)



p.300

www.devic

eman

uals.

eup.300


www.devicemanuals.euk

www.devic

eman

uals.

euk


* If you use an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) equipped

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

* If you use an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) equipped

the LED light will turn on for AF-assist even in the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the LED light will turn on for AF-assist even in the



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



Shutter/AE lock button

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Shutter/AE lock button


Assign SET button

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Assign SET button

8 LCD display when power ON p.302www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

8 LCD display when power ON p.302www.devicemanuals.eu










298

Custom Functions are organized into four groups based on the function

type: C.Fn I: Exposure, C.Fn II: Image, C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive, C.Fn

IV: Operation/Others.

3 Custom Function SettingsN

C.Fn I: Exposure

C.Fn-1 Exposure level increments

0: 1/3-stop

1: 1/2-stop

Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. This is effective when you prefer to control the exposure in less fine increments than 1/3-stop increments.

C.Fn-2 ISO expansion

0: Off

1: On

When you set the ISO speed, you will be able to set “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) for still photos and “H” (equivalent to ISO 12800) for movies. Note that if [C.Fn-3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [1: Enable], “H” cannot be set.

With setting 1, the exposure level will be displayed in the viewfinder and on

the LCD monitor as shown below.



Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture,

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture,compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. T

www.devic

eman

uals.

eucompensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. This is effective

www.devic

eman

uals.

euhis is effective

when you prefer to control the exposure in less fine i

www.devic

eman

uals.

euwhen you prefer to control the exposure in less fine increments than 1/3-

www.devic

eman

uals.

euncrements than 1/3-



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



When you set the ISO speed, you will be able to set

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When you set the ISO speed, you will be able to set ISO 25600) for still photos and “

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ISO 25600) for still photos and “C.Fn-3: Highlight tone prioritywww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

C.Fn-3: Highlight tone prioritywww.devicemanuals.eu

With setting 1, the exposure level will be displayed in

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWith setting 1, the exposure level will be displayed in the viewfinder and on

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe viewfinder and on

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

299


C.Fn II: Image

C.Fn-3 Highlight tone priority

0: Disable

1: Enable

Improves the highlight detail. The dynamic range is expanded from the standard 18% gray to bright highlights. The gradation between the grays and highlights becomes smoother.

With setting 1, the Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.125) is automatically set to

[Disable] and the setting cannot be changed.

With setting 1, noise (grainy image, banding, etc.) may become slightly

more pronounced than with setting 0.

With setting 1, the settable range will be ISO 200 - ISO 12800 (up to ISO

6400 for movies).

Also, the <A> icon will be displayed on the LCD monitor and in the

viewfinder when highlight tone priority is enabled.



www.devicemanuals.euWith setting 1, noise (grainy image, banding, etc.) may become

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWith setting 1, noise (grainy image, banding, etc.) may become


With setting 1, the settable range will be ISO 200 -

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWith setting 1, the settable range will be ISO 200 -

> icon will be displayed on the LCD monitor and in the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> icon will be displayed on the LCD monitor and in the


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


300

C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive

C.Fn-4 AF-assist beam firing

The settings to specify whether or not the AF-assist beam is emitted by the camera’s built-in flash or by an external, EOS-dedicated Speedlite can be set.

0: Enable

If necessary, the AF-assist beam will be emitted by the built-in flash or external Speedlite.

1: Disable

The AF-assist beam is not emitted.

2: Enable external flash only

If an external Speedlite is attached, it will emit the AF-assist beam when necessary. The camera’s built-in flash will not fire the AF-assist beam.

3: IR AF assist beam only

Among external Speedlites, only those which have an infrared AF-assist beam will be able to emit the beam. This prevents any Speedlite which uses a series of intermittent flashes (like the built-in flash) from firing the AF-assist beam.With an EX-series Speedlite equipped with an LED light, the LED light will not automatically turn on for AF-assist.

C.Fn-5 Mirror lockup

0: Disable

1: Enable

Prevents mechanical vibrations in the camera caused by the reflex mirror action (mirror shock), which can disturb shooting with super telephoto lenses or close-up (macro) shooting. See page 142 for the mirror lockup procedure.

If the external Speedlite’s [AF-assist beam firing] Custom Function is set

to [Disabled], the Speedlite will not emit the AF-assist beam even if the

camera’s C.Fn-4 is set to 0, 2, or 3.



If an external Speedlite is attached, it will emit th

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf an external Speedlite is attached, it will emit the AF-assist beam when

www.devic

eman

uals.

eue AF-assist beam when

necessary. The camera’s built-in flash will not fire the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eunecessary. The camera’s built-in flash will not fire the

Among external Speedlites, only those which have an inf

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Among external Speedlites, only those which have an infbeam will be able to emit the beam. This prevents any S

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

beam will be able to emit the beam. This prevents any Suses a series of intermittent flashes (like the built-in

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

uses a series of intermittent flashes (like the built-in

With an EX-series Speedlite equipped with an LED light

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

With an EX-series Speedlite equipped with an LED lightwill not automatically turn on for AF-assist.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

will not automatically turn on for AF-assist.


If the external Speedlite’s [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the external Speedlite’s [AF-assist beam firing

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AF-assist beam firing

], the Speedlite will not emit the AF-assist beam even if

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

], the Speedlite will not emit the AF-assist beam even if


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


301



C.Fn-6 Shutter/AE lock button

0: AF/AE lock

1: AE lock/AF

This is convenient when you want to focus and meter separately. Press the <A> button to autofocus, and press the shutter button halfway to apply AE lock.

2: AF/AF lock, no AE lock

In the AI Servo AF operation, you can press the <A> button to stop the AF operation momentarily. This prevents the AF from being thrown off by any obstacle passing between the camera and subject. The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.

3: AE/AF, no AE lock

This is useful for subjects which keep moving and stopping repeatedly. During AI Servo AF, you can press the <A> button to start or stop the AI Servo AF operation. The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken. Thus, the optimum focusing and exposure will always be achieved as you wait for the decisive moment.

During Live View shooting or movie shooting

� With setting 1 or 3, press the <A> button for One-Shot AF. Also, using

the touch shutter will take a picture without autofocusing.

� With setting 2, press the shutter button halfway for One-Shot AF.



A

www.devic

eman

uals.

euA> button to stop the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button to stop the

AF operation momentarily. This prevents the AF from bein

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAF operation momentarily. This prevents the AF from beinany obstacle passing between the camera and subject. T

www.devic

eman

uals.

euany obstacle passing between the camera and subject. T

This is useful for subjects which keep moving and stopp

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThis is useful for subjects which keep moving and stoppDuring AI Servo AF, you can press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

During AI Servo AF, you can press the <A

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AServo AF operation. The exposure is set at the moment the p

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Servo AF operation. The exposure is set at the moment the ptaken. Thus, the optimum focusing and exposure will alwa

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

taken. Thus, the optimum focusing and exposure will alwaachieved as you wait for the decisive moment.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

achieved as you wait for the decisive moment.



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


� With setting 1 or 3, press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� With setting 1 or 3, press the <

the touch shutter will take a picture without autofocusin

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the touch shutter will take a picture without autofocusin

� With setting 2, press the shutter button halfway for One-Sho

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� With setting 2, press the shutter button halfway for One-Sho

302

C.Fn-7 Assign SET button

You can assign a frequently-used function to <0>. Press <0> when the camera is ready to shoot.

0: Normal (disabled)

1: Image quality

Press <0> to display the image-recording quality setting screen on the LCD monitor. Select the desired image-recording quality, then press <0>.

2: Flash exposure compensation

When you press <0>, the flash exposure compensation setting screen will appear. Set the flash exposure compensation, then press <0>.

3: LCD monitor On/Off

Assigns the same function as the button.

4: Menu display

Press <0> to display the menu screen.

5: ISO speed

The ISO speed setting screen will appear. Press the key or turn the <6> dial to change the ISO speed. You can also refer to the viewfinder to set the ISO speed.

C.Fn-8 LCD display when power ON

0: Display on

When the power switch is turned on, the shooting settings will be displayed (p.50).

1: Previous display status

If you pressed the button and turned off the camera while the LCD monitor was off, the shooting settings will not be displayed when you turn on the camera again. This helps to save battery power. The menu screens and image playback will still be displayed when used.If you pressed the button to display the shooting settings and then turn off the camera, the shooting settings will be displayed when you turn on the camera again.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


>, the flash exposure compensation setting screen

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu>, the flash exposure compensation setting screen

will appear. Set the flash exposure compensation, then pr

www.devic

eman

uals.

euwill appear. Set the flash exposure compensation, then pr

> button.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button.

The ISO speed setting screen will appear. Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The ISO speed setting screen will appear. Press the <> dial to change the ISO speed. You can also refer to the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> dial to change the ISO speed. You can also refer to theviewfinder to set the ISO speed.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

viewfinder to set the ISO speed.



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



When the power switch is turned on, the shooting setti

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When the power switch is turned on, the shooting settidisplayed (p.50).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

displayed (p.50).

1: Previous display statuswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

1: Previous display status

If you pressed the <www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

If you pressed the <

303

Under the My Menu tab, you can register up to six menu options and

Custom Functions whose settings you change frequently.

1 Select [My Menu settings].

Under the [9] tab, select [My Menu


2 Select [Register to My Menu].

Select [Register to My Menu], then

press <0>.

3 Register the desired items.

Select an item to register, then press

<0>.


[OK] and press <0> to register the

item.

You can register up to six items.

To return to the screen in step 2,

press the <M> button.

Sort

You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select

[Sort] and select the item whose order you want to change. Then

press <0>. With [z] displayed, press the <V> key to change the

order, then press <0>.

Delete item/items and Delete all items

You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete item/items]

deletes one item at a time, and [Delete all items] deletes all

registered items.

Display from My Menu

When [Enable] is set, the [9] tab will be displayed first when you

display the menu screen.

3 Registering My MenuN

About My Menu Settings

www.devicemanuals.euRegister the desired items.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euRegister the desired items.

Select an item to register, then press

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect an item to register, then press

>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu>.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


[

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[OK

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

OK] and press <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] and press <

item.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

item.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

305

13Reference

This chapter provides reference information for camera features, system accessories, etc.

Certification Logo

If you select [54: Certification Logo Display] and press <0>,

some of the logos of the camera’s certifications will appear. Other

certification logos can be found in this Instruction Manual, on the

camera body, or on the camera’s package.


www.devicemanuals.euReference

www.devic

eman

uals.

euReference

This chapter provides reference information for camera

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

This chapter provides reference information for camera features, system accessories, etc.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

features, system accessories, etc.

306

With AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8 (sold separately), you can connect the

camera to a household power outlet and not worry about the remaining

battery level.

1 Connect the power cord.

Connect the power cord as shown in

the illustration.

After using the camera, unplug the

power plug from the power outlet.

2 Connect the DC Coupler.

Connect the DC cord’s plug to the DC

Coupler.

3 Insert the DC Coupler.

Open the cover and insert the DC

Coupler until it locks in place.

4 Push in the DC cord.

Open the DC cord hole cover and

install the cord as shown.

Close the cover.

Using a Household Power Outlet

Do not connect or disconnect the power cord while the camera’s power

switch is set to <1>.


Connect the DC Coupler.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euConnect the DC Coupler.

Connect the DC cord’s plug to the DC

www.devic

eman

uals.

euConnect the DC cord’s plug to the DC

Insert the DC Coupler.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Insert the DC Coupler.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


4www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

4www.devicemanuals.eu

307

This remote controller enables you to take pictures wirelessly up to

approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet from the camera. You can either shoot

immediately or use a 2-sec. delay.

Set the self-timer to <Q> (p.106).

Point the remote controller toward the camera’s remote control

sensor and press the transmit button.

The camera will autofocus.

When focus is achieved, the self-timer lamp will light up and the

picture will be taken.

Remote Control Shooting

Remote Controller RC-6 (Sold Separately)

Remote control sensor

Fluorescent or LED lighting may cause camera misoperation by triggering

the shutter inadvertently. Try to keep the camera away from such light

sources.

Remote Controller RC-1/RC-5 (sold separately) can also be used.

Remote control shooting is also possible with an EX-series Speedlite

equipped with a remote-release function.

The Remote Controller can also be used during movie shooting (p.173).

Note that still photo shooting in the movie shooting mode is not possible

with the Remote Controller RC-5.



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


When focus is achieved, the self-timer lamp will light up a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When focus is achieved, the self-timer lamp will light up a

Remote Control Shooting

308

Remote Switch RS-60E3 (sold separately) comes with an approx.

60 cm/2.0 ft cord. When connected to the camera’s remote control

terminal, it can be pressed halfway and completely, just like the shutter

button.

When you use the self-timer, bulb, or Remote Switch and do not look

through the viewfinder, stray light entering the viewfinder can cause the

image to look dark. To prevent this, use the eyepiece cover (p.27)

attached to the camera strap.

During Live View shooting and movie shooting, attaching the eyepiece

cover is unnecessary.

1 Remove the eyecup.

Push the bottom of the eyecup to

remove.

2 Attach the eyepiece cover.

Slide the eyepiece cover down into

the eyepiece groove to attach it.

After taking the picture, detach the

eyepiece cover and attach the

eyecup by sliding it down the

eyepiece groove.

F Remote Switch RS-60E3 (Sold Separately)

Using the Eyepiece Cover


When you use the self-timer, bulb, or Remote Switch and do n

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When you use the self-timer, bulb, or Remote Switch and do n

through the viewfinder, stray light entering the viewfin

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

through the viewfinder, stray light entering the viewfin

image to look dark. To prevent th

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

image to look dark. To prevent this, use the eyepiece cover (p.27)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

is, use the eyepiece cover (p.27)


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


During Live View shooting and movi

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

During Live View shooting and movi
























309

Basically operates like a built-in flash for easy operation.

When an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) is attached to the

camera, almost all the autoflash control is done by the camera. In other

words, it is like a high-output flash attached externally in place of the

built-in flash.

For detailed instructions, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s

instruction manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all

the features of EX-series Speedlites.

External Speedlites

EOS-dedicated, EX-series Speedlites

Shoe-mount Speedlites Macro Lites

With an EX-series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settings

(p.220), only [Flash exposure compensation] can be set for [External

flash func. setting]. (With certain EX-series Speedlites, [Shutter

synchronization] is also settable.)

If flash exposure compensation is set with the external Speedlite, the

flash exposure compensation icon displayed on the camera’s LCD

monitor will change from y to 0.

If the Speedlite’s Custom Function has the flash metering mode set to

TTL autoflash, the flash will fire at full output only.





www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


External Speedlites

310

With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set in TTL or A-TTL

autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only.

Set the camera’s shooting mode to <a> (manual exposure) or

<f> (aperture-priority AE) and adjust the aperture setting before

shooting.

When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode, shoot in the

manual flash mode.

Sync Speed

The camera can synchronize with compact, non-Canon flash units at

1/200 sec. or slower shutter speeds. Use a sync speed slower than

1/200 sec.

Be sure to test the flash unit beforehand to make sure it synchronizes

properly with the camera.

Cautions for Live View shooting

A non-Canon flash will not fire during Live View shooting.

Canon Speedlites Other Than the EX-series

Using Non-Canon Flash Units

If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to

another camera brand, the camera may not operate properly and

malfunction may result.

Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit on the camera’s hot shoe. It may

not fire.


compact, non-Canon flash units at

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu compact, non-Canon flash units at

peeds. Use a sync speed slower than

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

peeds. Use a sync speed slower than

Be sure to test the flash unit beforehand to make sure it

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Be sure to test the flash unit beforehand to make sure it


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


A non-Canon flash will not fire during Live View shooting

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

A non-Canon flash will not fire during Live View shooting

311

With a commercially-available Eye-Fi card already set up, you can

automatically transfer captured images to a personal computer or

upload them to an online service via a wireless LAN.

The image transfer is a function of the Eye-Fi card. For instructions on

how to set up and use the Eye-Fi card or to troubleshoot any image

transfer problems, refer to the Eye-Fi card’s instruction manual or

contact the card’s manufacturer.

The camera is not guaranteed to support Eye-Fi card functions

(including wireless transfer). In case of an issue with an Eye-Fi

card, please check with the card manufacturer. Also note that

approval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in many countries or

regions. Without approval, use of the card is not permitted. If it

is unclear whether the card has been approved for use in your

area, please check with the card manufacturer.

1 Insert an Eye-Fi card (p.31).

2 Select [Eye-Fi settings].

Under the [51] tab, select [Eye-Fi


This menu is displayed only when an

Eye-Fi card is inserted into the

camera.

3 Enable Eye-Fi transmission.

Press <0>, set [Eye-Fi trans.] to

[Enable], then press <0>.

If you set [Disable], automatic

transmission will not occur even with

the Eye-Fi card inserted

(transmission status icon I).

4 Display the connection

information.

Select [Connection info.], then press

<0>.

Using Eye-Fi Cards

www.devic

eman

uals.

euapproval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in many cou

www.devic

eman

uals.

euapproval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in many cou

regions. Without approval, use of the card is not pe

www.devic

eman

uals.

euregions. Without approval, use of the card is not pe

is unclear whether the card has been approved for u

www.devic

eman

uals.

euis unclear whether the card has been approved for u



area, please check with the card manufacturer.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euarea, please check with the card manufacturer.

Insert an Eye-Fi card

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Insert an Eye-Fi card

2

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

2 Select [Eye-Fi settings].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Select [Eye-Fi settings].

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Using Eye-Fi Cards

312

5 Check the [Access point SSID:].

Check that an access point is

displayed for [Access point SSID:].

You can also check the Eye-Fi card’s

MAC address and firmware version.

Press the <M> button three times

to exit the menu.

6 Take the picture.

The picture is transferred and the

<H> icon switches from gray (not

connected) to one of the icons below.

For transferred images, O is

displayed in the shooting information

display (p.270).

H(Gray) Not connected : No connection with access point.

H(Blinking) Connecting : Connection with access point.

H(Displayed) Connected : Connection to access point established.

H( ) Transferring : Image transfer to access point in progress.

Transmission status icon


The picture is transferred and the

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe picture is transferred and the

> icon switches from gray (not

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> icon switches from gray (not

connected) to one of the icons below.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euconnected) to one of the icons below.

For transferred images,

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFor transferred images,

displayed in the shooting information

www.devic

eman

uals.

eudisplayed in the shooting information

display (p.270).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

display (p.270).

: No connection with access point.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: No connection with access point.

: Connection with access point.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Connection with access point.

: Connection to access point established.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Connection to access point established.

:

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Image transfer to access point in progress.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Image transfer to access point in progress.

313

Using Eye-Fi Cards

Cautions for Using Eye-Fi Cards

If “J” is displayed, an error occurred while retrieving the card

information. Turn the camera’s power switch off and on again.

Even if [Eye-Fi trans.] is set to [Disable], it may still transmit a signal. In

hospitals, airports, and other places where wireless transmissions are

prohibited, remove the Eye-Fi card from the camera.

If the image transfer does not function, check the Eye-Fi card and

personal computer settings. For details, refer to the card’s instruction

manual.

Depending on the wireless LAN’s connection conditions, the image

transfer may take longer or it may be interrupted.

Because of the transmission function, the Eye-Fi card may become hot.

The battery power will be consumed faster.

During the image transfer, auto power off will not take effect.


www.devicemanuals.eu, the Eye-Fi card may become hot.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu, the Eye-Fi card may become hot.

During the image transfer, auto power off will not ta

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDuring the image transfer, auto power off will not ta

314

o: Set automatically k: User selectable : Not selectable/Disabled

*1: The z icon indicates still photo shooting in the movie shooting mode.

*2: 1+73 or 1 cannot be selected.*3: Settable only for manual exposures.*4: Set automatically in Basic Zone modes.*5: Settable only in Creative Zone modes.


Function

Basic Zone Creative Zone Movie

A 7 C 2 3 4 5 8d s f a k z*1

6 F GAll image quality settings selectable k k k k k k k k k*2 k*2 k k k k k

ISO speed

Automatically set/Auto ISO o o o o o o o o o o k k k k k

Manual k k k k k*3

Maximum for Auto k k k k

Picture Style

Automatic Selection/Auto o o o o o o o o o o k k k k k*4

Manual selection k k k k k*5

Ambience-based shots k k k k k k k

Light/scene-based shots k k k k

White balance

Auto o o o o o o o o o o k k k k k*4

Preset k k k k k*5

Custom k k k k k*5

Correction/Bracketing k k k k *6 k*5

Auto Lighting Optimizer o o o o o o o o o o k k k k k*5

Lens aberration correction

Peripheral illumination correction k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k

Chromatic aberration correction k k k k k k k k k k k k k k

Long exposure noise reduction k k k k

High ISO speed noise reduction o o o o o o o o o o k k k k

Highlight tone priority k k k k k*5

Color space

sRGB o o o o o o o o o o k k k k o k*5

Adobe RGB k k k k k*5

Focusing

One-Shot AF o o o o o o k k k k cod

f*7

AI Servo AF o k k k k

AI Focus AF o o o k k k k

AF point selection o o o o o o o o o o k k k k f*7

AF-assist beam o o o *8 o *8 o o o k k k k

www.devic

eman

uals.

euk k k k k

www.devic

eman

uals.

euk k k k k




o o o o o o o o o o k k k k k

www.devic

eman

uals.

euo o o o o o o o o o k k k k k











www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k

k k k k k k k k k k k k k k

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




o o o o o o o o o o k k k k

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

o o o o o o o o o o k k k k


Highlight tone priority www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Highlight tone priority www.devicemanuals.eu


o o o o o o o o o o k k k k o kwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

o o o o o o o o o o k k k k o kwww.devicemanuals.eu

























315


*6: White balance correction can be set.*7: Settable only for Live View shooting.

*8: If the AF method is <f> during Live View shooting, the external Speedlite will emit the AF-assist beam when necessary.

*9: With Auto ISO, you can set a fixed ISO speed.*10: Works only before the start of movie shooting.

Function

Basic Zone Creative Zone Movie

A 7 C 2 3 4 5 8d s f a k z*1

6 F G

Metering

mode

Evaluative metering o o o o o o o o o o k k k k

Metering mode selection k k k k

Exposure

Program shift kExposure

compensationk k k

k*5

Other than a

AEB k k k k

AE lock k k k *9 k*5

Depth-of-field preview k k k k

Drive

Single shooting k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k

Continuous shooting k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k*10

Q (10 sec.) k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k*10

l (2 sec.) k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k*10

q (Continuous) k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k*10

Built-in

flash

Automatic firing o k o o o

Manual firing k k k k k k

Flash off o k o o k o k k k k o

Red-eye reduction k k k k k k k k k k

FE lock k k k kFlash exposure

compensationk k k k

Wireless control k k k k

External

flash

Function settings k k k kCustom Function

settingsk k k k

Live View shooting k k k k k k k k k k k k k k

Aspect ratio*7 k k k k

Quick Control k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k

Feature guide k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k


www.devicemanuals.euk k k k

www.devic

eman

uals.

euk k k k


www.devic

eman

uals.

euk k k k k k k k k k k k k k


www.devic

eman

uals.



www.devic

eman

uals.



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



o

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

o



o k

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

o k


o

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

o


k k

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

k k




Flash exposure

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Flash exposure

compensation

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

compensation



Wireless controlwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Wireless controlwww.devicemanuals.eu


Function settingswww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Function settingswww.devicemanuals.eu

316

System Map

Eyecup Ef

Rubber Frame Ef

Eyepiece Extender EP-EX15ll

Angle Finder C

E-series Dioptric Adjustment Lenses

Wide Strap EW-100DB IV

270EX II ST-E2 ST-E3-RT 430EX II 320EX 600EX-RT/ 600EX

Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX

Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX

Hand Strap E2

Battery Pack LP-E8

Battery Grip BG-E8

Battery Charger LC-E8 or LC-E8E

Compact Power Adapter

CA-PS700 Battery Magazine BGM-E8A for

size-AA/LR6 batteries

Battery Magazine BGM-E8L for two

LP-E8 battery packs

DC Coupler DR-E8

Bundled Accessories

AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8

90EX































317

System Map

EF-S lenses EF lenses

Remote Switch RS-60E3

Remote Controller

RC-6

External microphone

HDMI Cable HTC-100 (2.9 m/9.5 ft.)

TV/Video

PictBridge-compatible printer

Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST (1.3 m/4.3 ft.)

Interface Cable (1.3 m/4.3 ft.)

Interface Cable IFC-200U/500U (1.9 m/6.2 ft.) / (4.7 m/15.4 ft.)

Card reader SD/SDHC/SDXC

memory card

Card slot

USB port Windows 8 Windows 7 Windows Vista Windows XP Mac OS X

Computer

GPS Receiver GP-E2

* All cable lengths given are approximate figures.

Semi Hard Case EH22-L/EH24-L

EOS Solution Disk





HDMI Cable

www.devic

eman

uals.

euHDMI Cable

HTC-100 (2.9 m/9.5 ft.)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

HTC-100 (2.9 m/9.5 ft.)

Interface Cable www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Interface Cable (1.3 m/4.3 ft.) www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

(1.3 m/4.3 ft.) www.devicemanuals.eu





















318

Shooting 1 (Red) Page

* Not selectable if the <F> or <G> shooting mode, Multi Shot Noise Reduction,

or a Creative filter is set.

Shooting 2 (Red)

3 Menu Settings

For Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting

Image quality73 / 83 / 74 / 84 / 7a / 8a / b / c /

1+73* / 1*88

Beep Enable / Touch to / Disable 204

Release shutter without card

Enable / Disable 204

Image review Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold 204

Lens aberration

correction

Peripheral illumination: Enable / Disable

Chromatic aberration: Enable / Disable129

Red-eye reduction Disable / Enable 108

Flash control

Flash firing / E-TTL II metering / Flash sync. speed in Av mode / Built-in flash settings / External flash function settings / External flash C.Fn settings / Clear settings

218

Exposure compensation/AEB

1/3-stop or 1/2-stop increments, ±5 stops (AEB:

±2 stops)121

Auto Lighting

Optimizer

Disable / Low / Standard / High125

Disable during manual exposure

Custom White Balance Manual setting of white balance 137

White balance shift/bracketing

WB correction: White balance correction

BKT setting: White balance bracketing

139

140

Color space sRGB / Adobe RGB 141

Picture Style

DAuto / PStandard / QPortrait /

RLandscape / SNeutral / UFaithful /

VMonochrome / WUser Def. 1-3

95

132

135

Metering modeq Evaluative metering / w Partial metering / r Spot metering / e Center-weighted average metering

117

Shaded menu options are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.


> shooting mode, Multi Shot Noise Reduction,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> shooting mode, Multi Shot Noise Reduction,



www.devic

eman

uals.

euPeripheral illumination: Enable / Disable

Chromatic aberration: Enable / Disable

www.devic

eman

uals.

euChromatic aberration: Enable / Disable



metering / Flash sync.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eumetering / Flash sync.

speed in Av mode / Built-in flash settings /

www.devic

eman

uals.

euspeed in Av mode / Built-in flash settings / External flash function

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

External flash function settings / External flash

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

settings / External flash C.Fn settings / Clear settings

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

C.Fn settings / Clear settings



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


±2 stops)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

±2 stops)



Disable / Low / Standard / High

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



Disable during manual exposurewww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Disable during manual exposurewww.devicemanuals.eu

Custom White Balancewww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Custom White Balancewww.devicemanuals.eu

319

3 Menu Settings


A Live View Shooting (Red)

Playback 1 (Blue)

Dust Delete Data Obtains data to be used to erase dust spots 224

ISO AutoMax.: 400 / Max.: 800 / Max.: 1600 /

Max.: 3200 / Max.: 640094

Long exposure noise reduction

Disable / Auto / Enable 127

High ISO speed noise reduction

Disable / Low / Standard / High /

Multi Shot Noise Reduction126

Live View shooting Enable / Disable 147

AF methodu+Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi /

FlexiZone - Single / Quick mode159

Continuous AF Enable / Disable 156

Touch Shutter Disable / Enable 168

Grid display Off / Grid 1l / Grid 2m 156

Aspect ratio 3:2 / 4:3 / 16:9 / 1:1 157

Metering timer4 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 10 min. /

30 min.158

Protect images

Select images / All images in folder / Unprotect

all images in folder / All images on card /

Unprotect all images on card

266

Rotate image Rotate vertical images 247

Erase imagesSelect and erase images / All images in folder /

All images on card268

Print order Specify images to be printed (DPOF) 289

Photobook Set-upSelect images / All images in folder / Clear all in

folder / All images on card / Clear all on card293

Creative filters

Grainy B/W / Soft focus / Fish-eye effect /

Art bold effect / Water painting effect /

Toy camera effect / Miniature effect

274

Resize Downsize the image’s pixel count 277


(Blue)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(Blue)


www.devicemanuals.eu+Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi /

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu+Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi /

FlexiZone - Single / Quick mode

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFlexiZone - Single / Quick mode




l

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

l / Grid 2

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

/ Grid 2


3:2 / 4:3 / 16:9 / 1:1

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3:2 / 4:3 / 16:9 / 1:1


4 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 10 min. /

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

4 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 10 min. /

30 min.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

30 min.



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu












3 Menu Settings

320

Playback 2 (Blue) Page

Set-up 1 (Yellow)

* Displayed only when an Eye-Fi card is used.

Set-up 2 (Yellow)

* The daylight saving time setting is linked to [Time zone] and [Date/time].

Histogram display Brightness / RGB 272

Image jump w/61 image / 10 images / 100 images / Date /

Folder / Movies / Stills / Rating243

Slide showPlayback description / Display time / Repeat /

Transition effect / Background music258

Rating [OFF] / l / m / n / o / p 248

Control over HDMI Disable / Enable 263

Select folder Create and select a folder 206

File numbering Continuous / Auto reset / Manual reset 208

Auto rotate OnzD / OnD / Off 212

Format card Initialize and erase data on the card 48

Eye-Fi settings*Eye-Fi transmission: Disable / Enable

Connection information311

Auto power off30 sec. / 1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. /

15 min. / Disable205

LCD brightness Seven brightness levels provided 205

LCD auto off Enable / Disable 217

Time zone Daylight saving time* / Time zone 36

Date/TimeDate (year, month, day) / Time (hour, min.,

sec.) / Daylight saving time*36

LanguageK Select the interface language 38

Video system NTSC / PAL 265



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devicemanuals.euContinuous / Auto reset / Manual reset

www.devic

eman

uals.

euContinuous / Auto reset / Manual reset



Initialize and erase data on the card

www.devic

eman

uals.

euInitialize and erase data on the card


Eye-Fi transmission: Disable / Enable

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Eye-Fi transmission: Disable / Enable

Connection information

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Connection information


30 sec. / 1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. /

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

30 sec. / 1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. /

15 min. / Disable

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

15 min. / Disable


Seven brightness levels provided

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Seven brightness levels provided


Enable / Disable

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Enable / Disable












321

3 Menu Settings

Set-up 3 (Yellow) Page

Set-up 4 (Yellow)

* During firmware updates, the touch screen will be disabled to prevent accidental

operations.

9 My Menu (Green)

Screen color Select the shooting settings screen color 217

Feature guide Enable / Disable 52

Touch control Enable / Disable 55

Sensor cleaning

Auto cleaning: Enable / Disable223

Clean now

Clean manually 226

GPS device settingsSettings available when the GPS Receiver GP-

E2 (sold separately) is attached–

Certification Logo Display

Displays some of the logos of the camera’s

certifications305

Custom Functions (C.Fn)

Customize camera functions as desired 296

Copyright information

Display copyright information /

Enter author’s name / Enter copyright details /

Delete copyright information

210

Clear settingsClear all camera settings /

Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)214

zFirmware Ver.* For updating the firmware –

My Menu settingsRegister frequently-used menu options and Custom Functions

303

When using a GPS device, be sure to check the countries and areas of use,

and use the device in accordance with the laws and regulations of the

country or region.


* During firmware updates, the touch screen will be disab

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

* During firmware updates, the touch screen will be disab

(Green)www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(Green)www.devicemanuals.euDisplays some of the logos of the camera’s

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDisplays some of the logos of the camera’s


Customize camera functions as desired

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCustomize camera functions as desired



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



Clear all camera settings /

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Clear all camera settings /

Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)



For updating the firmware

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For updating the firmware








3 Menu Settings

322


Shooting 2 (Red)

Shooting 3 (Red)

k For Movie Shooting

Image quality73 / 83 / 74 / 84 / 7a / 8a / b / c /

1+73 / 188

Beep Enable / Touch to / Disable 204

Release shutter without card

Enable / Disable 204

Image review Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold 204

Lens aberration

correctionPeripheral illumination: Enable / Disable 129


1/3-stop or 1/2-stop increments, ±5 stops 121

Auto Lighting

Optimizer

Disable / Low / Standard / High125



Manual setting of white balance 137

White balance shift/bracketing



139

140

Color space sRGB / Adobe RGB 141

Picture Style

DAuto / PStandard / QPortrait /

RLandscape / SNeutral / UFaithful /

VMonochrome / WUser Def. 1-3

95

132

135

Dust Delete Data Obtains data to be used to erase dust spots 224

Shaded menu options are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.

The menu tabs and options displayed will differ between viewfinder

shooting/Live View shooting and movie shooting. Note that the menu

tabs and options displayed in [x1] Playback 1, [x2] Playback 2, [51]

Set-up 1 to [54] Set-up 4 and [9] My Menu are the same as those

displayed in viewfinder shooting/Live View shooting (p.319 - 321).

The [Z1] and [Z2] Menu tabs will appear only for movie shooting.




www.devic

eman

uals.

euPeripheral illumination: Enable / Disable


1/3-stop or 1/2-stop increments, ±5 stops

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu1/3-stop or 1/2-stop increments, ±5 stops



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



Manual setting of white balance

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Manual setting of white balance



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




sRGB / Adobe RGB

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

sRGB / Adobe RGB



D

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

D

Rwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Rwww.devicemanuals.eu









323

3 Menu Settings

Movie 1 (Red) Page

Movie 2 (Red)

* In Basic Zone modes, [Sound recording] will be set to [On] or [Off].

AF methodu+Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi /

FlexiZone - Single196

Movie Servo AF Enable / Disable 196

AF with shutter button during k

ONE SHOT / Disable 197

Grid display Off / Grid 1l / Grid 2m 198

Metering timer4 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 10 min. /

30 min.198

Movie recording size1920x1080 (6/5/4) / 1280x720 (8/7) /

640x480 (6/5)185

Sound recording*

Sound recording: Auto / Manual / Disable

198Recording level

Wind filter/Attenuator: Disable / Enable

Video snapshot

Video snapshot: Enable / Disable

187Album settings: Create a new album / Add to

existing album


Sound recording

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Sound recording

www.devicemanuals.eu) / 1280x720 (

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu) / 1280x720 (


Sound recording: Auto / Manual / Disable

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSound recording: Auto / Manual / Disable




www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



Album settings: Create a new album / Add to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Album settings: Create a new album / Add to

existing album

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

existing album








324

If a problem occurs with the camera, first refer to this Troubleshooting

Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem,

contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.

Do not recharge any battery pack other than a genuine Canon Battery

Pack LP-E8.

If there is a problem with the battery charger, the protective circuit will

stop the charging operation and the charge lamp will blink in orange. If

this happens, disconnect the charger’s power plug from the power

outlet and remove the battery pack. Attach the battery pack to the

charger again and wait a while before connecting the charger to a

power outlet again.

Make sure the battery is properly installed in the camera (p.30).

Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed (p.30).

Make sure the card slot cover is closed (p.31).

Recharge the battery (p.28).

Press the button (p.50).

If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card,

the access lamp will remain on/continue to blink for a few seconds.

When the image recording is completed, the power will turn off

automatically.

Troubleshooting Guide

Power-Related Problems

The battery pack does not recharge.

The battery charger’s lamp blinks.

The camera does not operate even when the power switch

is set to <1>.

The access lamp still blinks even when the power switch is

set to <2>.

www.devicemanuals.euIf there is a problem with the battery charger, the p

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf there is a problem with the battery charger, the protective circuit will

www.devic

eman

uals.

eurotective circuit will

stop the charging operation and the charge lamp will b

www.devic

eman

uals.

eustop the charging operation and the charge lamp will b

this happens, disconnect the charger’s power plug from th

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthis happens, disconnect the charger’s power plug from th

outlet and remove the battery pack. Attach the battery p

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

outlet and remove the battery pack. Attach the battery p

charger again and wait a while before connecting the ch

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

charger again and wait a while before connecting the ch

Make sure the battery is properly installed in the camera

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Make sure the battery is properly installed in the camera

Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed

Make sure the card slot cover is closed www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Make sure the card slot cover is closed www.devicemanuals.eu

The camera does not operate e

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The camera does not operate e

325


Use a fully-charged battery pack (p.28).

The rechargeable battery pack performance will degrade over

repeated use. Purchase a new one.

The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following

operations:

� Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.

� Often activating only the AF without taking a picture.

� Using the lens Image Stabilizer.

� Using the LCD monitor often.

� Continuing Live View shooting or movie shooting for a prolonged

period.

Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power off to take

effect, set [52: Auto power off] to [Disable] (p.205).

Even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the LCD monitor will

still turn off after the camera is left idle for 30 min. (The camera’s

power does not turn off.) Press the button to turn on the LCD

monitor.

The battery becomes exhausted quickly.

The camera turns off by itself.


� Continuing Live View shooting or movie shooting for a p

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu� Continuing Live View shooting or movie shooting for a p

Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto p

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto p

2: Auto power off

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

2: Auto power off] to [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] to [2: Auto power off] to [2: Auto power off

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

2: Auto power off] to [2: Auto power off

2: Auto power off

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

2: Auto power off

still turn off after the camera is left idle for 30 min

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

still turn off after the camera is left idle for 30 min

power does not turn off.) Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

power does not turn off.) Press the <

326

Make sure the card is properly inserted (p.31).

Slide the card’s write-protect switch to the Write/Erase position (p.31).

If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images

to make room (p.31, 268).

If you try to focus in the One-Shot AF operation while the focus

confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder blinks, a picture cannot be

taken. Press the shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically,

or focus manually (p.43, 103).

If a card error message is displayed, see page 32 or 337.

Set the lens focus mode switch to <AF> (p.39).

To prevent camera shake, press the shutter button gently (p.42, 43).

If the lens has an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <1>.

In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter

speed (p.110), set a higher ISO speed (p.92), use flash (p.107), or use

a tripod.

Shooting-Related Problems

No images can be shot or recorded.

The card cannot be used.

The image is out of focus.


> in the viewfinder blinks, a picture cannot be

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> in the viewfinder blinks, a picture cannot be

taken. Press the shutter button halfway again to refocu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eutaken. Press the shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eus automatically,


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Set the lens focus mode switch to <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the lens focus mode switch to <

To prevent camera shake, press the shutter button gentl

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

To prevent camera shake, press the shutter button gentl

If the lens has an Image Stabilizer, set the IS swi

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the lens has an Image Stabilizer, set the IS swi

In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a f

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a f

speed (p.110), set a higher ISO speed (p.92), use flaswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

speed (p.110), set a higher ISO speed (p.92), use flaswww.devicemanuals.eu

327


Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF. Focus lock is not possible in the

AI Servo AF and AI Focus AF operations (p.98).

Depending on the shooting conditions, it may take longer to focus the

subject. Use FlexiZone - Single instead or focus manually.

Depending on the lens type, shutter speed, aperture, subject

conditions, brightness, etc., the continuous shooting speed may

become slower.

With ISO 12800 or “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600), the maximum burst

for continuous shooting will greatly decrease (p.93).

Set [z3: High ISO speed NR] to [Standard], [Low] or [Disable]. If it

is set to [High] or [Multi Shot Noise Reduction], the maximum burst

during continuous shooting will greatly decrease (p.126).

With [Chromatic aberration: Enable], the maximum burst for

continuous shooting will greatly decrease (p.130).

During WB bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will

decrease (p.140).

If you shoot something that has fine detail (such as a field of grass),

the file size will be larger and the actual maximum burst may be lower

than the number mentioned on page 89.

I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.

With FlexiZone - Multi, it takes longer to autofocus.

The continuous shooting speed is slow.

The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.

www.devicemanuals.euDepending on the lens type, shutter speed, aperture, subje

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDepending on the lens type, shutter speed, aperture, subje

conditions, brightness, etc., the continuous shooting sp

www.devic

eman

uals.

euconditions, brightness, etc., the continuous shooting sp

” (equivalent to ISO 25600), the maximum burst

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

” (equivalent to ISO 25600), the maximum burst


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


3: High ISO speed NR

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3: High ISO speed NR

] or [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] or [Multi Shot Noise Reduction

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Multi Shot Noise Reduction

during continuous shooting will greatly decrease (p.12

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

during continuous shooting will greatly decrease (p.12

Chromatic aberration: Enable

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Chromatic aberration: Enable

continuous shooting will greatly decrease (p.130). www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

continuous shooting will greatly decrease (p.130).

During WB bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shoowww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

During WB bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shoowww.devicemanuals.eu

The maximum burst during continuous shooting is low

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The maximum burst during continuous shooting is low

328

Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone priority]

is set to [1: Enable], ISO 100 cannot be set. If [0: Disable] is set, ISO

100 can be set (p.299). This also applies to movie shooting (p.178).


is set to [1: Enable], the [H] ISO speed (25600) cannot be selected

even when [2: ISO expansion] is set to [1: On]. If [0: Disable] is set

for [3: Highlight tone priority], [H] can be set (p.298).


is set to [1: Enable], the Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set. If [0:

Disable] is set, the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set (p.299).

Set [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable]. When [Standard],

[Low] or [High] is set, even if you set a decreased exposure

compensation or flash exposure compensation, the image may come

out bright (p.125).

If you shoot at night when the background is dark, the shutter speed

becomes slow automatically (slow-sync shooting) so that both the

subject and background are properly exposed. To prevent a slow

shutter speed, under [z1: Flash control], set [Flash sync. speed in

Av mode] to [1/200-1/60 sec. auto] or [1/200 sec. (fixed)] (p.219).

ISO 100 cannot be set.

ISO speed [H] (ISO 25600) cannot be set.

The Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set.

Even though I set a decreased exposure compensation,

the image comes out bright.

When I use the <f> mode with flash, the shutter speed

becomes slow.


]. If [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu]. If [0: Disable

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu0: Disable

] can be set (p.298).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] can be set (p.298).


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

4: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

], if [3: Highlight tone priority

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

3: Highlight tone priority

], the Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set. If [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

], the Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set. If [

] is set, the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set (p.299).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] is set, the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set (p.299).

2: Auto Lighting Optimizer

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

2: Auto Lighting Optimizer

High

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

High] is set, even if you set a decreased exposure

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] is set, even if you set a decreased exposure

compensation or flash exposure compensation, the image mawww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

compensation or flash exposure compensation, the image ma

out bright (p.125).www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

out bright (p.125).www.devicemanuals.eu

The Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set.


Even though I set a decrea

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Even though I set a decreased exposure compensation,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

sed exposure compensation,


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

329


In the A, C, 2, 4, 6, and G modes, the built-in flash will be

raised automatically when flash is necessary.

If you shoot continuously with the built-in flash at short intervals, the

flash may stop operating to protect the flash unit.

If you use a flash unit other than an EX-series Speedlite, the flash will

always be fired at full output (p.310).

Under [z1: Flash control] and [External flash C.Fn setting], if

[Flash metering mode] is set to [TTL], the flash will always fire at full

output (p.220).

If flash exposure compensation has been set on an external Speedlite,

[Flash exposure compensation] (p.221) cannot be set in the

[External flash func. setting] screen. Also, if you set flash exposure

compensation with the camera and then set flash exposure

compensation with the external Speedlite, the Speedlite’s flash

exposure compensation setting will be given priority. When the

Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation is canceled (set to 0), [Flash

exposure compensation] can be set with the camera.

The built-in flash is raised by itself.

The built-in flash does not fire.

The flash always fires at full output.

I cannot set flash exposure compensation with external

flash function setting.

www.devicemanuals.euIf you use a flash unit other than an EX-series Speedli

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf you use a flash unit other than an EX-series Speedli

External flash C.Fn setting

www.devic

eman

uals.

euExternal flash C.Fn setting

] is set to [

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] is set to [TTL

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

TTL], the flash will always fire at full

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

], the flash will always fire at full

If flash exposure compensation has been set on an extern

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If flash exposure compensation has been set on an extern


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


compensation with the camera and then set flash exposure www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

compensation with the camera and then set flash exposure

compensation with the external Speedlite, the Speedliwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

compensation with the external Speedlite, the Speedliwww.devicemanuals.eu

I cannot set flash exposure

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

I cannot set flash exposure compensation with external

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

compensation with external


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


330

Under [z1: Flash control], set [Flash sync. speed in Av mode] to

[Auto] (p.219).

The built-in flash’s pop-up mechanism moves slightly. This is normal.

If you use flash, the shutter will make two sounds each time you shoot

(p.147).

It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the white

<s> icon is displayed, the still photo’s image quality may deteriorate.

If the red <E> icon is displayed, it indicates that the Live View or

movie shooting will soon stop automatically (p.171, 200).

If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop

automatically. Use an SD Speed Class 6 “ ” or faster card. To

find out the card’s read/write speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s

Web site, etc.

If the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting

will stop automatically.

High-speed sync cannot be set in the <f> mode.

The camera makes a noise when it is shaken.

The shutter makes two shooting sounds during Live View

shooting.

During Live View and movie shooting, a white <s> or

red <E> icon is displayed.

Movie shooting stops by itself.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf you use flash, the shutter will make two sounds ea

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf you use flash, the shutter will make two sounds each time you shoot

www.devic

eman

uals.

euch time you shoot

It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is hi

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is hi

> icon is displayed, the still photo’s image quality may d

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> icon is displayed, the still photo’s image quality may d

> icon is displayed, it indicates that the Live View o

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> icon is displayed, it indicates that the Live View o

movie shooting will soon stop automatically (p.171, 200)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

movie shooting will soon stop automatically (p.171, 200)

If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop www.devicemanuals.eu


During Live View and movie shooting, a white <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

During Live View and movie shooting, a white <



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

331


In shooting modes other than <a>, the ISO speed is set

automatically. In the <a> mode, you can freely set the ISO speed

(p.178).

If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting, the

changes in the exposure may be recorded.

Zooming the lens during movie shooting can cause changes in the

exposure regardless of whether the lens’ maximum aperture changes

or not. Changes in the exposure may be recorded as a result.

If you move the camera to the left or right quickly (high-speed panning)

or shoot a moving subject, the image may look distorted.

Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be

caused by fluorescent light, LED bulbs, or other light sources during

movie shooting. Also, changes in the exposure (brightness) or color

tone may also be recorded. In the <a> mode, a slow shutter speed

may solve the problem.

The ISO speed cannot be set for movie shooting.

The exposure changes during movie shooting.

The subject looks distorted during movie shooting.

The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear during movie

shooting.


Zooming the lens during movie shooting can cause changes in

www.devic

eman

uals.

euZooming the lens during movie shooting can cause changes in

exposure regardless of whether the lens’ maximum aperture

www.devic

eman

uals.

euexposure regardless of whether the lens’ maximum aperture

or not. Changes in the exposure may be recorded as a

www.devic

eman

uals.

euor not. Changes in the exposure may be recorded as a

If you move the camera to the left or right quickly (hig

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If you move the camera to the left or right quickly (hig


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures

caused by fluorescent light, LED bulbs, or other light

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

caused by fluorescent light, LED bulbs, or other light

movie shooting. Also, changes in the exposure (brightnewww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

movie shooting. Also, changes in the exposure (brightne

tone may also be recorded. In the <www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

tone may also be recorded. In the <www.devicemanuals.eu

d during movie shooting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eud during movie shooting.


The image flickers or horizontal

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The image flickers or horizontal


332

Check if your finger is covering the speaker (p.21).

Check if [Enable] is set with [53: Touch control] (p.55).

In Basic Zone modes and in movie shooting mode, certain tabs and

menu options are not displayed. Set the shooting mode to a Creative

Zone mode (p.46).

Set the color space to sRGB. If Adobe RGB is set, the first character

will be an underscore (p.141).

It is a movie file (p.209).

If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may

not start from 0001 (p.208).

Operation Problems

During touch screen operations, the beeper suddenly

sounds softer.

Touch screen operation is not possible.

Display Problems

The menu screen shows few tabs and options.

The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_”).

The file name starts with “MVI_”.

The file numbering does not start from 0001.


] (p.55).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu] (p.55).

In Basic Zone modes and in movie shooting mode, certain

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

In Basic Zone modes and in movie shooting mode, certain

menu options are not displayed. Set the shooting mode

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

menu options are not displayed. Set the shooting mode

Set the color space to sRGB. If Adobe RGB is set, the firs

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Set the color space to sRGB. If Adobe RGB is set, the firs


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




The menu screen shows few tabs and options.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe menu screen shows few tabs and options.



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



The file name starts with “MVI_”.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The file name starts with “MVI_”.

333


Make sure the correct date and time has been set (p.36).

Check the time zone and daylight savings time (p.36).

The shooting date and time does not appear in the picture. The date

and time is instead recorded in the image data as shooting

information. When printing, you can imprint the date and time in the

picture by using the date and time recorded in the shooting information

(p.285).

If the card has recorded a number of images greater than the camera

can display, [###] will be displayed (p.249).

If the LCD monitor is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.

In low or high temperatures, the LCD monitor display may seem slow

or may look black. It will return to normal at room temperature.

[Eye-Fi settings] will appear only when an Eye-Fi card is inserted in

the camera. If the Eye-Fi card has a write-protect switch set to the

LOCK position, you will not be able to check the card’s connection

status or disable Eye-Fi card transmission (p.311).

The shooting date and time displayed is incorrect.

The date and time is not in the picture.

[###] is displayed.

The LCD monitor does not display a clear image.

[Eye-Fi settings] does not appear.www.devicemanuals.eu

picture by using the date and time recorded in the shoo

www.devic

eman

uals.

eupicture by using the date and time recorded in the shoo

If the card has recorded a number of images greater than

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the card has recorded a number of images greater than

] will be displayed (p.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

] will be displayed (p.249

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

249

If the LCD monitor is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the LCD monitor is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it

In low or high temperatures, the LCD monitor display ma

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

In low or high temperatures, the LCD monitor display ma

or may look black. It will return to normal at room tempe

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

or may look black. It will return to normal at room tempe

Eye-Fi settingswww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Eye-Fi settingswww.devicemanuals.eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



[Eye-Fi settings] does not appear.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[Eye-Fi settings] does not appear.

334

It is the highlight alert (p.272). Overexposed highlight areas with a loss

of highlight detail will blink.

If the image is protected, it cannot be erased (p.266).

Movies edited with a personal computer using the provided

ImageBrowser EX (p.364) or other software cannot be played back

with the camera. However, video snapshot albums edited with EOS

Video Snapshot Task (p.195) can be played back on the camera.

If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie shooting, the

operation noise will also be recorded. Using an external microphone

(commercially available) is recommended (p.198).

During autoexposure movie shooting, if there is a drastic change in the

exposure level, the recording will stop momentarily until the brightness

stabilizes. If this happens, shoot with <a> shooting mode (p.177).

Make sure the stereo AV cable or HDMI cable’s plug is inserted all the

way in (p.262, 265).

Set the video OUT system (NTSC/PAL) to the same video system as

the TV set (p.265).

Playback Problems

Part of the image blinks in black.

The image cannot be erased.

The movie cannot be played back.

When the movie is played back, camera operation noise

can be heard.

The movie has still moments.

No image appears on the TV screen.


Movies edited with a personal computer using the provide

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMovies edited with a personal computer using the provide

ImageBrowser EX (p.364) or other software cannot be playe

www.devic

eman

uals.

euImageBrowser EX (p.364) or other software cannot be playe

with the camera. However, video snapshot albums edited wit

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

with the camera. However, video snapshot albums edited wit


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie sho

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie sho

operation noise will also be recorded. Using an external

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

operation noise will also be recorded. Using an external


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



When the movie is played back, camera operation nois

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When the movie is played back, camera operation nois


The movie has still moments.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The movie has still moments.

335


If the movie file size reaches 4 GB, another movie file will be created

automatically (p.186).

Depending on the card reader and computer OS used, SDXC cards

may not be correctly recognized. If this occurs, connect your camera

to the computer with the provided interface cable, then transfer the

images to your computer using EOS Utility (provided software, p.364).

JPEG c and 1 images cannot be resized (p.277).

There are multiple movie files for a single movie shoot.

My card reader does not recognize the card.

I cannot resize the image.


images to your computer using EOS Utility (provided soft

www.devic

eman

uals.

euimages to your computer using EOS Utility (provided soft

images cannot be resized (p.277).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu images cannot be resized (p.277).

336

If you selected [Clean nowf], the shutter will make a noise, but no

picture is taken (p.223).

If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1>/<2> at a short

interval, the <f> icon may not be displayed (p.34).

What is displayed on the screen differs depending on the printer. This

instruction manual lists all the printing effects available (p.284).

Install the provided software (EOS Solution Disk CD-ROM) on the

computer (p.364).

Sensor Cleaning Problems

The shutter makes a noise during sensor cleaning.

Automatic sensor cleaning does not work.

Printing-Related Problems

There are fewer printing effects than listed in this instruction

manual.

Computer Connection Problems

I cannot download images to a computer.


> icon may not be displayed (p.34).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> icon may not be displayed (p.34).

What is displayed on the screen differs depending on th

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

What is displayed on the screen differs depending on th

instruction manual lists all the printing effects avail

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

instruction manual lists all the printing effects avail

Install the provided software (EOS Solution Disk CD-Rwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Install the provided software (EOS Solution Disk CD-Rwww.devicemanuals.eu


an listed in this instruction

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

an listed in this instruction



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

337

If there is a problem with the camera, an

error message will appear. Follow the on-

screen instructions.

* If the error still persists, write down the error number and contact your

nearest Canon Service Center.

Error Codes

Number Error Message and Solution

01

Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the lens contacts.

Clean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens or use a Canon lens (p.17, 20).

02

Card cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card or format card with camera.

Remove and insert the card again, replace the card, or format the card (p.31, 48).

04

Cannot save images because card is full. Replace card.

Replace the card, erase unnecessary images, or format the card (p.31, 268, 48).

05

The built-in flash could not be raised. Turn the camera off and on again.

Operate the power switch (p.34).

06

Sensor cleaning is not possible. Turn the camera off and on again.

Operate the power switch (p.34).

10, 20,30, 40,50, 60,70, 80,99

Shooting is not possible due to an error. Turn the camera off and on again or re-install the battery.

Operate the power switch, remove and install the battery pack again, or use a Canon lens (p.34, 30).

Error number

Countermeasures


Error Message and Solution

www.devic

eman

uals.

euError Message and Solution

www.devicemanuals.euCommunications between the camera and lens is faulty. C

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCommunications between the camera and lens is faulty. C


the camera and lens or use a

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu the camera and lens or use a


Card cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card or forma

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Card cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card or forma


Remove and insert the card again, replace the card, or format

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Remove and insert the card again, replace the card, or format


Cannot save images because card is full. Replace car

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Cannot save images because card is full. Replace car


Replace the card, erase unnecessa

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Replace the card, erase unnecessa(p.31, 268, 48).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(p.31, 268, 48).


The built-in flash could not be rawww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The built-in flash could not be rawww.devicemanuals.eu







338

� Type

Type: Digital, single-lens reflex, AF/AE camera with built-in flash

Recording media: SD memory card, SDHC memory card, SDXC memory card

* Compatible with UHS-I

Image sensor size: Approx. 22.3 x 14.9 mm

Compatible lenses: Canon EF lenses (including EF-S lenses)

* Excluding EF-M lenses

(35 mm-equivalent focal length is approx. 1.6 times the

lens focal length)

Lens mount: Canon EF mount

� Image Sensor

Type: CMOS sensor

Effective pixels: Approx. 18.00 megapixels

Aspect ratio: 3:2

Dust delete feature: Auto, Manual, Dust Delete Data appending

� Recording System

Recording format: Design rule for Camera File System (DCF) 2.0

Image type: JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon original)

RAW+JPEG Large simultaneous recording possible

Recorded pixels: L (Large) : Approx. 17.90 megapixels (5184 x 3456)

M (Medium) : Approx. 8.00 megapixels (3456 x 2304)

S1 (Small 1) : Approx. 4.50 megapixels (2592 x 1728)


S3 (Small 3) : Approx. 350,000 pixels (720 x 480)

RAW : Approx. 17.90 megapixels (5184 x 3456)

� Image Processing During Shooting

Picture Style: Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Neutral, Faithful,

Monochrome, User Def. 1 - 3

Basic+: Ambience-based shots, Light/scene-based shots

White balance: Auto, Preset (Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light,

White fluorescent light, Flash), Custom

White balance correction and white balance bracketing

features provided

* Flash color temperature information transmission enabled

Noise reduction: Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed shots

Automatic image

brightness correction: Auto Lighting Optimizer

Highlight tone priority: Provided

Lens aberration correction: Peripheral illumination correction, Chromatic aberration correction

Specifications


Dust delete feature: Auto, Manual, Dust Delete Data appen

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDust delete feature: Auto, Manual, Dust Delete Data appen

Camera File System (DCF) 2.0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Camera File System (DCF) 2.0


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Recorded pixels: L (Large) : Approx. 17.90 megapixels (5184 x 34

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Recorded pixels: L (Large) : Approx. 17.90 megapixels (5184 x 34


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


� Image Processing During Shootingwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� Image Processing During Shooting

339

Specifications

� Viewfinder

Type: Eye-level pentamirror

Coverage: Vertical/Horizontal approx. 95% (with Eye point approx. 19 mm)

Magnification: Approx. 0.85x (-1 m-1 with 50mm lens at infinity)

Eye point: Approx. 19 mm (from eyepiece lens center at -1 m-1)

Built-in dioptric adjustment: Approx. -3.0 - +1.0 m-1 (dpt)

Focusing screen: Fixed, Precision Matte

Mirror: Quick-return type

Depth-of-field preview: Provided

� Autofocus

Type: TTL secondary image-registration, phase detection

AF points: Nine cross-type AF points (Cross-type AF sensitive to

f/2.8 with center AF point)

Focusing brightness range:EV -0.5 - 18 (center AF point, at 23°C/73°F, ISO 100)

AF operation: One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, AI Focus AF

AF-assist beam: Small series of flashes fired by built-in flash

� Exposure Control

Metering modes: 63-zone TTL full-aperture metering

� Evaluative metering (linked to all AF points)

� Partial metering (approx. 9% of viewfinder at center)

� Spot metering (approx. 4% of viewfinder at center)

� Center-weighted average metering

Metering brightness range: EV 1 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF50mm f/1.8 II lens, ISO 100)

Exposure control: Program AE (Scene Intelligent Auto, Flash Off, Creative

Auto, Portrait, Landscape, Close-up, Sports, Special

scene (Night Portrait, Handheld Night Scene, HDR

Backlight Control), Program), Shutter-priority AE,

Aperture-priority AE, Manual exposure

ISO speed: Basic Zone modes*: ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set automatically

(Recommended * Portrait: ISO 100, Handheld Night Scene:

exposure index) ISO 100 - ISO 12800 set automatically

Creative Zone modes: ISO 100 - ISO 12800 set manually

(whole-stop increments), ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set

automatically, maximum ISO speed settable for ISO

Auto, or ISO expansion to “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600)

Exposure compensation: Manual: ±5 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments

AEB: ±2 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments (Can be

combined with manual exposure compensation)


Type: TTL secondary image-registration, phase detection

www.devic

eman

uals.

euType: TTL secondary image-registration, phase detection

AF points: Nine cross-type AF points (Cross-type AF sensitive to

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAF points: Nine cross-type AF points (Cross-type AF sensitive to

EV -0.5 - 18 (center AF point, at 23°C/73°F, ISO 100)

www.devic

eman

uals.

euEV -0.5 - 18 (center AF point, at 23°C/73°F, ISO 100)

AF operation: One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, AI Focus AF

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAF operation: One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, AI Focus AF

flashes fired by built-in flash

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

flashes fired by built-in flash


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Metering brightness range

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Metering brightness range:

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: EV 1 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF50mm f/1.8 II lens, ISO

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

EV 1 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF50mm f/1.8 II lens, ISO

Exposure control: Program AE (Scene In

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Exposure control: Program AE (Scene In

Specifications

340

AE lock: Auto: Applied in One-Shot AF with evaluative

metering when focus is achieved

Manual: With AE lock button

� Shutter

Type: Electronically-controlled, focal-plane shutter

Shutter speeds: 1/4000 sec. to 30 sec. (Total shutter speed range.

Available range varies by shooting mode.), Bulb, X-sync

at 1/200 sec.

� Flash

Built-in flash: Retractable, auto pop-up flash

Guide No.: Approx. 13/43 (ISO 100, in meters/feet)

Flash coverage: Approx. 17mm lens angle of view

Recycling time approx. 3 sec.

Wireless master function provided

External flash: EX-series Speedlite (Flash functions settable with the camera)

Flash metering: E-TTL II autoflash

Flash exposure compensation: ±2 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments

FE lock: Provided

PC terminal: None

� Drive System

Drive mode: Single shooting, continuous shooting, self-timer with 10-sec.

or 2-sec. delay and 10-sec. delay with continuous shooting

Continuous shooting speed: Max. approx. 5 shots/sec.

Max. burst (Approx.): JPEG Large/Fine: 22 (30) shots

RAW: 6 (6) shots

RAW+JPEG Large/Fine: 3 (3) shots

* Figures in parentheses apply to an UHS-I compatible

8 GB card based on Canon’s testing standards.

* Figures are based on Canon’s testing standards (ISO

100 and “Standard” Picture Style) using an 8 GB card.

� Live View Shooting

Aspect ratio settings: 3:2, 4:3, 16:9, 1:1

Focusing: Hybrid CMOS AF System* (Face+Tracking, FlexiZone-

Multi, FlexiZone-Single), Phase-difference detection

(Quick mode)

Manual focusing (approx. 5x / 10x magnification possible)

* Focusing brightness range: EV 1 - 18 (at 23°C/73°F,

ISO 100)


Guide No.: Approx. 13/43 (ISO 100, in meters/feet)

www.devic

eman

uals.

euGuide No.: Approx. 13/43 (ISO 100, in meters/feet)

Flash coverage: Approx. 17mm lens angle of view

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFlash coverage: Approx. 17mm lens angle of view

Wireless master function provided

www.devic

eman

uals.

euWireless master function provided

EX-series Speedlite (Flash functions settable with the camera

www.devic

eman

uals.

euEX-series Speedlite (Flash functions settable with the camera

: ±2 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: ±2 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments

Single shooting, continuous shooting, self-timer with 1

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Single shooting, continuous shooting, self-timer with 1

or 2-sec. delay and 10-sec. delay with continuous shooti

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

or 2-sec. delay and 10-sec. delay with continuous shooti

: Max. approx. 5 shots/sec.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Max. approx. 5 shots/sec.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


RAW: 6 (6) shotswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

RAW: 6 (6) shots

341

Specifications

Continuous AF: Provided

Touch shutter: Provided

Metering modes: Real-time metering with image sensor

Evaluative metering (315 zones), Partial metering

(approx. 8.8% of Live View screen), Spot metering

(approx. 2.8% of Live View screen), Center-weighted

average metering

Metering brightness range: EV 0 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF 50mm f/1.4 USM lens, ISO 100)

Creative filters: Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,

Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, Miniature effect

Grid display: Two types

� Movie Shooting

Recording format: MOV

Movie: MPEG-4 AVC / H.264

Variable (average) bit rate

Audio: Linear PCM

Recording size

and frame rate: 1920x1080 (Full HD): 30p/25p/24p

1280x720 (HD) : 60p/50p

640x480 (SD) : 30p/25p

* 30p: 29.97 fps, 25p: 25.00 fps, 24p: 23.98 fps,

60p: 59.94 fps, 50p: 50.00 fps

File size: 1920x1080 (30p/25p/24p): Approx. 330 MB/min.

1280x720 (60p/50p) : Approx. 330 MB/min.

640x480 (30p/25p) : Approx. 82.5 MB/min.


Multi, FlexiZone-Single)

Manual focusing (approx. 5x / 10x magnification possible)

* Focusing brightness range: EV 1 - 18 (at 23°C/73°F, ISO 100)

Metering modes: Center-weighted average and evaluative metering with

the image sensor

* Automatically set by the focusing mode

Servo AF: Provided

Metering brightness range: EV 0 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF 50mm f/1.4 USM lens, ISO 100)

Exposure control: Program AE for movies and manual exposure

Exposure compensation: ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments (Still photos: ±5 stops)


Variable (average) bit rate

www.devic

eman

uals.

euVariable (average) bit rate


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


1280x720 (HD) : 60p/50p

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

1280x720 (HD) : 60p/50p

640x480 (SD) : 30p/25p

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

640x480 (SD) : 30p/25p

* 30p: 29.97 fps, 25p: 25.00 fps, 24p: 23.98 fps,

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

* 30p: 29.97 fps, 25p: 25.00 fps, 24p: 23.98 fps,

60p: 59.94 fps, 50p: 50.00 fps

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

60p: 59.94 fps, 50p: 50.00 fps


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


1280x720 (60p/50p) : Approx. 330 MB/min.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

1280x720 (60p/50p) : Approx. 330 MB/min.

640x480 (30p/25p) : Approx. 82.5 MB/min.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

640x480 (30p/25p) : Approx. 82.5 MB/min.

Focusing: Hybrid CMOS AF System* (Face+Tracking, FlexiZone-www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Specifications

342

ISO speed: With autoexposure shooting: ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set

(Recommended automatically

exposure index) With manual exposure: ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set automatically/

manually, expandable to H (equivalent to ISO 12800)

Video snapshots: Settable to 2 sec./4 sec./8 sec.

Sound recording: Built-in stereo microphone

External stereo microphone terminal provided

Sound recording level adjustable, wind filter provided,

attenuator provided

Grid display: Two types

� LCD Monitor

Type: TFT color liquid-crystal monitor

Monitor size and dots: Wide, 7.7 cm (3.0-in.) (3:2) with approx. 1.04 million dots

Angle adjustment: Possible

Brightness adjustment: Manual (7 levels)

Interface languages: 25

Touch screen technology: Capacitive sensing

Feature guide: Displayable

� Playback

Image display formats: Single-image display, Single-image + Info display (Basic

info, shooting info, histogram), 4-image index, 9-image

index

Zoom magnification: Approx. 1.5x - 10x

Highlight alert: Overexposed highlights blink

Image browsing methods: Single image, jump by 10 or 100 images, by shooting

date, by folder, by movies, by stills, by rating

Image rotate: Possible

Ratings: Provided

Movie playback: Enabled (LCD monitor, video/audio OUT, HDMI OUT)

Built-in speaker

Image protect: Possible

Slide show: All images, by date, by folder, by movies, by stills, by rating

Five transition effects selectable

Background music: Selectable for slide shows and movie playback

� Post-Processing of Images

Creative filters: Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,

Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, Miniature effect

Resize: Possible

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMonitor size and dots: Wide, 7.7 cm (3.0-in.) (3:2) with appro

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMonitor size and dots: Wide, 7.7 cm (3.0-in.) (3:2) with approx. 1.04 million dots

www.devic

eman

uals.

eux. 1.04 million dots

Image display formats: Single-image display, Single-image + In

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Image display formats: Single-image display, Single-image + In


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


index

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

index


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Image browsing methodswww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Image browsing methods: Single image, jump by 10 or 100 images, by shooting www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Single image, jump by 10 or 100 images, by shooting

343

Specifications

� Direct Printing

Compatible printers: PictBridge-compatible printers

Printable images: JPEG and RAW images

Print ordering: DPOF Version 1.1 compatible

� Custom Functions

Custom Functions: 8

My Menu registration: Possible

Copyright information: Entry and inclusion possible

� Interface

Audio/video OUT/

Digital terminal: Analog video (compatible with NTSC/PAL)/stereo audio output

Personal computer communication and direct printing

(Hi-Speed USB equivalent), GPS Receiver GP-E2

connection

HDMI mini OUT terminal: Type C (auto switching of resolution), CEC-compatible

External microphone

IN terminal: 3.5 mm diameter stereo mini-jack

Remote control terminal: For Remote Switch RS-60E3

Wireless remote control: Remote Controller RC-6

Eye-Fi card: Compatible

� Power

Battery: Battery Pack LP-E8 (Quantity 1)

* AC power can be supplied via AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8

* With Battery Grip BG-E8 attached, size-AA/LR6

batteries can be used

Possible shots: With viewfinder shooting:

(Based on CIPA

testing standards) Approx. 440 shots at 23°C/73°F, approx. 400 shots at 0°C/32°F

With Live View shooting:

Approx. 180 shots at 23°C/73°F, approx. 150 shots at 0°C/32°F

Movie shooting time: Approx. 1 hr. 40 min. at 23°C/73°F

Approx. 1 hr. 20 min. at 0°C/32°F

(with a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8)

� Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 133.1 x 99.8 x 78.8 mm / 5.2 x 3.9 x 3.1 in.

Weight: Approx. 580 g / 20.5 oz. (CIPA Guidelines),

Approx. 525 g / 18.5 oz. (Body only)


Analog video (compatible with NTSC/PAL)/stereo audio output

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAnalog video (compatible with NTSC/PAL)/stereo audio output

Personal computer communication and direct printing

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPersonal computer communication and direct printing

(Hi-Speed USB equivalent), GPS Receiver GP-E2

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(Hi-Speed USB equivalent), GPS Receiver GP-E2

: Type C (auto switching of resolution), CEC-compatible

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu: Type C (auto switching of resolution), CEC-compatible


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


: For Remote Switch RS-60E3

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: For Remote Switch RS-60E3

: Remote Controller RC-6

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Remote Controller RC-6


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Specifications

344

� Operation Environment

Working temperature range: 0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F

Working humidity: 85% or less

� Battery Pack LP-E8

Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery

Rated voltage: 7.2 V DC

Battery capacity: 1120 mAh

Working temperature range: During charging: 6°C - 40°C / 43°F - 104°F

During shooting: 0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F


Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 37.1 x 15.4 x 55.2 mm / 1.5 x 0.6 x 2.2 in.

Weight: Approx. 52 g / 1.8 oz.

� Battery Charger LC-E8

Compatible battery: Battery Pack LP-E8

Recharging time: Approx. 2 hours (at 23°C/73°F)

Rated input: 100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)

Rated output: 8.4 V DC / 720 mA



Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 69 x 28 x 87.5 mm / 2.7 x 1.1 x 3.4 in.


� Battery Charger LC-E8E







Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 69 x 28 x 87.5 mm / 2.7 x 1.1 x 3.4 in.

Weight: Approx. 82 g / 2.9 oz. (excluding power cord)

� EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM

Angle of view: Diagonal extent: 74°20’ - 27°50’

Horizontal extent: 64°30’ - 23°20’

Vertical extent: 45°30’ - 15°40’

Lens construction: 13 elements in 11 groups

Minimum aperture: f/22 - 36

Closest focusing distance: 0.25 m / 0.82 ft. (from image sensor plane)


: Approx. 37.1 x 15.4 x 55.2 mm / 1.5 x 0.6 x 2.2 in.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu: Approx. 37.1 x 15.4 x 55.2 mm / 1.5 x 0.6 x 2.2 in.


www.devic

eman

uals.

euRecharging time: Approx. 2 hours (at 23°C/73°F)


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


: 6°C - 40°C / 43°F - 104°F

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: 6°C - 40°C / 43°F - 104°F


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


: Approx. 69 x 28 x 87.5 mm / 2.7 x 1.1 x 3.4 in.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Approx. 69 x 28 x 87.5 mm / 2.7 x 1.1 x 3.4 in.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Rated input: 100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


345

Specifications

Max. magnification: 0.36x (at 55 mm)

Field of view: 199 x 129 - 63 x 42 mm / 7.83 x 5.08 - 2.48 x 1.65 in. (at

0.25 m / 0.82 ft.)

Image Stabilizer: Lens shift type

Filter size: 58 mm

Lens cap: E-58 II

Max. diameter x length: Approx. 69.0 x 75.2 mm / 2.72 x 2.96 in.


Hood: EW-63C (sold separately)

Case: LP1016 (sold separately)

� EF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM





Minimum aperture: f/22 - 36

Closest focusing distance*: At 18 mm focal length: 0.39 m / 1.28 ft.

(Approx. 372 x 248 mm / 14.6 x 9.8 in. field of view)

At 135 mm focal length: 0.39 m / 1.28 ft.


* Distance from image sensor plane



Filter size: 67 mm

Lens cap: E-67 II

Max. diameter x length: Approx. 76.6 x 96.0 mm / 3.0 x 3.8 in.


Hood: EW-73B (sold separately)

Case: LP1116 (sold separately)

All the data above is based on Canon’s testing standards and CIPA (Camera &

Imaging Products Association) testing standards and guidelines.

Dimensions, maximum diameter, length and weight listed above are based on

CIPA Guidelines (except weight for camera body only).

Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice.

If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera, consult the

respective lens maker.



www.devic

eman

uals.

euAngle of view: Diagonal extent: 74°20’ - 11°30’


www.devic

eman

uals.

euHorizontal extent: 64°30’ - 9°30’


www.devic

eman

uals.

euVertical extent: 45°30’ - 6°20’


www.devic

eman

uals.

euLens construction: 16 elements in 12 groups

*: At 18 mm focal length: 0.39 m / 1.28 ft.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

*: At 18 mm focal length: 0.39 m / 1.28 ft.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Filter size: 67 mm

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Filter size: 67 mm

Lens cap: E-67 II

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Lens cap: E-67 II

Max. diameter x length: Approx. 76.6 x 96.0 mm / 3.0 x 3www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Max. diameter x length: Approx. 76.6 x 96.0 mm / 3.0 x 3

Weight: Approx. 480 g / 16.9 oz.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


346

The kit lenses use a stepping motor that drives the focus lens. The

motor controls the focus lens even during zooming.

1. When the camera is OFF

The motor does not operate while the camera is OFF or when the

camera is OFF due to the auto power off function. Therefore, users

must be aware of the following points.

Manual focusing is not possible.

During zooming, inaccurate focusing may occur.

2. When the lens is in sleep mode

If not operated for a certain period of time, this lens will enter sleep

mode in order to save power, apart from the camera’s auto power off.

To exit sleep mode, press the shutter button halfway.

In sleep mode, the motor will not operate even if the camera is ON.

Therefore, users must be aware of the following points.



3. During initial reset

When the camera is turned ON or when the camera is turned ON by

pressing the shutter button halfway when the camera is OFF due to

the auto power off function*1, the lens performs an initial reset of the

focus lens.

Although the image in the viewfinder will appear out of focus

during the initial reset, this is not a malfunction.

Although the shutter can be released during the initial reset, users

must wait approx. 1 second*2 after the initial reset has completed

before shooting.*1: Applicable to the following EF-S lens compatible digital SLR cameras:

EOS 7D, EOS 60D, EOS 60Da, EOS 50D, EOS 40D, EOS 30D, EOS 20D,

EOS 20Da, EOS 600D, EOS 550D, EOS 500D, EOS 450D, EOS 1100D,

EOS 1000D, EOS 400D DIGITAL, EOS 350D DIGITAL, EOS 300D DIGITAL

*2: The initial reset time varies depending on the camera used.

Handling Precautions: EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM, EF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM

www.devicemanuals.euIf not operated for a certain period of time, this lens wi

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIf not operated for a certain period of time, this lens will enter sleep

www.devic

eman

uals.

eull enter sleep

mode in order to save power, apart from the camera’s auto

www.devic

eman

uals.

eumode in order to save power, apart from the camera’s auto

To exit sleep mode, press the shutter button halfway.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTo exit sleep mode, press the shutter button halfway.

In sleep mode, the motor will not operate even if the camera

www.devic

eman

uals.

euIn sleep mode, the motor will not operate even if the camera


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


When the camera is turned ON or when the camera is turned ON

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

When the camera is turned ON or when the camera is turned ON

pressing the shutter button halfway when the camera is OFF

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

pressing the shutter button halfway when the camera is OFF

the auto power off function*

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the auto power off function*1

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

1

Although the image in the viewfinder will appear out of www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Although the image in the viewfinder will appear out of

during the initial reset, this is not a malfunction.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

during the initial reset, this is not a malfunction.

347

TrademarksAdobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and other countries.

Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc.

in the United States and other countries.

SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or

registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

All other corporate and product names and trademarks mentioned in this

manual are the property of their respective owners.

About MPEG-4 Licensing“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be

used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video

that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a

video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.

No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.”

* Notice displayed in English as required.


All other corporate and product names and trademarks mentioned

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAll other corporate and product names and trademarks mentioned

“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard

used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 c

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 c

that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpo

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpo

video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4

No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 stand

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 stand


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


348

Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended

This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with

genuine Canon accessories. Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this

product and/or accidents such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-

genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery

pack). Please note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the

malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may request

such repairs on a chargeable basis.


349

Safety Warnings

Follow these safeguards and use the equipment properly to prevent injury, death, and material damage.

Preventing Serious Injury or Death

� To prevent fire, excessive heat, chemical leakage, and explosions, follow the safeguards below:- Do not use any batteries, power sources, and accessories not specified in this

booklet. Do not use any home-made or modified batteries.- Do not short-circuit, disassemble, or modify the battery pack or back-up battery. Do

not apply heat or apply solder to the battery pack or back-up battery. Do not expose the battery pack or back-up battery to fire or water. And do not subject the battery pack or back-up battery to strong physical shock.

- Do not install the battery pack or back-up battery in reversed polarity (+ –). Do not mix new and old or different types of batteries.

- Do not recharge the battery pack outside the allowable ambient temperature range of 0°C - 40°C (32°F - 104°F). Also, do not exceed the recharging time.

- Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera, accessories, connecting cables, etc.

� Keep the back-up battery away from children. If a child swallows the battery, consult a physician immediately. (Battery chemicals may harm the stomach and intestines.)

� When disposing of a battery pack or back-up battery, insulate the electrical contacts with tape to prevent contact with other metallic objects or batteries. This is to prevent fire or an explosion.

� If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted during battery pack recharging, immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop the recharging and prevent a fire.

� If the battery pack or back-up battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or fumes, remove it immediately. Be careful not to get burned in the process.

� Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage contacts your eyes, skin, or clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing it. See a physician immediately.

� During the recharging, keep the equipment away from the reach of children. The cord can accidentally choke the child or give an electrical shock.

� Do not leave any cords near a heat source. It can deform the cord or melt the insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock.

� Do not fire the flash at someone driving a car. It may cause an accident.

� Do not fire the flash near a person’s eyes. It may impair the person’s vision. When using flash to photograph an infant, keep at least 1 meter away.

� Before storing the camera or accessory when not in use, remove the battery pack and disconnect the power plug. This is to prevent electrical shock, heat generation, and fire.

� Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an explosion or fire.


- Do not install the battery pack or back-up battery in reversed po

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu- Do not install the battery pack or back-up battery in reversed po

- Do not recharge the battery pack outside the allowable ambi

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu- Do not recharge the battery pack outside the allowable ambiof 0°C - 40°C (32°F - 104°F). Also, do not exceed the recharg

www.devic

eman

uals.

euof 0°C - 40°C (32°F - 104°F). Also, do not exceed the recharg

- Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electri

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu- Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electri



� Keep the back-up battery away from children. If a child swallow

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� Keep the back-up battery away from children. If a child swallow� Keep the back-up battery away from children. If a child swallow

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� Keep the back-up battery away from children. If a child swallowphysician immediately. (Battery chemicals may harm the stomach and inte

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

physician immediately. (Battery chemicals may harm the stomach and inte



� When disposing of a battery pack or back-up battery, insulate

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� When disposing of a battery pack or back-up battery, insulate � When disposing of a battery pack or back-up battery, insulate

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� When disposing of a battery pack or back-up battery, insulate with tape to prevent contact with other metallic objects or b

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

with tape to prevent contact with other metallic objects or b



� If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted during battery pack re

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted during battery pack re� If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted during battery pack re

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted during battery pack reimmediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet



� If the battery pack or back-up battery leaks, changes color, defo

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� If the battery pack or back-up battery leaks, changes color, defo� If the battery pack or back-up battery leaks, changes color, defo

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� If the battery pack or back-up battery leaks, changes color, defofumes, remove it immediately. Be careful not to get burned in

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

fumes, remove it immediately. Be careful not to get burned in



� Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and cl� Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clcause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage contactwww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage contactclothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean wate

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean wate

350

� If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts, do not touch the internal parts due to the possibility of electrical shock.

� Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. High-voltage internal parts can cause electrical shock.

� Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or lens. Doing so may damage your vision.

� Keep the camera from the reach of small children. The neck strap can accidentally choke the child.

� Do not store the equipment in dusty or humid places. This is to prevent fire and electrical shock.

� Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital, check if it is allowed. Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane’s instruments or the hospital’s medical equipment.

� To prevent fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:- Always insert the power plug all the way in.- Do not handle a power plug with wet hands.- When unplugging a power plug, grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord.- Do not scratch, cut, or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy object on the cord.

Also do not twist or tie the cords.- Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet.- Do not use a cord whose insulation has been damaged.

� Occasionally unplug the power plug and use a dry cloth to clean off the dust around the power outlet. If the surrounding is dusty, humid, or oily, the dust on the power outlet may become moist and short-circuit the outlet to cause a fire.

Preventing Injury or Equipment Damage� Do not leave equipment inside a car under the hot sun or near a heat source. The

equipment may become hot and cause skin burns.

� Do not carry the camera around while it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause injury. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the camera and lens.

� Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera under the sun without the lens cap attached. Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and cause a fire.

� Do not cover or wrap the battery-recharging apparatus with a cloth. Doing so may trap heat within and cause the casing to deform or catch fire.

� If you drop the camera in water or if water or metal fragments enter inside the camera, promptly remove the battery pack and back-up battery. This is to prevent fire and electrical shock.

� Do not use or leave the battery pack or back-up battery in a hot environment. Doing so may cause battery leakage or a shorter battery life. The battery pack or back-up battery can also become hot and cause skin burns.

� Do not use paint thinner, benzene, or other organic solvents to clean the equipment. Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard.

If the product does not work properly or requires repair, contact your dealer or your nearest Canon Service Center.






www.devicemanuals.eu� To prevent fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards be

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu� To prevent fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:

www.devic

eman

uals.

eulow:low:

www.devic

eman

uals.

eulow:

- When unplugging a power plug, grasp and pull the plu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu- When unplugging a power plug, grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eug instead of the cord.

- Do not scratch, cut, or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy o

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu- Do not scratch, cut, or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy o

- Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outle

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

- Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outle- Do not use a cord whose insulation has been damaged.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

- Do not use a cord whose insulation has been damaged.



� Occasionally unplug the power plug and use a dry cloth to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� Occasionally unplug the power plug and use a dry cloth to � Occasionally unplug the power plug and use a dry cloth to

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� Occasionally unplug the power plug and use a dry cloth to the power outlet. If the surrounding is dusty, humid, or o

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the power outlet. If the surrounding is dusty, humid, or omay become moist and short-circuit the outlet to cause a fire.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

may become moist and short-circuit the outlet to cause a fire.

Preventing Injury or Equipment Damage

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Preventing Injury or Equipment Damage� Do not leave equipment inside a car under the hot sun or n

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� Do not leave equipment inside a car under the hot sun or nequipment may become hot and cause skin burns.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

equipment may become hot and cause skin burns.



� Do not carry the camera around while it is attached to a trip

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� Do not carry the camera around while it is attached to a trip� Do not carry the camera around while it is attached to a trip

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� Do not carry the camera around while it is attached to a tripinjury. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support thewww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

injury. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support thewww.devicemanuals.eu


� Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera under the sun witwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera under the sun wit� Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera under the sun witwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

� Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera under the sun witattached. Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

attached. Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and

351

European Union (and EEA) only.

These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the WEEE Directive (2002/96/EC), the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or your national laws implementing those Directives. If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, in accordance with the Battery

Directive, this indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a concentration above an applicable threshold specified in the Battery Directive.This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources. For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, waste authority, approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/environment.(EEA: Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThis product should be handed over to a designated collecti

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThis product should be handed over to a designated collecti

buy a new similar product or to an

www.devic

eman

uals.

eubuy a new similar product or to an ling waste electrical and electronic

www.devic

eman

uals.

euling waste electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handli

www.devic

eman

uals.

euequipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handlitype of waste could have a possible impact on the environment

www.devic

eman

uals.

eutype of waste could have a possible impact on the environment

ances that are generally associated

www.devic

eman

uals.

euances that are generally associated

Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product w

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product weffective usage of natural resources.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

effective usage of natural resources. For more information about the recycling of

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For more information about the recycling oflocal city office, waste authority, approved scheme or your hou

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

local city office, waste authority, approved scheme or your hou

www.canon-europe.com/environment

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.canon-europe.com/environment


(EEA: Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(EEA: Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)


352

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS1. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS — This manual contains important safety

and operating instructions for Battery Charger LC-E8 & LC-E8E.2. Before using the charger, read all instructions and cautionary remarks on

(1) the charger, (2) the battery pack, and (3) the product using the battery pack.

3. CAUTION — To reduce risk of injury, charge only the Battery Pack LP-E8. Other types of batteries may burst, causing personal injury and other damage.

4. Do not expose the charger to rain or snow.5. Use of an attachment not recommended or sold by Canon may result in

fire, electric shock, or personal injury.6. To reduce risk of damage to electric plug and cord, pull by plug rather than

by cord when disconnecting charger.7. Make sure cord is located so that it will not be stepped on, tripped over, or

otherwise subjected to damage or stress.8. Do not operate the charger with damaged cord or plug - replace them

immediately.9. Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow, been dropped,

or otherwise damaged in any way; take it to a qualified serviceman.10. Do not disassemble the charger; take it to a qualified serviceman when

service or repair is required. Incorrect reassembly may result in a risk of electric shock or fire.

11. To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug charger from outlet before attempting any maintenance or cleaning.

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONUnless otherwise stated in this manual, there are no user serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified serviceman.

CAUTIONRISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.

DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.www.devicemanuals.eu

6. To reduce risk of damage to electric plug and cord, pull by

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu6. To reduce risk of damage to electric plug and cord, pull by

7. Make sure cord is located so that it will not be stepped o

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu7. Make sure cord is located so that it will not be stepped on, tripped over, or

www.devic

eman

uals.

eun, tripped over, or

8. Do not operate the charger with damaged cord or plug - re

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu8. Do not operate the charger with damaged cord or plug - re

9. Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu9. Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow

or otherwise damaged in any way; take it to a qualified ser

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

or otherwise damaged in any way; take it to a qualified ser10. Do not disassemble the charger; take it to a qualified se

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

10. Do not disassemble the charger; take it to a qualified seservice or repair is required. Incorrect reassembly may result in

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

service or repair is required. Incorrect reassembly may result in

11. To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug charger from outlet be

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

11. To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug charger from outlet beattempting any maintenance or cleaning.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

attempting any maintenance or cleaning.

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONUnless otherwise stated in this manual, there are no user se

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Unless otherwise stated in this manual, there are no user seinside. Refer servicing to qualified serviceman.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

inside. Refer servicing to qualified serviceman.


RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. www.devicemanuals.eu

353


354


355


356


357


358


359


360


361

14Downloading Images to a

Personal Computer

This chapter explains how to download images from the camera to your personal computer, gives an overview of the software in the EOS Solution Disk (CD-ROM) provided with the camera, and explains how to install the software on your personal computer. It also explains how to view the PDF files on the EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk (CD-ROM).

EOS Solution Disk

(Software)

EOS Software Instruction

Manuals Disk


XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

CEL-XXX XXX



CEL-XXX XXX


Windows XXX XXX

Mac OS X XXX XXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX



Downloading Images to a

www.devic

eman

uals.

euDownloading Images to a

Personal Computer

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPersonal Computer

This chapter explains how to download images from the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

This chapter explains how to download images from the camera to your personal computer, gives an overview of

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

camera to your personal computer, gives an overview of the software in the EOS Solution Disk (CD-ROM)

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the software in the EOS Solution Disk (CD-ROM) provided with the camera, and explains how to install

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

provided with the camera, and explains how to install the software on your personal computer. It also explains

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the software on your personal computer. It also explains how to view the PDF files on the EOS Software

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

how to view the PDF files on the EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk (CD-ROM).

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Instruction Manuals Disk (CD-ROM).



362

You can use the provided software to download the images in the

camera to your personal computer. There are two ways to do this.

1 Install the software (p.365).

2 Use the provided interface cable

to connect the camera to your

personal computer.


the camera.


<C> terminal with the cable

plug’s <D> icon facing the front of

the camera.

Connect the cord’s plug to the

personal computer’s USB terminal.

3 Use EOS Utility to download the

images/movies.

For details, refer to the PDF Software

Instruction Manual on the CD-ROM

(p.367).

Downloading Images to a Personal Computer

Download by Connecting the Camera to the Personal Computer

www.devicemanuals.euUse the provided interface cable

www.devic

eman

uals.

euUse the provided interface cable

to connect the camera to your

www.devic

eman

uals.

euto connect the camera to your

personal computer.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eupersonal computer.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


the camera.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the camera.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


<

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

<C

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Cplug’s <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

plug’s <

the camera.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the camera.

363

Downloading Images to a Personal Computer

If you have a commercially-available card reader, you can use it to

download images to your personal computer.

1 Install the software (p.365).

2 Insert the card into the card

reader.

3 Use Canon software to download

the images/movies.

Use Digital Photo Professional.

Use ImageBrowser EX.

For details, refer to the PDF Software

Instruction Manual on the CD-ROM

(p.367)..

Downloading Images with a Card Reader

When downloading images from the camera to your personal computer, if

you do not use Canon software and instead use a card reader, copy the

DCIM folder on the card to your personal computer.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euInsert the card into the card

www.devic

eman

uals.

euInsert the card into the card

Use Canon software to download

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Use Canon software to download

the images/movies.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

the images/movies.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

364

EOS Solution Disk

This disk contains various software for EOS cameras.

Communication Software for the Camera and Computer

You can download images (still photos/movies) you have shot with the camera to your computer.You can set the various settings of the camera from your computer.You can shoot photos remotely by connecting the camera to your computer.You can copy background music tracks to the card, and play the background music during playback.

Image Viewing and Editing Software

You can view, edit and print shot images on your computer at high-speed.You can edit images with originals remaining unchanged.Can be used by a wide range of users from amateurs to professionals. It is especially recommended for users who mainly shoot RAW images.


You can view, browse and print JPEG images on your computer.You can play movies (MOV files), video snapshot albums, and extract still photos from movies.You can download additional functions, such as EOS Video Snapshot Task (p.195), with an internet connection.Recommended for novices who are using a digital camera for the first time and amateur users.

Picture Style File Creating Software

This software is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in processing images.You can edit Picture Style to your unique image characteristics and create/save an original Picture Style file.

a EOS Utility

b Digital Photo Professional

c ImageBrowser EX

d Picture Style Editor


CEL-XXX XXX


Windows XXX XXX

Mac OS X XXX XXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

Note that the software provided with previous cameras might not support still photos and movie files shot with this camera. Please use the software provided with this camera.

www.devicemanuals.euYou can set the various settings of the camera from your co

www.devic

eman

uals.

euYou can set the various settings of the camera from your coYou can shoot photos remotely by connecting the camera to your

www.devic

eman

uals.

euYou can shoot photos remotely by connecting the camera to yourto the card, and play the background

www.devic

eman

uals.

euto the card, and play the background


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


You can view, edit and print shot images on your computer

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can view, edit and print shot images on your computerYou can edit images with originals remaining unchanged.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can edit images with originals remaining unchanged.Can be used by a wide range of users from amateurs to p

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Can be used by a wide range of users from amateurs to pis especially recommended for users who mainly shoot RAW

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

is especially recommended for users who mainly shoot RAW


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


You can view, browse and print JPEG images on your compwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can view, browse and print JPEG images on your compYou can play movies (MOV files), video snapshot albums, and

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

You can play movies (MOV files), video snapshot albums, andwww.devicemanuals.eu

ImageBrowser EX

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

ImageBrowser EX

365

Compatible OS

1 Check that the camera is not connected to your computer.

2 Insert the EOS Solution Disk (CD).

3 Select your geographic area, country and language.

4 Click [Easy Installation] to start installation.

Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation procedure.If prompted, install Microsoft Silverlight.

5 Click [Finish] when the installation has completed.

6 Remove the CD.

Installing the Software on Windows

Never connect the camera to your computer before you install the

software. The software will not be installed correctly.

Windows 8 Windows Vista Windows XPWindows 7


Select your geographic area, country and language.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect your geographic area, country and language.

to start installation.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu to start installation.

Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the instal

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the instal

If prompted, install Microsoft Silverlight.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If prompted, install Microsoft Silverlight.

[Finish]www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[Finish] when the installation has completedwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

when the installation has completedwww.devicemanuals.eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu





www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

366

Compatible OS

1 Check that the camera is not connected to your computer.

2 Insert the EOS Solution Disk (CD).

On your computer’s desktop, double-click and open the CD-ROM icon, and then double-click [Canon EOS Digital Installer].

3 Select your geographic area, country and language.

4 Click [Easy Installation] to start installation.

Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation procedure.

5 Click [Restart] when the installation has completed.

6 Once the computer has restarted, remove the CD.

Installing the Software on Macintosh

MAC OS X 10.6 - 10.8

www.devicemanuals.euSelect your geographic area, country and language.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect your geographic area, country and language.

to start installation.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu to start installation.

Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the install

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the install

[Restart] www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

[Restart] when the installation has completed.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

when the installation has completed.www.devicemanuals.eu

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu





www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

367

[WINDOWS]

EOS Software Instruction Manuals DiskCopy the PDF Instruction Manuals contained on the disk to your computer.

1 Insert the EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk (CD) into the

CD-ROM drive of your computer.

2 Open the disk.

Double-click [My Computer] on the desktop and then double-click

the CD-ROM drive into which you have inserted the disk.

Select your language and operating system. The index of the

Instruction Manuals is displayed.

[MACINTOSH]

EOS Software Instruction Manuals DiskCopy the PDF Instruction Manuals contained on the disk to your Macintosh.

1 Insert the EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk (CD) into the

CD-ROM drive of your Macintosh.

2 Open the disk.

Double-click on the disk icon.

3 Double-click the START.html file.


Instruction Manuals is displayed.

Adobe Reader (latest version recommended) must be installed to view the Instruction Manual files (PDF format). Install Adobe Reader if it is not already installed on your computer. To save the PDF manual to your computer, use the ‘Save’ function of your Adobe Reader.

Adobe Reader (latest version recommended) must be installed to view the Instruction Manual files (PDF format). Install Adobe Reader if it is not already installed on your Macintosh. To save the PDF manual to your computer, use the ‘Save’ function of your Adobe Reader.


XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

CEL-XXX XXX



XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

CEL-XXX XXX


www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe CD-ROM drive into which you have inserted the disk.

www.devic

eman

uals.

euthe CD-ROM drive into which you have inserted the disk.


www.devic

eman

uals.

euSelect your language and operating system. The index of the


EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

EOS Software Instruction Manuals DiskCopy the PDF Instruction Manuals contained on the disk to yo

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Copy the PDF Instruction Manuals contained on the disk to yo

Insert the EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk (CD) into the www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Insert the EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk (CD) into the

CD-ROM drive of your Macintosh.www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

CD-ROM drive of your Macintosh.www.devicemanuals.eu

Adobe Reader (latest version recommended) must be instal

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAdobe Reader (latest version recommended) must be instalManual files (PDF format). Install Adobe Reader if it is

www.devic

eman

uals.

euManual files (PDF format). Install Adobe Reader if it is

To save the PDF manual to your computer, use the ‘Sav

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

To save the PDF manual to your computer, use the ‘Sav


368


369

15Quick Reference Guide

and Index

Menu Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.370

Image-recording Quality - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.371

A Picture Style- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.371

Q Quick Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.372

Nomenclature - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.373

Basic Zone Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.375

D Using the Built-in Flash - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.375

Creative Zone Modes- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.376

d: Program AE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.376

s: Shutter-priority AE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.376

f: Aperture-priority AE- - - - - - - - - - - - - p.376

f: AF Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.377

S AF Point - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.377

i: ISO Speed - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.378

i Drive Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.378

A Live View Shooting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.379

k Shooting Movies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.380

Image Playback- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.381



Quick Reference Guide

www.devic

eman

uals.

euQuick Reference Guide

and Index

www.devic

eman

uals.

euand Index


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Picture Style- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.371

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Picture Style- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.371

Quick Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.372

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Quick Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.372

Nomenclature - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.373

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Nomenclature - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.373


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Using the Built-in Flash - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.375

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Using the Built-in Flash - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.375

Creative Zone Modes- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.376www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Creative Zone Modes- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.376

: Program AE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.376www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Program AE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.376

370


<M>

button

LCD

monitor/

Touch

screen

<S>

Cross keys

<0> button

1. Press the <M> button to display the menu.

2. Press the key to select a tab, then press the <V>

key to select the desired item.

3. Press <0> to display the setting.

4. After setting the item, press <0>.

Menu Operations

Tabs

Menu settingsMenu items

Creative Zone Modes

Basic Zone Modes Movie Shooting


www.devic

eman

uals.

euCross keys

www.devic

eman

uals.

euCross keys

> button to display the menu.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button to display the menu.

> key to select a tab, then press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> key to select a tab, then press the <

> to display the setting.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> to display the setting.

0

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

0>.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

>.

Creative Zone www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Creative Zone


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

371


� Select [z1: Image quality], then press <0>.

� Press the key to select the quality, then press <0>.

�For <S> (Neutral) and (Faithful), see page 96.

Image-Recording Quality

Image-recording quality

Recorded pixels

Possible shots

�Press the <XA> button.

�Press the key to select the

Picture Style, then press <0>.

A Picture StyleN

Style

D Auto

P Standard

Q Portrait

R Landscape

V Monochrome

Description

Color tones optimized for the particular scene.

Vivid colors and sharp images.

Nice skin tones and slightly sharp images.

Vivid blue skies and greenery and very sharp images.

Black-and-white images.


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Possible shots

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPossible shots

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

372

Q Quick Control� Press the <Q> button.

� The Quick Control screen will

appear.

� In Basic Zone modes, the settable functions differ depending

on the shooting mode.

� Press the <S> key to select a function, then turn the <6>

dial to set it.

Basic Zone Modes Creative Zone Modes

Shutter speed Aperture


ISO speed

Picture Style

Exposure compensation/

AEB setting

Shooting mode


Built-in flash settingsWhitebalance

Drive modeReturn



AF operation

Metering mode

White balance bracketing



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu







www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Shutter speed ApertureShutter speed Aperture

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Shutter speed ApertureShutter speed Aperture

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

373


Access lamp

<O> Aperture/Exposurecompensation button

<A> Live View shooting/Movie shooting button

<S> AF pointselection button

<A> AE lock button

<0> Setting button

<S> Cross keys

<Q> Quick Control button

Nomenclature

Focus mode switch

Shutter button

Mode DialPower switch

 ISO speedsetting button

<D> Flashbutton

<6> Main Dial





































































> Live View shooting/

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> Live View shooting/Movie shooting button

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Movie shooting button

374

Shutter speed

ISO speed

Aperture

Shooting mode

Possible shots


Built-in flashsettings

Metering mode

White balance


Exposure levelindicator

Drive mode

Battery check

zxcn

OK Not good

Monochrome shootingFlash exposurecompensation

Shutter speed

Viewfinder Information

Shooting Settings

ISO speed

AF points

AF point activation indicator <•>

Spot meteringcircle

Focus confirmation light

Aperture

Max. burst

AE lock

Flash-ready

Exposure level indicator

Picture Style

AF operation

Quick Control icon


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu







Metering mode

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMetering mode

Image-recording

www.devic

eman

uals.

euImage-recordingquality

www.devic

eman

uals.

euquality

Drive mode

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Drive mode

AF points

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AF points

375


A Scene Intelligent Auto

7 Flash Off

C Creative Auto

2 Portrait

3 Landscape

4 Close-up

5 Sports

8 Special scene

6 Night Portrait

F Handheld Night Scene

G HDR Backlight Control

All the settings necessary for

shooting are set automatically.

You just press the shutter button,

and the camera does the rest.

Basic Zone Modes

Basic Zone

�At the 8 position, press the <Q> button, select the shooting

mode icon with <S> key, and turn the <6> dial to set the

shooting mode.

Basic Zone ModesIf necessary, the built-in flash will be raised and fire automatically

in low-light or backlit conditions (except in the <7> <3> <5>

<F> <G> modes).


Creative Zone Modes�Press the <D> button to raise the

built-in flash, then shoot.

www.devicemanuals.eu Special scene

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Special scene

Night Portrait

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Night Portrait

Handheld Night Scene

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Handheld Night Scene

G

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

G HDR Backlight Control

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

HDR Backlight Control

position, press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

position, press the <Q

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Q> key, and turn the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

> key, and turn the <


Basic Zone Modes

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Basic Zone ModesIf necessary, the built-in flash will be raised and fire automatically

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If necessary, the built-in flash will be raised and fire automatically

in low-light or backlit conditions (except in the <www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

in low-light or backlit conditions (except in the <

Using the Built-in Flash

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Using the Built-in Flash

376

�Set the Mode Dial to <d>.

You can change the camera

settings as desired to shoot in

various ways.

The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and

aperture in the same way as the <A> mode.

Creative Zone Modes

d: Program AE

�Set the Mode Dial to <s>.

�Turn the <6> dial to set the desired

shutter speed, then focus the subject.

�The aperture will be set automatically.

�If the aperture display blinks, turn the

<6> dial until it stops blinking.

�Set the Mode Dial to <f>.

�Turn the <6> dial to set the desired

aperture, then focus the subject.

� The shutter speed will be set

automatically.

� If the shutter speed display blinks, turn

the <6> dial until it stops blinking.

s: Shutter-priority AE

f: Aperture-priority AE

Cre

ative

Zone


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and

www.devic

eman

uals.

euThe camera automatically sets the shutter speed and


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Turn the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Turn the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

<6

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

6shutter speed, then focus the subject.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

shutter speed, then focus the subject.

�

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

�The aperture will be set automatically.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

The aperture will be set automatically.

�

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

�If the aperture display blinks, turn the

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

If the aperture display blinks, turn the

: Aperture-priority AEwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

: Aperture-priority AE

377


�Press the <S> button.

�Press the <S> key to select the

AF point.

�While looking through the

viewfinder, you can select the AF

point by turning the <6> dial

until the desired AF point flashes

in red.

�Pressing <0> toggles the AF

point selection between the

center AF point and automatic

AF point selection.

S AF PointN

�Set the lens focus mode switch

to <f>.

�Press the <Zf> button.

�Press the key or turn the

<6> dial to select the AF

operation, then press <0>.

X(One-Shot AF):

For still subjects

9(AI Focus AF):

Switches the AF operation

automatically

Z(AI Servo AF):

For moving subjects

f: AF OperationN


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

�

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

�Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

(AI Focus AF):

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(AI Focus AF):

Switches the AF operation

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu Switches the AF operation

automatically

www.devic

eman

uals.

euautomatically

Z

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Z(AI Servo AF):

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(AI Servo AF):

For moving subjects

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

For moving subjects

378

�Press the button.


<6> dial to select the ISO

speed, then press <0>.

�When [AUTO] is selected, the

ISO speed is set automatically.

When you press the shutter

button halfway, the ISO speed

setting is displayed.

i: ISO SpeedN

�Press the <YiQ> button.


<6> dial to select the drive

mode, then press <0>.

u : Single shooting

i : Continuous shooting

Q : Self-timer:10 sec./Remote

control

l : Self-timer:2 sec.

q : Self-timer:Continuous

i Drive Mode


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu























button halfway, the ISO speed

www.devic

eman

uals.

eubutton halfway, the ISO speed

setting is displayed.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eusetting is displayed.

Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

�

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

�Press the <

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the <

<

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

<6

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

6

379


Temperature No Flash 50% Flash Use


�Press the <A> button to display

the Live View image.


�Press the shutter button halfway to

focus.

�Press the shutter button


� Battery Life with Live View Shooting

Temperature No Flash 50% Flash Use




Press the shutter button

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Press the shutter button


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Battery Life with Live View Shootingwww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Battery Life with Live View Shootingwww.devicemanuals.eu


Temperature No Flash 50% Flash Usewww.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

Temperature No Flash 50% Flash Usewww.devicemanuals.eu










www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

380

�Set the power switch to <k>.

�Set the Mode Dial to any

shooting mode except <a>.

�Press the <A> button to start

shooting a movie.

�To stop movie shooting, press

the <A> button again.

Recording movie

Microphone

k Shooting Movies

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

www.devicemanuals.euTo stop movie shooting, press

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTo stop movie shooting, press

> button again.

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu> button again.

Microphonewww.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Microphonewww.devicemanuals.eu

381


y u y u

Image Playback

MagnifyIndex

Erase

Playbackx

L

Select image

B Shooting information

S


Magnify

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMagnify






























www.devic

eman

uals.

eu




www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



B

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

B B

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

B

382

Index

Numerics

10-sec. or 2-sec. delay .................106

1280x720......................................185

1920x1080....................................185

4- or 9-image index display...........242

640x480........................................185

9-point AF auto selection ..............100

A

A (Scene Intelligent Auto)........... 58

AC Adapter Kit ............................. 306

Access lamp .................................. 32

Accessories .....................................3

Adobe RGB.................................. 141

AE lock .........................................123

AEB.......................................121, 298

AF → Focusing

AF point ....................................... 100

AI FOCUS (AI Focus AF)............... 99

AI SERVO (AI Servo AF) ............... 98

AI Servo AF ............................. 61, 98

Ambience-based shots .................. 77

Aperture-priority AE ..................... 112

Art bold effect....................... 154, 276

Aspect ratio ..................................157

Audio/video OUT ..................252, 265

Auto Lighting Optimizer ...............125

Auto playback ..............................258

Auto power off........................ 34, 205

Auto reset .................................... 209

Auto rotate of vertical images ...... 212

Autofocus............................... 97, 100

Automatic selection of AF point ....100

Av (Aperture-priority AE).............. 112

A/V OUT .............................. 252, 265

B

B/W (Monochrome) ............... 96, 134

Background music........................ 261

Basic Zone modes ........................ 24

Battery ............................... 28, 30, 35

Battery check ................................ 35

Battery Grip ........................... 35, 316

Beeper......................................... 204

Black-and-white image.... 77, 96, 134

Bracketing ........................... 121, 140

Brightness (exposure) ..................119Auto exposure bracketing

(AEB) .............................. 121, 298Autoexposure lock (AE lock)... 123Exposure compensation ..........119Measurement method

(Metering mode) .......................117

Built-in flash.................................. 107

BULB (Bulb exposure) ................. 116

Bulb exposures .............................116

C

C (Creative Auto)........................ 64

Cable....... 3, 262, 265, 280, 316, 362

Camera

Camera shake ........................ 142

Clear camera settings............. 214

Holding the camera................... 42

Settings display....................... 213

Camera shake......................... 41, 42

Card .................................. 17, 31, 48

Card reminder......................... 204

Format ...................................... 48

Low-level format ....................... 49

Problem .............................. 32, 49

SD speed class....................... 173

Write-protect .............................. 31

Center-weighted averagemetering .......................................118

Charger ................................... 26, 28

Chromatic aberration correction.. 130


AF point ....................................... 100

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AF point ....................................... 100


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


AI Servo AF ............................. 61, 98

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AI Servo AF ............................. 61, 98


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Art bold effect....................... 154, 276www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Art bold effect....................... 154, 276

Brightness (exposure) ..................119

www.devic

eman

uals.

euBrightness (exposure) ..................119

Auto exposure bracketing

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAuto exposure bracketing (AEB) .............................. 121, 298

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu (AEB) .............................. 121, 298Autoexposure lock (AE lock)... 123

www.devic

eman

uals.

euAutoexposure lock (AE lock)... 123Exposure compensation ..........119

www.devic

eman

uals.

euExposure compensation ..........119Measurement method

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMeasurement method

(Metering mode) .......................117

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

(Metering mode) .......................117

Built-in flash.................................. 107

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Built-in flash.................................. 107


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Bulb exposures .............................116

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Bulb exposures .............................116

383

Index

Cleaning (Image sensor) ......223, 226

Clear camera settings.................. 214

Close-ups....................................... 69

Color space (color reproductionrange)........................................... 141

Color temperature ........................ 137

Color tone .................................... 133

Continuous................................... 208

Continuous shooting .................... 104

Contrast ....................................... 133

Copyright information ...................210

Creative Auto ................................. 64

Creative filters ...................... 152, 274

M icon..............................................4

Creative Zone modes..................... 24

Cropping (printing) ........................287

Custom Functions........................ 296

Custom WB.................................. 137

D

Date/Time ...................................... 36

Daylight saving time....................... 37

DC coupler ................................... 306

Depth-of-field preview.................. 114

Dial .........................................20, 109

Digital terminal ..................... 280, 362

Dioptric adjustment ........................ 42

Direct printing............................... 292

DPOF........................................... 289

Dragging ........................................ 54

Drive mode............... 22, 66, 104, 106

Dust Delete Data.......................... 224

E

Erase (image) .............................. 268

Error codes .................................. 337

Evaluative metering ..................... 117

Exposure compensation .............. 119

Exposure level increments........... 298

Extension ......................................209

External Speedlite ....................... 309

Eyecup ........................................ 308

Eye-Fi card .................................. 311

Eyepiece cover...................... 27, 308

F

Faithful............................................ 96

FE lock ........................................ 124

Feature guide ................................ 52

FEB ............................................. 220

File name..................................... 208

File size ......................... 89, 186, 270

Filter effect........................... 134, 274

Final image simulation.......... 150, 181

Fine (Image-recording quality) ....... 22

Firmware Ver. .............................. 321

First-curtain synchronization ....... 221

Fish-eye effect..................... 154, 276

Flash

Built-in flash ............................ 107Custom Functions ................... 222Effective range ........................ 107External Speedlite ................... 309FE lock .................................... 124Flash control ........................... 218Flash exposure compensation........................... 120Flash off ........................ 63, 66, 76Flash-sync speed.................... 310Manual flash.................... 221, 239Red-eye reduction................... 108Shutter synchronization(1st/2nd curtain) ...................... 221Wireless .................................. 229

Flash exposure compensation .... 120

Flash mode.......................... 220, 221

Flash-sync contacts....................... 20

Focus confirmation light ................ 58

Focus lock ..................................... 61

Focus mode switch......... 39, 103, 170






Date/Time ...................................... 36

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Date/Time ...................................... 36


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


DC coupler ................................... 306

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

DC coupler ................................... 306


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Dial .........................................20, 1

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Dial .........................................20, 1

Digital terminal ..................... 280, 362www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Digital terminal ..................... 280, 362

Dioptric adjustment ........................ 42www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Dioptric adjustment ........................ 42

File size ......................... 89, 186, 270

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFile size ......................... 89, 186, 270

Filter effect........................... 134, 274

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFilter effect........................... 134, 274

Final image simulation.......... 150, 181

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFinal image simulation.......... 150, 181

Fine (Image-recording quality) ....... 22

www.devic

eman

uals.

euFine (Image-recording quality) ....... 22

Firmware Ver. .............................. 321

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Firmware Ver. .............................. 321


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Fish-eye effect..................... 154, 276

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Fish-eye effect..................... 154, 276

384

Index

Focusing

AF method .......................159, 196AF operation.............................. 97AF point selection.................... 100AF-assist beam ............... 101, 300Beeper .....................................204Difficult-to-focussubjects ...................103, 165, 202Manual focusing ..............103, 170Out of focus ..........41, 42, 103, 165Recompose ...............................61

Folder Create/Select.................... 206

Format (card initialization) ............. 48

Frame rate ...................................185

Full Auto

(Scene Intelligent Auto) ................. 58

Full High-Definition

(Full HD) ..............................185, 252

G

Grainy B/W .......................... 154, 275

Grid display.......................... 156, 198

H

Handheld Night Scene ...................73

HDMI.................................... 252, 262

HDMI CEC ...................................263

HDR Backlight Control................... 74

High ISO speed noise reduction .. 126

High-Definition (HD) .............185, 252

Highlight alert............................... 272

Highlight detail loss...................... 272

Highlight tone priority ...................299

Histogram (Brightness/RGB) .......272

Hot shoe ......................................309

Household power......................... 306

I

ICC profile.................................... 141

ImageAuto playback ......................... 258Auto rotate .............................. 212Erase ...................................... 268Highlight alert .......................... 272Histogram ............................... 272Image characteristics (Picture Style) .......... 95, 132, 135Index ....................................... 242Jump display (Image browsing) .................... 243Magnified view ........................ 244Manual rotate .......................... 247No. .......................................... 208Playback ........................... 84, 241Protect .................................... 266Rating ..................................... 248Review time ............................ 204Shooting information............... 270Slide show .............................. 258Transfer.................................... 311View on TV ..................... 252, 262

Image conversion factor................. 40

Image dust prevention. 223, 224, 226

Image review ............................... 204

Image Stabilizer (lens)................... 41

Image Zone ................................... 24

Image-recording quality................. 88

Index display ............................... 242

ISO speed ..................................... 92Automatic setting (Auto) ........... 93ISO expansion ........................ 298Maximum ISO speed with ISO Auto .................................... 94

J

JPEG............................................. 89

Jump display ............................... 243

L

Landscape............................... 68, 96

Language selection ....................... 38

Large (Image-recording quality) ..... 22





Grainy B/W .......................... 154, 275

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Grainy B/W .......................... 154, 275

Grid display.......................... 156, 198

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Grid display.......................... 156, 198


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


HDMI.................................... 252, 262

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

HDMI.................................... 252, 262

HDMI CEC ...................................263www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

HDMI CEC ...................................263

HDR Backlight Control................... 74www.de

vicem

anua

ls.eu

HDR Backlight Control................... 74

No. .......................................... 208

www.devic

eman

uals.

euNo. .......................................... 208Playback ........................... 84, 241

www.devic

eman

uals.

euPlayback ........................... 84, 241Protect .................................... 266

www.devic

eman

uals.

euProtect .................................... 266Rating ..................................... 248

www.devic

eman

uals.

euRating ..................................... 248Review time ............................ 204

www.devic

eman

uals.

euReview time ............................ 204Shooting information............... 270

www.devic

eman

uals.

euShooting information............... 270Slide show .............................. 258

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Slide show .............................. 258Transfer.................................... 311

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Transfer.................................... 311View on TV ..................... 252, 262

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

View on TV ..................... 252, 262


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


385

Index

LCD monitor................................... 17

Brightness adjustment ............. 205

Image playback ................. 84, 241

Menu screen...................... 46, 318

Screen color ............................ 217

Shooting settings display..... 22, 50

Vari-Angle ............................ 33, 62

Lens ......................................... 25, 39

Chromatic aberration

correction................................. 130

Image stabilizer ......................... 41

Lock release .............................. 40

Peripheral illumination

correction................................. 129

Light/scene-based shots ................81

Live View shooting .................62, 145

Aspect ratio ..............................157

Continuous AF .........................156

Creative filters ..........................152

Face+Tracking......................... 159

FlexiZone - Multi ...................... 161

FlexiZone - Single.................... 162

Grid display ..............................156

Information display .................. 148

Manual focusing .............. 103, 170

Metering timer.......................... 158

Possible shots ......................... 147

Quick Control ...........................151

Quick mode ............................. 166

Long exposure noise reduction.... 127

Long exposures ...........................116

M

M (Manual exposure) ...................115

Macro photography ........................ 69

Magnified view ..................... 170, 244

Malfunction ...................................324

Manual exposure ................. 115, 177

Manual focus (MF) ............... 103, 170

Manual reset ................................ 209

Manual selection (AF) .................. 100

Maximum burst........................ 89, 90

Medium (Image-recording quality).................................... 22, 278

Memory card → Card

Menu ............................................. 46My Menu ................................. 303Setting procedure...................... 47Settings ................................... 318

3 icon........................................ 4

Metering mode ............................ 117

Metering timer ..................... 158, 198

MF (Manual focusing).......... 103, 170

Microphone................................... 174

Miniature effect.................... 155, 276

Mirror lockup........................ 142, 300

Mode Dial ...................................... 24

Monochrome ................... 77, 96, 134

Movie........................................... 173AF method ...................... 184, 196Attenuator ............................... 199Autoexposure.......................... 174Edit.......................................... 256Editing out first and last scenes .............................. 256Enjoying .................................. 252File size................................... 186Frame rate .............................. 185Grid display ............................. 198Information display.................. 179Manual exposure .................... 177Manual focusing...................... 174Metering timer ......................... 198Movie recording size ............... 185Movie Servo AF ...................... 196Playback ................................. 254Quick Control .......................... 184Recording time........................ 186Sound recording............... 187, 198Still photo shooting.................. 182Video snapshot ....................... 187Video snapshot album ............ 187View on TV...................... 252, 262Wind filter ................................ 199


Face+Tracking......................... 159

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Face+Tracking......................... 159

FlexiZone - Multi ...................... 161

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

FlexiZone - Multi ...................... 161


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Grid display ..............................156

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Grid display ..............................156


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Manual focusing .............. 103, 170

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Manual focusing .............. 103, 170

Metering timer.......................... 158

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Metering timer.......................... 158

Possible shots ......................... 147

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Possible shots ......................... 147

Quick Control ...........................151www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Quick Control ...........................151

Quick mode ............................. 166www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Quick mode ............................. 166

MF (Manual focusing).......... 103, 170

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMF (Manual focusing).......... 103, 170

Microphone................................... 174

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMicrophone................................... 174

Miniature effect.................... 155, 276

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMiniature effect.................... 155, 276

Mirror lockup........................ 142, 300

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMirror lockup........................ 142, 300

Mode Dial ...................................... 24

www.devic

eman

uals.

euMode Dial ...................................... 24

Monochrome ................... 77, 96, 134

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Monochrome ................... 77, 96, 134

Movie........................................... 173

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Movie........................................... 173AF method ...................... 184, 196

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

AF method ...................... 184, 196

386

Index

Multi Shot Noise Reduction ..........126

My Menu...................................... 303

N

Neutral ...........................................96

Night Portrait.................................. 72

Night scene ..............................72, 73

Noise reductionHigh ISO speed ....................... 126Long exposures .......................127

Nomenclature ................................ 20

Non-Canon flash units ................. 310

Normal (Image-recording quality) ...22

NTSC................................... 185, 320

O

ONE SHOT (One-Shot AF) ............98

One-Shot AF ..................................98

P

P (Program AE) ............................. 86

PAL ...................................... 185, 320

Paper settings (printing)............... 282

Partial metering............................ 117

Peripheral illumination correction ..................................... 129

Personal white balance................ 138

Photobook Set-up ........................293

PictBridge .................................... 279

Picture Style ...................95, 132, 135

Pixels ............................................. 88

Playback ................................ 84, 241

Portrait ..................................... 67, 95

Possible shots.................. 35, 88, 147

PowerAuto power off ......................... 205Battery check..............................35Household power .................... 306Possible shots .............35, 88, 147Recharge................................... 28

Predictive (AI Servo)...................... 98

Pressing completely ...................... 43

Pressing halfway ........................... 43

Printing ........................................ 279Cropping .................................. 287Layout ..................................... 283Paper settings......................... 282Photobook Set-up .................... 293Print Order (DPOF)................. 289Printing effects ........................ 284Tilt correction .......................... 287

Program AE................................... 86

Program shift ................................. 87

Protect (image erase-protection) ............. 266

Q

Q (Quick Control) ........... 44, 76, 151, 184, 250

Quick Control ................................ 76

Quick mode ................................. 166

R

Rating mark ................................. 248

RAW......................................... 22, 91

RAW+JPEG ............................. 22, 91

Recharge....................................... 28

Red-eye reduction....................... 108

Release shutter without card....... 204

Remote control shooting ............. 307

Remote switch ............................. 308

Resize ......................................... 277

Revert to default settings ............ 214

Rotate (image) ............ 212, 247, 287

S

Safety warnings........................... 349

Saturation .................................... 133

Scene icon ........................... 149, 176

SD, SDHC, SDXC card → Card

Second-curtain synchronization .. 221

Self-timer ..................................... 106

Sensor cleaning .................. 223, 226

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu








P (Program AE) ............................. 86

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

P (Program AE) ............................. 86

PAL ...................................... 185, 320

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

PAL ...................................... 185, 320


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


correction ..................................... 129

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

correction ..................................... 129

Personal white balance................ 138www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Personal white balance................ 138

Photobook Set-up ........................293www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Photobook Set-up ........................293

(image erase-protection) ............. 266

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu(image erase-protection) ............. 266

(Quick

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu (Quick

Control) ........... 44, 76, 151, 184, 250

www.devic

eman

uals.

euControl) ........... 44, 76, 151, 184, 250

Quick Control ................................ 76

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Quick Control ................................ 76

Quick mode ................................. 166

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Quick mode ................................. 166

R

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

R

387

Index

Sepia (Monochrome) ............. 77, 134

Sharpness ....................................133

Shooting information display........ 270

Shooting mode............................... 24Av (Aperture-priority AE) ......... 112M (Manual exposure)............... 115P (Program AE) ......................... 86Tv (Shutter-priority AE)............ 110A (Scene Intelligent Auto) ...... 587 (Flash Off)............................ 63C (Creative Auto) .................... 642 (Portrait) ............................... 673 (Landscape) ........................ 684 (Close-up)............................. 695(Sports)................................. 70SCN (Special scene) ................. 71

6 (Night Portrait).................. 72F (Handheld Night Scene) ...73G (HDR Backlight Control) .. 74

Shooting mode’s settable functions....................................... 314

Shooting settings display ......... 22, 50

Shutter button ................................43

Shutter synchronization ............... 221

Shutter-priority AE........................ 110

Single shooting ...................... 66, 315

Single-image display ......................84

Single-point AF ............................100

Slide show.................................... 258

Small (Image-recording quality) ....................................22, 278

Soft focus ............................. 154, 275

Software................................... 3, 364

Speaker........................................ 254

Special scene mode....................... 71

Sports............................................. 70

Spot metering............................... 117

sRGB ........................................... 141

Stopped-down aperture ............... 114

Strap .............................................. 27

System map .................................316

T

Tap (Touch).................................... 53

Temperature warning........... 171, 200

Time zone...................................... 36

Tone priority................................. 299

Toning effect (Monochrome)........ 134

Touch beeping ............................... 54

Touch screen ........... 21, 53, 245, 255

Touch shutter............................... 168

Toy camera effect ................ 155, 276

Tripod socket ................................. 21

Tv (Shutter-priority AE)................ 110

U

USB (Digital) terminal.......... 280, 362

V

Vari-Angle LCD monitor ........... 33, 62

Video snapshot............................ 187

Video snapshot album................. 187

Video system ............... 185, 265, 320

View on TV .......................... 252, 262

Viewfinder...................................... 23

Dioptric adjustment ................... 42

Volume (Movie playback) ............ 255

W

Water painting effect ............ 154, 276

WB (White balance) .................... 137

White balance.............................. 137

Bracketing ............................... 140

Correction ............................... 139

Custom.................................... 137

Personal .................................. 138

Wind filter .................................... 199

Wireless flash shooting ............... 229

Custom wireless shooting ....... 234

Easy wireless shooting ........... 231









functions....................................... 314

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

functions....................................... 314


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Shutter button ................................43

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Shutter button ................................43


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu



www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Single shooting ...................... 66, 315

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Single shooting ...................... 66, 315


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


Single-point AF ............................100www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Single-point AF ............................100

Slide show.................................... 258www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

Slide show.................................... 258

Tripod socket ................................. 21

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTripod socket ................................. 21

Tv (Shutter-priority AE)................ 110

www.devic

eman

uals.

euTv (Shutter-priority AE)................ 110

USB (Digital) terminal.......... 280, 362

www.devic

eman

uals.

euUSB (Digital) terminal.......... 280, 362

V

www.devic

eman

uals.

eu

V


www.devic

eman

uals.

eu


CEL-ST9QA210 © CANON INC. 2013 PRINTED IN THE EU

The lenses and accessories mentioned in this Instruction Manual are current as of January 2013. For information on the camera’s compatibility with any lenses and accessories introduced after this date, contact any Canon Service Center.

CANON INC.

30-2 Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan

Europe, Africa & Middle East

CANON EUROPA N.V.

PO Box 2262, 1180 EG Amstelveen, The Netherlands

For your local Canon office, please refer to your warranty card or to www.canon-europe.com/Support

The product and associated warranty are provided in European countries by Canon Europa N.V.


INSTRUCTION MANUAL ENGLISHgsmedia.weebly.com/.../54742287/canon_eos_700d-en_manual.pdf ·...

Documents

Transcript of INSTRUCTION MANUAL ENGLISHgsmedia.weebly.com/.../54742287/canon_eos_700d-en_manual.pdf ·...